2014 C-MAX HYBRID | C-MAX ENERGI Owner’s Manual

2014 C-MAX HYBRID | C-MAX ENERGI Owner’s Manual
fordowner.com ford.ca

EM5J 19A321 FA | November 2013 | First Printing | Owner’s Manual | C-MAX Hybrid | Energi | Litho in U.S.A.

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2013

All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20131007211151

Table of Contents

Introduction Driver Knee Airbag.........................................39
About This Manual...........................................7 Safety Canopy™............................................39
Symbols Glossary.............................................7 Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.........41
Data Recording..................................................9 Airbag Disposal...............................................42
California Proposition 65..............................11
Perchlorate.........................................................11 Keys and Remote Controls
Ford Credit..........................................................11 General Information on Radio
Frequencies..................................................43
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................11 Remote Control..............................................43
Special Notices................................................12 Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control...........................................................48
Mobile Communications
Equipment.....................................................12
Export Unique Options..................................13 MyKey™
Principle of Operation..................................49
Child Safety Creating a MyKey...........................................50
General Information.......................................14 Clearing All MyKeys.......................................50
Installing Child Seats.....................................15 Checking MyKey System Status..............50
Booster Seats...................................................21 Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................51
Child Seat Positioning..................................23
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................52
Child Safety Locks.........................................24
Locks
Safety Belts
Locking and Unlocking.................................55
Principle of Operation..................................26
Manual Liftgate..............................................59
Fastening the Safety Belts..........................27
Power Liftgate................................................60
Safety Belt Height Adjustment.................29
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime.............................................................30 Security
Safety Belt Minder.........................................30 Passive Anti-Theft System.........................63
Child Restraint and Safety Belt Anti-Theft Alarm............................................64
Maintenance................................................32
Steering Wheel
Personal Safety System™ Adjusting the Steering Wheel...................65
Personal Safety System™..........................33 Audio Control..................................................65
Voice Control...................................................66
Supplementary Restraints Cruise Control.................................................66
System Information Display Control......................66
Principle of Operation..................................34
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................35 Wipers and Washers
Front Passenger Sensing System............36 Windshield Wipers........................................68
Side Airbags.....................................................38 Autowipers.......................................................68

1

C-MAX (CCG)

Table of Contents

Windshield Washers.....................................69 Seats
Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........70 Sitting in the Correct Position...................110
Head Restraints.............................................110
Lighting Manual Seats..................................................112
Lighting Control................................................71 Power Seats.....................................................113
Autolamps..........................................................71 Rear Seats........................................................115
Instrument Lighting Dimmer......................72 Heated Seats...................................................115
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................73 Rear Seat Armrest.........................................116
Daytime Running Lamps.............................73
Front Fog Lamps.............................................73 Universal Garage Door
Direction Indicators........................................73 Opener
Interior Lamps..................................................73 Universal Garage Door Opener.................117
Ambient Lighting............................................75
Auxiliary Power Points
Windows and Mirrors Auxiliary Power Points.................................121
Power Windows..............................................76
Global Opening................................................77 Storage Compartments
Exterior Mirrors.................................................77 Center Console..............................................123
Interior Mirror....................................................79 Overhead Console........................................123
Sun Visors.........................................................79
Sun Shades......................................................79 Starting and Stopping the
Engine
Instrument Cluster General Information....................................124
Gauges................................................................81 Ignition Switch...............................................124
Warning Lamps and Indicators.................83 Keyless Starting.............................................124
Audible Warnings and Indicators.............87 Starting a Gasoline Engine........................125
Engine Block Heater.....................................127
Information Displays
General Information.....................................88 Unique Driving Character-
Information Messages.................................98 istics
Hybrid Electric Vehicle................................129
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control......................105 Fuel and Refueling
Hints on Controlling the Interior Safety Precautions.......................................135
Climate.........................................................107 Fuel Quality.....................................................136
Heated Windows and Mirrors..................107 Running Out of Fuel.....................................137
Cabin Air Filter...............................................108 Refueling..........................................................138
Remote Start.................................................108 Fuel Consumption........................................142
Emission Control System..........................143

2

C-MAX (CCG)

Table of Contents

High Voltage Battery Towing
General Information....................................146 Towing a Trailer.............................................182
Charging the High Voltage Battery........148 Transporting the Vehicle............................182
High Voltage Battery Cut-Off Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels......182
Switch............................................................151
Driving Hints
Transmission Breaking-In.....................................................184
Automatic Transmission............................153 Economical Driving......................................184
Driving Through Water................................185
Brakes Floor Mats.......................................................186
General Information....................................156
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Roadside Emergencies
Brakes............................................................157
Roadside Assistance...................................187
Parking Brake..................................................157
Hazard Warning Flashers..........................188
Hill Start Assist..............................................157
Fuel Shutoff...................................................188
Jump-Starting the Vehicle........................188
Traction Control
Collision, Damage or Fire Event...............191
Principle of Operation.................................159
Post-Crash Alert System...........................193
Using Traction Control................................159
Customer Assistance
Stability Control
Getting the Services You Need...............194
Principle of Operation................................160
In California (U.S. Only).............................195
Using Stability Control................................161
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................196
Parking Aids Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Parking Aid......................................................162 Program (Canada Only)........................196
Active Park Assist.........................................164 Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Rear View Camera.......................................168 Canada.........................................................197
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.....................................................198
Cruise Control
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Principle of Operation..................................171 Only).............................................................198
Using Cruise Control.....................................171 Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only).............................................................199
Driving Aids
Steering.............................................................173 Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart..........................200
Load Carrying Changing a Fuse...........................................207
Rear Under Floor Storage..........................174
Luggage Covers.............................................174 Maintenance
Load Limit........................................................175 General Information...................................209

3

C-MAX (CCG)

Table of Contents

Opening and Closing the Hood.............209 Tire Pressure Monitoring System..........259
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L Hybrid......210 Technical Specifications...........................263
Engine Oil Dipstick........................................212
Engine Oil Check...........................................212 Capacities and Specific-
Engine Coolant Check.................................213 ations
Automatic Transmission Fluid Engine Specifications................................265
Check.............................................................217 Motorcraft Parts..........................................266
Brake Fluid Check..........................................217 Vehicle Identification Number................267
Power Steering Fluid Check......................217 Vehicle Certification Label.......................267
Washer Fluid Check......................................217 Transmission Code Designation............268
Fuel Filter..........................................................217 Technical Specifications..........................269
Changing the 12V Battery..........................218
Checking the Wiper Blades......................219 Audio System
Changing the Wiper Blades......................219 General Information....................................272
Adjusting the Headlamps..........................221 Audio unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
Removing a Headlamp..............................222 SYNC.............................................................273
Changing a Bulb...........................................222 Audio unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD..........................................................275
Bulb Specification Chart...........................227
Audio unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/
Changing the Engine Air Filter.................229 CD...................................................................277
Digital Radio..................................................280
Vehicle Care Satellite Radio..............................................282
General Information....................................232 Audio Input Jack...........................................285
Cleaning Products.......................................232 USB Port.........................................................285
Cleaning the Exterior..................................232 Media Hub......................................................286
Waxing.............................................................233
Cleaning the Engine....................................233 SYNC™
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper General Information...................................287
Blades..........................................................234
Using Voice Recognition...........................289
Cleaning the Interior...................................234
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone.............291
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens.......................234 SYNC™ Applications and Services......302
Cleaning Leather Seats.............................235 Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player...........................................................308
Repairing Minor Paint Damage..............236
SYNC™ Troubleshooting..........................316
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels.......................236
Vehicle Storage............................................236
MyFord Touch™
Wheels and Tires General Information....................................322
Settings...........................................................330
Temporary Mobility Kit..............................239
Entertainment...............................................341
Tire Care..........................................................245
Phone...............................................................359
Using Snow Chains.....................................259

4

C-MAX (CCG)

Table of Contents

Electric Vehicle Information....................364
Information.....................................................375
Climate............................................................384
Navigation......................................................387

Accessories
Accessories....................................................397

Appendices
End User License Agreement.................399

Ford Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)........414

Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information.........417
Normal Scheduled Maintenance...........421
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance.............................................424
Scheduled Maintenance Record............427

5

C-MAX (CCG)

6

C-MAX (CCG)

flames or sparks This manual may qualify the location of a component as left-hand side or right-hand side. Anti-lock braking system Note: Pass on this manual when selling your vehicle. We recommend that you take some time to get to know your vehicle by reading this manual. The more that you know about it. Air conditioning system Note: Always use and operate your vehicle in line with all applicable laws and E162384 regulations. Note: This manual describes product features and options available throughout SYMBOLS GLOSSARY the range of available models. sometimes These are some of the symbols you may even before they are generally available. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in E154903 loss of vehicle control. may describe options not fitted to your vehicle. Avoid smoking. the essential information in the illustrations is always correct. the greater the safety and pleasure you will get from driving it. environment. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any handheld device Protecting the Environment while driving and encourage the use of You must play your part in protecting the voice-operated systems when possible. Correct vehicle usage and Make sure you are aware of all applicable the authorized disposal of waste. It is an integral part of the vehicle. crash and injury. It see on your vehicle. so may appear different to you on your See Owner's Manual vehicle. 7 C-MAX (CCG) . steps toward this aim. cleaning local laws that may affect the use of and lubrication materials are significant electronic devices while driving. Introduction ABOUT THIS MANUAL Thank you for choosing Ford. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any A Right-hand side device that may take your focus off the B Left-hand side road. The side is determined when facing forward in the seat. Safety alert Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual may be used for different models. However.

non petroleum Fan warning based Brake system Fasten safety belt Cabin air filter Front airbag Check fuel cap Front fog lamps Child safety door lock or unlock Fuel pump reset Child seat lower anchor Fuse compartment Child seat tether anchor Hazard warning flashers Cruise control Heated rear window E71340 Do not open when hot Heated windshield E91392 Engine air filter Interior luggage compartment release Engine coolant Jack Engine coolant temperature Keep out of reach of children E161353 Lighting control 8 C-MAX (CCG) . Introduction Battery Engine oil Battery acid Explosive gas Brake fluid .

typically 30 seconds or less. only (if equipped). Parking aid Ford of Canada. Stability control this data will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. See SYNC™ (page 287). Note operating instructions This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle. you consent that certain diagnostic Power window lockout information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities. Ford Motor Company. in Shield the eyes certain crash or near crash-like situations. The main purpose of an event data recorder is to record. when your vehicle is in for service or repair. The event data recorder is designed to Windshield wash and wipe record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time. and service and repair facilities may access or share among them E139213 vehicle diagnostic information received Parking brake through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle. Introduction Low tire pressure warning DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Maintain correct fluid level Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle. if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report. Ford Motor Company. Power windows front/rear For U. Power steering fluid Ford of Canada. such as an airbag E167012 deployment or hitting a road obstacle. steering or brake systems.S. In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle. Additionally. such Panic alarm as engine. Event Data Recording Side airbag This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder. and service and repair facilities may access or share among them data for vehicle improvement purposes. throttle. 9 C-MAX (CCG) . and that the diagnostic information may be used Service engine soon for any purpose.

services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an This data can help provide a better airbag or. or business searches parties. this information.. location. only). equipped) is enabled (set ON). Directions and Information (if data routinely acquired during a crash equipped. U. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist Note: Event data recorder data is may also be capable of being used to recorded by your vehicle only if a electronically or verbally provide to 911 non-trivial crash situation occurs. Other parties may seek to access the information independently • Whether or not the driver and of Ford Motor Company and Ford of passenger safety belts were Canada. 911 Assist and may. and/or other under normal driving conditions and no details about the vehicle or crash or personal data or information (e. name. disclose to emergency the steering wheel. Note: Including to the extent that any • How far (if at all) the driver was law pertaining to Event Data Recorders depressing the accelerator and/or applies to SYNC or its features. through any paired and connected • Where the driver was positioning cell phone. Ford Motor Company and the Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent. such as law enforcement. service. the service uses investigation. do not activate the 911 parties. in certain vehicles. combine the event data recorder data Additionally. such as law enforcement. can read Ford or its vendors to receive this the information if they have access to information.g. personal information about the gender. please the brake pedal. is designed to record such data as: other government authorities or other • How various systems in your vehicle third parties acting with lawful were operating. If you do not want have such special equipment. age. authority. travel direction. the understanding of the circumstances in activation of the fuel pump shut-off. only to data recorder is needed. and speed and access to the vehicle or the event (“vehicle travel information”). could Assist feature. no data operators the vehicle location (such as is recorded by the event data recorder latitude and longitude). If you do not want to disclose Information privacy below). However. that that you request. buckled/fastened. do not activate the the vehicle or the event data recorder. GPS technology and advanced vehicle To read data recorded by an event data sensors to collect the vehicle’s current recorder. In addition to help provide you with the directions. directions and services.S. and note the following: Once 911 Assist (if • How fast the vehicle was traveling. and crash location) is occupants to assist 911 operators to recorded (see limitations regarding 911 provide the most appropriate emergency Assist and Traffic. which crashes and injuries occur. Introduction The event data recorder in this vehicle or where required by law enforcement. special equipment is required. unless pursuant to court order 10 C-MAX (CCG) . other traffic reports. when you connect to with the type of personally identifying Traffic. the vehicle manufacturer. See SYNC™ (page 287).

please information. travel information. During vehicle Ford Credit offers a full range of financing development we validate these parts and lease plans to help you acquire your deliver the intended level of protection as vehicle. A great way to know for vehicle through Ford Credit. If you have financed or leased your a whole system. See SYNC™ (page 287). For more information conform to the specifications detailed in visit: this Owner’s Manual. (U. Motorcraft branding on the parts or their packaging. Special is to have it maintained in line with our handling may apply for service or vehicle recommendations using parts that end of life disposal. thank you for sure you are getting this level of protection your business. genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts certain fluids contained in vehicles whenever your vehicle requires scheduled and certain products of component wear maintenance or repair.gov/hazardouswaste/ Collision Repairs perchlorate We hope that you never experience a collision. You can clearly contain or emit chemicals known to the identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts State of California to cause cancer and by looking for the Ford. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these Web Address specifications. is to use genuine Ford replacement collision parts.ca. FoMoCo or birth defects or other reproductive harm.com. Information.dtsc. For your convenience we offer a number of ways to contact us. Genuine FORD CREDIT Ford replacement collision parts meet our stringent requirements for fit.S. as well as help manage your account. PERCHLORATE Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical Repairs Certain components in your vehicle such as airbag modules. Only) structural integrity. 11 C-MAX (CCG) . www.fordcredit. certain vehicle components. Introduction vendors it uses to provide you with this Phone: 1-800-727-7000 information do not store your vehicle For more information regarding Ford Credit. finish. REPLACEMENT PARTS CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 RECOMMENDATION WARNING Your vehicle has been built to the highest standards using quality parts. We Some constituents of engine recommend that you demand the use of exhaust. see Traffic. Directions and go to www. safety belt One of the best ways for you to make sure pretensioners and remote control batteries that your vehicle provides years of service may contain perchlorate material. Terms and Conditions. but accidents do happen. For more as well as access Account Manager. corrosion protection and dent resistance.

own or others’ safety when using such Front seat mounted rear-facing child equipment. please read this Owner’s Guide carefully. As with other parts are the only replacement parts that vehicles of this type. Mobile communications can or infant seats should NEVER be enhance personal safety and security when placed in front of an active appropriately used. refer to the terms Using Your Vehicle With a and conditions of the Ford Warranty. Safety must be paramount when using mobile Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks communications equipment to avoid and Utility Type Vehicles negating these benefits. Manual. Your vehicle is not equipped with the Ford Special Instructions Ambulance Preparation Package. but WARNING is not limited to. failure to operate this benefit from a Ford Warranty. you must not compromise your (page 34). emergency situations. higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. particularly in passenger airbag. Your vehicle Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement is not a passenger car. your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls. vehicle rollover. portable email devices. personal failure of non-Ford parts may not be injury or death. pagers. For your added safety. Introduction Warranty on Replacement Parts Before you drive your vehicle. text messaging Utility vehicles have a significantly devices and portable two-way radios. See conduct of business and personal affairs. cellular phones. 12 C-MAX (CCG) . New Vehicle Limited Warranty Your vehicle is not equipped with a snowplowing package. Damage vehicle correctly may result in loss of caused to your vehicle as a result of the vehicle control. MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS WARNINGS EQUIPMENT Failure to follow the specific Using mobile communications equipment warnings and instructions could is becoming increasingly important in the result in personal injury. For additional information. Snowplow Do not use this vehicle for SPECIAL NOTICES snowplowing. Ambulance refer to the Warranty Manual that is Do not use this vehicle as an provided to you along with your Owner’s ambulance. Mobile communication equipment includes. For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your Using Your Vehicle as an vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Supplementary Restraints System However. covered by the Ford Warranty.

A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. you can properly identify those features. your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner’s Manual. Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export. if provided. Introduction WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. crash and injury.S. EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS For your particular global region. This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for the U. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle. and Canadian Markets. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. 13 C-MAX (CCG) . Refer to this Owner’s Manual for all other required information and warnings. By referring to the market unique supplement.

bought separately from your vehicle. age. Failure to properly from National Highway Traffic Safety restrain children in safety seats made Administration and other safety especially for their height. In Canada. and weight organizations.gov. or restraints are based on probable Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371 child height.nhtsa. check with your local St. contact your provincial of serious injury or death to your child. John Ambulance office by searching for The recommendations for safety St. age and free at 1-888-327-4236 or go to weight. Ford recommends See the following sections for directions checking with a NHTSA Certified Child on how to properly use safety restraints Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and for children. contact the NHTSA toll appropriate for their height. 14 C-MAX (CCG) . locate your local All children are shaped differently. To locate a child seat fitting secured properly in a device that is station and CPST.dot.ca).gc. St.tc. Child Safety GENERAL INFORMATION WARNINGS requirements of law. John Ambulance on the internet. or are the minimum may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child. John Ambulance Failure to follow these instructions and office for referral to a CPST or for further guidelines may result in an increased risk information. consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child. ministry of transportation. age and weight thresholds (http://www. and WARNINGS is compatible with and properly installed Always make sure your child is in your vehicle. Child safety restraints must be http://www.

and seat back upright. chest. See Front Passenger Sensing System (page 36). Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly E142594 restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position. or toddler seat). always properly restrain children 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle. a height of 4 feet 9 inches (1. height. booster seat. Child Safety Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Child Child size. 15 C-MAX (CCG) . Larger children Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a vehicle safety belt properly fit in a belt-positioning booster having the lap belt snug seat (generally children who are at least and low across the hips.45 m) tall or greater than 80 shoulder belt centered lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom. (1. Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements about the safety of children in your vehicle. or 80 pounds (36 kilograms). (1. • Many states and provinces require that Child Seats small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight. 9 in. • When possible. ally children who are less than 4 ft. are greater than age four and less than age 12. convertible seat. 9 in. (sometimes called an infant carrier. or age Recommended restraint type Infants or Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less Use a child safety seat toddlers (generally age four or younger). Small children Children who have outgrown or no longer Use a belt-positioning properly fit in a child safety seat (gener. weight. • You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in INSTALLING CHILD SEATS the United States and Canada.45 m) tall. 4 ft. across the shoulder and mended by child restraint manufacturer). and between 40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).45 meters) tall.

you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and LATCH lower anchors. Position the child safety seat in a seat they are able to be properly restrained. 16 C-MAX (CCG) . to prevent accidental unbuckling. Depending on where you secure a child restraint. a forward facing child seat. See Step 5. Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. with a combination lap and shoulder belt. 2. To avoid risk of injury. Never place a rear-facing Note: Although the child seat illustrated is child seat in front of an active airbag. does not require the use of a locking clip. move the seat all the way seat. • Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch. and depending on the child restraint design. This vehicle younger). When installing a child safety seat with combination lap and shoulder belts: • Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position. the steps are If you must use a forward-facing child seat the same for installing a rear facing child in the front seat. Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle. or child seat will be installed in the upright toddler seat) for infants. occupants E142528 should only use seating positions where 1. • Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat. Child Safety Use a child safety seat (sometimes called • Place the vehicle seat upon which the an infant carrier. Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in the rear seat whenever possible. Using Lap and Shoulder Belts Perform the following steps when WARNINGS installing the child seat with combination Airbags can kill or injure a child in a lap and shoulder belts: child seat. rendering those features potentially unusable. children weighing 40 pounds (18 • Put the safety belt in the automatic kilograms) or less (generally age four or locking mode. Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together. or position. convertible seat. with the tongue between the child E142529 seat and the release button. back. toddlers.

until all of the belt is pulled out. 6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack. To put the retractor in the automatic portions together. 4. Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it. Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted. E142533 17 C-MAX (CCG) . If the E142531 retractor is not locked. route the tongue locking mode. Note: The automatic locking mode is available on the front passenger and rear seats. grasp the shoulder through the child seat according to the portion of the belt and pull downward child seat manufacturer's instructions. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode (you should not be able to pull more belt out). Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from) for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage. unbuckle the belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6. The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode. 7. Child Safety E142530 E142875 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt 5.

the top tether strap must also 1 inch (2. To check this. anchors at the LATCH equipped seating forcibly move the seat forward and positions in your vehicle. Sometimes. and depending on the to remove remaining slack from the child restraint design. Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician to make certain the child restraint is properly installed. occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained. In Canada. It also helps to achieve the death. This is to the same anchor. 9. LATCH compatible child safety seats have E142534 two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower 10. by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while WARNINGS pulling up on the shoulder belt in order Never attach two child safety seats to force slack from the belt. For forward-facing back. John Ambulance office for referral to a Certified Passenger Seat Technician. seat at the belt path and attempt to however the safety belt can still be used move it side to side and forward and to attach the child seat. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat rendering those features potentially is equipped). you may block belt. Using Lower Anchors and Tethers Force the seat down with extra weight. Child Safety 8. This type of back to make sure the seat is securely attachment method eliminates the need held in place. access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies or LATCH lower anchors. a slight lean Depending on where you secure a toward the buckle will additionally help child restraint. one necessary to remove the remaining anchor may not be strong enough to slack that will exist once the extra hold two child safety seat attachments weight of the child is added to the child and may break. for CHildren (LATCH) for example. There should be no more than child seats. 18 C-MAX (CCG) . Remove remaining slack from the belt. unusable. causing serious injury or restraint. The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors located where seat back and seat cushion meet (called the seat bight) and one top tether anchor located behind that seating position. In a crash. if a top tether strap has been Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA provided with your child seat. grab the to use safety belts to attach the child seat. To avoid risk of injury. anchor. check with your local St.5 centimeters) of movement be attached to the proper top tether for proper installation. proper snugness of the child seat to your vehicle. Before placing the child in the seat.

Child Safety

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not
use LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit and
E142535
specify using anchors spaced at least as
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for far apart as those in this vehicle.
child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat The lower anchors at the center of the
symbol. second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches
(46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with
rigid LATCH attachments cannot be
installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with
attachments on belt webbing) can only be
used at this seating position provided that
the child seat manufacturer's instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached
to that anchor.
E144054 Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear lower anchors and tether anchor, if
section of the rear seat between the applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
cushion and seat back below the symbols side and forward and back where it is
as shown. Follow the child seat secured to your vehicle. The seat should
manufacturer's instructions to properly move less than one inch when you do this
install a child seat with LATCH for a proper installation.
attachments. Follow the instructions on
attaching child safety seats with tether If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
straps. the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.

19

C-MAX (CCG)

Child Safety

Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Perform the following steps to install a
Lower Anchors for Attaching Child child safety seat with tether anchors:
Safety Seats Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
When used in combination, either the LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors tether strap enough to lift the child seat off
may be attached first, provided a proper your vehicle seat cushion when the child is
installation is achieved. Attach the tether seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
strap afterward, if included with the child without lifting the front of the child seat.
seat. Keeping the child seat just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
Using Tether Straps severe crash.
Many forward-facing child safety 1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
seats include a tether strap over the back of the seat. For outboard
which extends from the back of seating positions, route the tether strap
the child safety seat and hooks to an under the head restraint and between
anchoring point called the top tether the head restraint posts. For the center
anchor. Tether straps are available as an seating positions, route the tether strap
accessory for many older safety seats. over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, the head restraints can also
Contact the manufacturer of your child be removed.
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from E161562
top view):
2. Locate the correct anchor on the back
panel of the rear seat for the selected
seating position. The anchors are
labeled with the tether strap symbol
and are partially covered by the gap
panel. Pull the panel back to fully
expose the anchors.

E142537

20

C-MAX (CCG)

Child Safety

recommended by your child restraint
manufacturer). Many state and provincial
laws require that children use approved
booster seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall,
or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:

E161563

3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions. If your child restraint
system is equipped with a tether strap,
and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, Ford also
recommends its use. E142595

• Can the child sit all the way back
BOOSTER SEATS against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
WARNING the seat cushion?
Never place, or allow a child to place, • Can the child sit without slouching?
the shoulder belt under a child's arm • Does the lap belt rest low across the
or behind the back because it hips?
reduces the protection for the upper part • Is the shoulder belt centered on the
of the body and may increase the risk of shoulder and chest?
injury or death in a crash.
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer Always use booster seats in conjunction
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and
80 pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to
100 pounds (45 kilograms) if

21

C-MAX (CCG)

Child Safety

Types of Booster Seats

E70710

E68924 • High back booster seats
• Backless booster seats If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
If your backless booster seat has a supports your child's head, a high back
removable shield, remove the shield. If a booster seat would be a better choice.
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless Children and booster seats vary in size and
booster seat may place your child's head shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
(as measured at the tops of the ears) lap belt low and snug across the hips,
above the top of the seat. In this case, never up across the stomach, and lets you
move the backless booster to another adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
seating position with a higher seat back or and rest snugly near the center of the
head restraint and lap and shoulder belts, shoulder. The following drawings compare
or consider using a high back booster seat. the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.

E142596

22

C-MAX (CCG)

Child Safety

E142597

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle WARNINGS
seat upon which it is being used, placing a warnings provided by your vehicle
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet manufacturer. A safety seat that is
liner under the booster seat may improve improperly installed or utilized, is
this condition. Do not introduce any item inappropriate for your child's height, age,
thicker than this under the booster seat. or weight or does not properly fit the child
Check with the booster seat may increase the risk of serious injury or
manufacturer's instructions. death.
Never let a passenger hold a child on
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
WARNINGS protect the child from injury in a crash,
which may result in serious injury or death.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing Never use pillows, books, or towels
child seat in front of an active airbag. to boost a child. They can slide
If you must use a forward-facing child seat around and increase the likelihood
in the front seat, move the vehicle seat of injury or death in a crash.
upon which the child seat is installed all Always restrain an unoccupied child
the way back. When possible, all children seat or booster seat. These objects
age 12 and under should be properly may become projectiles in a crash or
restrained in a rear seating position. If all sudden stop, which may increase the risk
children cannot be seated and restrained of serious injury.
properly in a rear seating position, properly
restrain the largest child in the front seat. Never place, or allow a child to place,
the shoulder belt under a child's arm
Always carefully follow the or behind the back because it
instructions and warnings provided reduces the protection for the upper part
by the manufacturer of any child of the body and may increase the risk of
restraint to determine if the restraint device injury or death in a crash.
is appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
manufacturer's instructions and warnings children or pets unattended in your
provided for installation and use in vehicle.
conjunction with the instructions and

23

C-MAX (CCG)

Child Safety

Restraint Combined Use any attachment method as indicated below by X
type weight of
child and LATCH LATCH Safety belt Safety belt Safety belt
child (lower (lower and top and LATCH only
restraint anchors anchors tether (lower
seat and top only) anchor anchors
tether and top
anchor) tether
anchor)

Rear facing Up to 65 lb X X
child seat (29.5 kg)
Rear facing Over 65 lb X
child seat (29.5 kg)
Forward Up to 65 lb X X X
facing (29.5 kg)
child seat
Forward Over 65 lb X X
facing (29.5 kg)
child seat

Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
110).

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.

E112197

The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.

24

C-MAX (CCG)

Child Safety

Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.

Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.

25

C-MAX (CCG)

Safety Belts

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION WARNINGS
Safety belts and seats can become
WARNINGS hot in a vehicle that has been closed
Always drive and ride with your up in sunny weather; they could burn
seatback upright and the lap belt a small child. Check seat covers and
snug and low across the hips. buckles before you place a child anywhere
near them.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be Front and rear seat occupants,
properly restrained. including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum
Never let a passenger hold a child on protection in an accident.
his or her lap while your vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash. All seating positions in this vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
All occupants of your vehicle, occupants of the vehicle should always
including the driver, should always properly wear their safety belts, even when
properly wear their safety belts, even an airbag supplemental restraint system
when an airbag supplemental restraint is provided.
system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
• lap and shoulder safety belts
cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in • shoulder safety belt with automatic
these areas are more likely to be seriously locking mode, (except driver safety
injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride belt)
in any area of your vehicle that is not • height adjuster at the front outboard
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be seating positions
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
• retractor and anchor pretensioner at
and using a safety belt properly.
the front outboard seating positions
In a rollover crash, an unbelted • belt tension sensor at the front
person is significantly more likely to outboard passenger seating position
die than a person wearing a safety
belt.
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and • safety belt warning light and chime
one tongue that are designed to be used
as a pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck over • crash sensors and monitoring system
the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a single with readiness indicator.
belt for more than one person.
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.

26

C-MAX (CCG)

near-frontal and side crashes. E142587 Restraint of Pregnant Women 1. properly fastened. the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or. Always ride and drive with your seat Make sure the tongue is securely back upright and the safety belt fastened in the buckle. The front outboard and rear safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. See the following figure. together with the front airbags. and in rollovers. In frontal crashes. The safety belt pretensioners on the retractor and anchor at the front seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant's body when activated. E142588 2. 27 C-MAX (CCG) . The shoulder portion of the safety belt should be positioned across the chest. The lap portion of the safety belt should fit snug and be positioned low across the hips. E142589 When in use. To unfasten. Safety Belts The safety belt pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal. Pregnant women should also follow this practice. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle (the buckle closest to the WARNING direction the tongue is coming from) until you hear a snap and feel it latch. if the crash is of sufficient severity. This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts. press the release button FASTENING THE SAFETY and remove the tongue from the BELTS buckle. the rear safety belts should be placed in the belt guides on the outboard seat backs.

or the vehicle be positioned low across the hips below receives an impact of approximately 5 mph the belly and worn as tight as comfort will (8 km/h) or more. See Child Safety (page 14). belt and retractor assembly could increase Children 12 years old and under should be the risk of injury in crashes. 28 C-MAX (CCG) . safety belt. the retractor is designed to lock if the webbing is pulled out too quickly. the shoulder belt is automatic locking retractor feature for automatically pre-locked. If Safety Belt Locking Modes this occurs. let the belt retract slightly and pull webbing out again in a slow and WARNINGS controlled manner. Belt and retractor assembly must be When to Use the Automatic Locking replaced if the safety belt assembly Mode automatic locking retractor feature or any other safety belt function is not This mode should be used any time a child operating properly when checked by an safety seat. available on the driver safety belt. In retract to remove any slack in the shoulder addition. The belt will still child seats is still functioning properly. The driver safety belt has the first type of locking mode. In addition. The lap belt portion of a For example. the combination safety allow. Safety Belts All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts. The shoulder belt should be belts will lock to help reduce forward positioned to cross the middle of the movement of the driver and passengers. is installed authorized dealer. The automatic locking mode is not for proper function. the safety belt system at all passenger seating Automatic Locking Mode positions must be checked by an authorized dealer to verify that the In this mode. and the front outboard passenger and rear seat safety belts have both types of locking modes described as follows: Vehicle Sensitive Mode This is the normal retractor mode. After any vehicle crash. properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible. if the driver brakes suddenly combination lap and shoulder belt should or turns a corner sharply. shoulder and the center of the chest. all safety belts should be checked belt. Failure to replace the in passenger front or rear seating positions. which allows free shoulder belt length E142590 adjustment to your movements and Pregnant women should always wear their locking in response to vehicle movement. except a booster.

As the belt retracts. This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode. How to Disengage the Automatic Locking Mode Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. a crash. use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended. or down. Failure to adjust the safety belt correctly 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull could reduce the effectiveness of the downward until the entire belt is pulled safety belt and increase the risk of injury in out. 29 C-MAX (CCG) . extended. Release the button and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is If the safety belt is too short when fully locked in place. Also. Allow the belt to retract. shoulder belt. Safety Belts How to Use the Automatic Locking Use only extensions manufactured by the Mode same supplier as the safety belt. Safety Belt Extension Assembly WARNING E87511 Do not use extensions to change the To adjust the shoulder belt height. a safety belt extension assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer. SAFETY BELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT WARNING E142591 Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests 1. you will hear a clicking sound. squeeze fit of the shoulder belt across the the button and slide the height adjuster up torso. Buckle the combination lap and across the middle of your shoulder. Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label.

. warning chime is sounding. passenger's seat is occupied and the If the Belt-Minder warnings have expired safety belt is unbuckled. The driver's safety belt is buckled while the The safety belt warning light and warning indicator light is illuminated and the chime turn off. 4-8 seconds. warnings will only reminders by intermittently sounding a be given to large front seat occupants as chime and illuminating the safety belt determined by the front passenger sensing warning light when the driver's or front system.. To avoid activating the This feature supplements the safety belt Belt-Minder feature for objects placed in warning function by providing additional the front passenger seat... chime remain off.. The driver's safety belt is not buckled The safety belt warning light illuminates 1- before the ignition switch is turned to the 2 minutes and the warning chime sounds on position.. The driver's safety belt is buckled before The safety belt warning light and indicator the ignition switch is turned to the on posi. Then. Safety Belts SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP This lamp illuminates and an audible warning will sound if the AND INDICATOR CHIME driver's safety belt has not been fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned on. the other occupant can still activate the Belt-Minder feature. (warnings for about five minutes) for one occupant (driver or front passenger). tion.. Conditions of operation If.. 30 C-MAX (CCG) .. The system uses information from the front passenger sensing system to SAFETY BELT MINDER determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need Belt-Minder® of a warning..

After proceeding with the programming Step 3. The driver's or front passenger's safety belt The Belt-Minder feature is activated . 31 C-MAX (CCG) . Safety Belts If. Turn the ignition on.4 thoroughly before ending in the unbuckled state. To reduce the risk of injury... activating one seating position.the becomes unbuckled for about one minute safety belt warning light illuminates and while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph the warning chime sounds for six seconds (9. do not deactivate or activate the system 2.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes the warning chime sounds for six seconds have elapsed since the ignition switch has every 30 seconds. The driver's or front passenger's safety belt The Belt-Minder feature is activated . turn on. After Step 2. wait an additional five seconds Note: The driver and front passenger before proceeding with Step 3.. this system is designed • the ignition is off to improve your chances of being • the driver and front passenger safety safely belted and surviving an accident. Read Steps 1 . buckle the other position as this will buckle then unbuckle the safety belt terminate the process.. three times at a moderate speed. Do not start the use the vehicle. repeating for about five been turned to on. Wait until the safety belt warning light while driving the vehicle. repeating for about five elapsed since the ignition switch has been minutes or until the safety belts are turned to on.. We recommend you leave the system activated for yourself and others who may 1. the procedure must independently.. When deactivating or be completed within 60 seconds. The driver's and front passenger's safety The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.the is not buckled when the vehicle has reached safety belt warning light illuminates and at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes have every 30 seconds.. buckled. do not 3. For the seating position being disabled. the safety belt warning light will procedure. belts are unbuckled.. Once warning are deactivated and activated Step 3 is started. minutes or until the safety belts are buckled. vehicle.. Before following the procedure. Then. turns off (about one minute). make sure Deactivating and Activating the that: Belt-Minder Feature • the parking brake is set WARNING • the transmission selector lever is in While the system allows you to position P deactivate it.. belts are buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position or less than 1-2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on.

After Step 4. While the safety belt warning light is on. shoulder belt height adjusters (if equipped). tears or cuts. including retractors. Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a crash be replaced. the safety belt warning light will flash for confirmation. Safety Belts 4. • This will enable the feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled. buckle support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped). front safety belt buckle assemblies. See Vehicle Care (page 232). Properly care for safety belts. Safety belt assemblies not in use during a crash should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Replace if necessary. buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt. Read the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint. and attaching hardware. 32 C-MAX (CCG) . buckles. CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY BELT MAINTENANCE Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged. However. All vehicle safety belt assemblies. shoulder belt guide on seat back (if equipped). • This will disable the feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled. if the crash was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly. child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors. Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks. should be inspected after a crash. they do not need to be replaced.

• Front passenger sensing system. • Front crash severity sensors. crash sensor(s). front safety belt usage sensors. and safety belt usage sensors. How Does the Personal Safety System Work? The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle’s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions. and indicator lights. A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the restraints control 33 C-MAX (CCG) . • Restraints control module with impact and safing sensors. front passenger sensing system. • Driver’s seat position sensor. • Passenger airbag off and on indicator lamp. energy management retractors (first row only). the restraints improved overall level of frontal crash control module may activate the safety protection to front seat occupants and is belt pretensioners and may activate either designed to help further reduce the risk of one or both stages of the dual-stage airbag airbag-related injuries. Your vehicle's Personal Safety System consists of: • Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag supplemental restraints. and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations. safety belt pretensioners. • Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners. • The electrical wiring for the airbags. The system is able supplemental restraints based on crash to analyze different occupant conditions severity and occupant conditions. Personal Safety System™ The Personal Safety System provides an module. driver seat position sensor. • Restraint system warning light and backup tone. During a crash.

gently. This is normal. Thus. there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures. repair. Airbags do not inflate slowly. in the front seat. cloud of harmless powdery residue if an including the driver. talcum powder Always transport children 12 years (to lubricate the bag) or sodium old and under in the back seat and compounds (for example. the airbag required. to the trim covering the airbag module. residue or smell the burnt propellant. modify the airbag supplemental particularly to occupants who are not restraint systems or its fuses as you properly restrained or are otherwise out of could be seriously injured or killed. but none of module as a deploying airbag can the residue is toxic. and the risk of injury from a there is a risk of injury from a deploying deploying airbag is the greatest close airbag. Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a All occupants of your vehicle. should always airbag deploys. in serious injury. properly wear their safety belts. or facial and eye injuries or internal injuries. After airbag deployment. move the seat upon which Because airbags must inflate rapidly and the child seat is installed all the way back. Do not touch away from the airbag module as possible them after inflation as this may result while maintaining vehicle control. your authorized dealer as soon as possible. with considerable force. Temporary hearing loss is also child seat in front of an active airbag. the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision. Routine maintenance of the airbags is not If the airbag has deployed. even when an airbag supplemental restraint The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly system is provided. 34 C-MAX (CCG) . Contact position at the time of airbag deployment. sodium hydroxide may be present which Never place your arm over the airbag may irritate the skin and eyes. Do not attempt to service. contact with a Airbags can kill or injure a child in a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions child seat. baking soda) always properly use appropriate that result from the combustion process child restraints. result in serious arm fractures or While the system is designed to help other injuries. will not function again and must be replaced immediately. Supplementary Restraints System PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The airbags are a supplemental restraint system and are designed to work with the WARNINGS safety belts to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper Airbags do not inflate slowly or body injuries. powdery the risk of injury or death. Never place a rear-facing or swelling. Failure to properly wear upon activation. your safety belt could seriously increase it is normal to notice a smoke-like. Small amounts of seriously increase the risk of injury or death. This may consist of cornstarch. If the airbag is not replaced. Failure to follow this could that inflates the airbag. a possibility as a result of the noise If you must use a forward-facing child seat associated with a deploying airbag. reduce serious injuries. it is extremely important that Several airbag system components occupants be properly restrained as far get hot after inflation.

and centered on the seat cushion. the child seat is installed all the way back. The driver and passenger front airbag WARNING system consists of: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a • driver and passenger airbag modules. Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event. with their feet comfortably extended on the floor. 35 C-MAX (CCG) . Never place a rear-facing • Move your seat to the rear as far as you child seat in front of an active airbag. move the seat upon which • Recline the seat slightly (one or two the child seat is installed all the way back. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 41). If you must use a forward-facing child seat · crash sensors and monitoring in the front seat. • front passenger sensing system. child seat. sits forward. After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts. it is very important that they continue to sit properly. can while still reaching the pedals If you must use a forward-facing child seat comfortably. degrees) from the upright position. or puts one or both feet up. Placing your recommends a minimum distance arm over a deploying airbag can of at least 10 inches (25 centimeters) result in serious arm fractures or other between an occupant’s chest and the injuries. To properly position yourself away from the airbag: Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat. Supplementary Restraints System DRIVER AND PASSENGER Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating Adjustment AIRBAGS WARNING WARNINGS National Highway Traffic Safety Never place your arm or any objects Administration (NHTSA) over an airbag module. move the seat upon which system with readiness indicator. airbag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the airbag into your face and torso causing serious injury. Objects placed on or over the driver airbag module. the E151127 chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased. in the front seat. The driver and front passenger airbags will deploy during significant frontal and near Children and Airbags frontal crashes. For example. if an occupant slouches. Never place a rear-facing child seat in front of an active airbag. leans forward or sideways. A properly seated occupant sits upright. leaning against the seat back. turns sideways. lies down.

or a death. Even with Advanced Restraints Systems. Accident statistics suggest that E145987 children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the The front passenger sensing system uses front seating position. or a booster seat is Sitting improperly out of position or detected. FRONT PASSENGER SENSING SYSTEM Note: When the ignition is first turned on. rear facing infant seat. 36 C-MAX (CCG) . with the seatback reclined too far parents are STRONGLY encouraged to can take off weight from the seat always properly restrain children in the rear cushion and affect the decision of the front seat. children 12 and under The front passenger sensing system is should be properly restrained in a designed to disable (will not inflate) the rear seating position. with your feet on the floor. resulting in passenger front airbag and seat-mounted serious injury or death in a crash. Even with this technology. Failure to follow this front passenger’s frontal airbag when the could seriously increase the risk of injury or front passenger seat is unoccupied. E142846 Children must always be properly restrained. Failure to follow a passenger airbag off indicator which will these instructions may increase the risk of illuminate and stay lit to remind you that injury in a crash. back. The sensor also turns off the passenger sensing system. Supplementary Restraints System This system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger’s seat and safety belt to detect the presence of a properly–seated occupant and determine if the front passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled (may inflate) or not. the passenger airbag off light will illuminate for a short period of time to confirm it is WARNINGS functional. a forward-facing child restraint. the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled. side airbag when the passenger seat is Always sit upright against your seat empty. The indicator lamp is located in the center stack of the instrument panel. Any alteration or modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system which could seriously increase the risk of injury or death.

if to avoid the risk of airbag deployment an occupant slouches. Supplementary Restraints System • When the front passenger sensing If a person of adult size is sitting in the front system disables (will not inflate) the passenger's seat. the status indicator lamp is lit. rear seat. or puts one or both feet up. it is very increased. remove the child person's legs comfortably extended. then turn centered on the seat cushion. sits forward. passenger’s frontal airbag anytime the • If the passenger airbag status indicator system senses that a person of adult size lamp remains lit even after this. the passenger airbag status indicator will not illuminate. the After all occupants have adjusted their chance of injury during a crash is greatly seats and put on safety belts. the is sitting properly in the front passenger person should be advised to ride in the seat. to place the seatback in the full upright • If the child restraint has been installed position. with their 37 C-MAX (CCG) . indicator does not illuminate. but the passenger airbag front passenger frontal airbag. This will allow the system to The front passenger sensing system is detect that person and enable the designed to enable (may inflate) the front passenger’s frontal airbag. turns injuries. with the the vehicle off. it is possible passenger airbag status indicator will that the person is not sitting properly in the illuminate and stay lit to remind you seat. lies down. For example. sideways. If this happens: that the front passenger frontal airbag • Turn the vehicle off and ask the person is disabled. indicator lamp is illuminated. • When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag (may inflate). and centered on the seat cushion. A properly seated occupant sits upright. leaning against the seatback. and the passenger airbag status • Have the person sit upright in the seat. remain in this position for about two minutes. leans forward or sideways. the passenger Sitting improperly can increase the chance side airbag (seat mounted) may be disabled of injury in a crash event. Occupant Passenger airbag status Passenger airbag indicator Empty Unlit Disabled Child Lit Disabled Adult Unlit Enabled Note: When the passenger airbag status feet comfortably extended on the floor. restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child • Restart the vehicle and have the person restraint manufacturer’s instructions. important that they continue to sit properly.

• Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a • Rear passenger feet and knees resting person with disabilities. on the side of the seatbacks Make sure the front passenger (of the front seats). The use of accessory seat covers The driver or adult passengers should may prevent the deployment of the check for objects that lodged underneath side airbags and increase the risk of injury the front passenger seat. check • Restart the vehicle. • Objects placed on the occupant's lap Do not attempt to repair or service the system. contact your or pushing on the seat authorized dealer. See Crash Sensors deploying airbag. Do not lean your head on the door. The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger SIDE AIRBAGS sensing system. or in front seat areas sensing system is operating that may come into contact with a properly. or cargo in an accident. If the airbag readiness lamp is lit. airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect. Supplementary Restraints System If you think that the status of the passenger • Remove the obstruction(s) (if found). this may or may not be a • Objects stowed in the seatback map problem due to the front passenger pocket sensing system. modify the airbag. take the following deploys from the side of the steps to remove the obstruction: seatback. Failure to follow these and Airbag Indicator (page 41). Contact your authorized dealer as or cargo interfering with the seat. or cargo is The side airbag could injure you as it interfering with the seat. do the following: Do not use accessory seat covers. soon as possible. take your vehicle immediately to • Cargo interference with the seat an authorized dealer. its fuses or the • Driver or adult passengers should seat cover on a seat containing an check for any objects lodged airbag as you could be seriously injured or underneath the front passenger seat killed. • Pull the vehicle over. The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or WARNINGS lighter due to the conditions described in Do not place objects or mount the list above. equipment on or near the airbag cover. interfering with the seat. 38 C-MAX (CCG) . for the following: • Wait at least two minutes and verify • Objects lodged underneath the seat that the airbag readiness lamp is no • Objects between the seat cushion and longer illuminated. or • Turn the vehicle off. repair. the center console • If the airbag readiness lamp remains • Objects hanging off the seatback illuminated. If there are lodged objects. instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a crash. Do not attempt to service.

the unrepaired area will increase testing procedures help reduce the risk of the risk of injury in a crash. the airbag system included recommended airbag will not function again. Make sure the knee airbag is operating properly. it is important to be properly seated and restrained to reduce the risk of death or serious injury. Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the ·Crash sensors and monitoring event of a crash. the to inflate between the door panel and restraints control module may activate the occupant to further enhance the protection driver's knee airbag based on crash severity provided occupants in side impact crashes. If the airbag is not Working Group. injuries related to the deployment of side airbags. contact with a deploying curtain airbag. equipment on or near the headliner • Side airbags located inside the driver at the siderail that may come into and front passenger seatbacks. and occupant conditions. Indicator (page 41). The testing procedures that were developed side airbag system (including the by a group of automotive safety experts seat) must be inspected and serviced by known as the Side Airbag Technical an authorized dealer. During a crash. Note: The passenger sensing system will deactivate the passenger seat-mounted side airbag if it detects an empty passenger seat. These recommended replaced. • Front passenger sensing system. In certain sideways crashes. Supplementary Restraints System WARNINGS The design and development of the side If the side airbag has deployed. The side airbags are located on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG seats. E152533 SAFETY CANOPY™ The system consists of the following: • A label or embossed side panel WARNINGS indicating that side airbags are fitted Do not place objects or mount to your vehicle. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Do not lean your head on the door. The curtain airbag could injure you as it deploys from the headliner. 39 C-MAX (CCG) . As with front and side airbags. Under certain crash and occupant conditions. the driver’s knee airbag may deploy but the driver’s front airbag may not activate. The airbag was designed instrument panel. See Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 41). system with readiness indicator. the airbag on the side affected by the crash A driver's knee airbag is located under the will be inflated.

The Safety Canopy will not interfere by the rollover sensor. The curtain airbags (including the A. above the trim panels over the front and rear side windows identified by a To reduce risk of injury. the unrepaired area will system have a readiness indicator. the A. regardless of which seats are occupied. All occupants of your vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an E75004 airbag supplemental restraint system and curtain airbag is provided. These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags (including the Safety Canopy). or modify the curtain airbags. or C pillar trim. If the curtain airbag is • The crash sensors and monitoring not replaced. • A flexible headliner which opens above the side doors to allow air curtain If the curtain airbags have deployed. The Safety Canopy will deploy during Children 12 years old and under should significant side crashes or when a certain always be properly restrained in the rear likelihood of a rollover event is detected seats. See increase the risk of injury in a crash. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. B and C pillar trim and headliner) must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer. In certain sideways crashes headliner above the doors along the side or rollover events. be activated. its fuses. the Safety Canopy will window opening. The Safety Canopy with children restrained using a properly is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet installed child or booster seat because it metal. Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 41). deployment path of the curtain airbag. above each is designed to inflate downward from the row of seats. repair. do not label or wording on the headliner or obstruct or place objects in the roof-pillar trim. behind the headliner. Supplementary Restraints System WARNINGS Do not attempt to service. The Safety Canopy is designed The design and development of the Safety to inflate between the side window area Canopy included recommended testing and occupants to further enhance procedures that were developed by a protection provided in side impact crashes group of automotive safety experts known and rollover events. or the headliner on a vehicle containing curtain airbags as you could be seriously injured or killed. 40 C-MAX (CCG) . B. as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group. Failure to The system consists of the following: properly wear your safety belt could • Safety canopy curtain airbags located seriously increase the risk of injury or death. deployment the curtain airbags will not function again.

Supplementary Restraints System CRASH SENSORS AND • The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after the ignition is turned AIRBAG INDICATOR on. Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required. increasing the risk of injury. The readiness of the safety system is indicated by a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or by a backup tone if the warning light is not working. have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately. even the front end of your vehicle. The the front end of your vehicle tone pattern will repeat periodically (including frame. information to the restraints control module which deploys (activates) the The safety belt pretensioners and the front safety belt pretensioners. intermittently. the light or both are body structure and tow hooks) may affect repaired. detected by the rollover sensor. seat mounted designed to activate when your vehicle side airbags. driver airbag supplemental restraint system is airbag. Do not modify If any of these things happen. The restraints control module also monitors the readiness of the above safety devices plus the crash and occupant sensors. bumper. • The readiness light will either flash or WARNING stay lit. front end until the problem. Modifying or adding equipment to • A series of five beeps will be heard. sufficient to cause the restraints control side impact or rollover) the restraints module to deploy a safety device or when control module will deploy the appropriate a certain likelihood of a rollover event is safety devices. Based sustains frontal or sideways deceleration on the type of accident (frontal impact. passenger airbag. and the Safety Canopy. the Your vehicle has a collection of crash and system may not function properly in the occupant sensors which provide event of a crash. Unless serviced. A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following: 41 C-MAX (CCG) . the performance of the airbag system.

side impacts or rear impacts) unless the crash causes sufficient frontal deceleration. 42 C-MAX (CCG) . The Safety Canopy may activate in other types of crashes if your vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation. Airbags must be disposed of by qualified personnel. AIRBAG DISPOSAL Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. • The design of the front airbags is to activate only in frontal and near-frontal crashes (not rollovers. Side airbags may activate in other types of crashes if your vehicle experiences sufficient sideways motion or deformation. near-frontal and side crashes. • The design of the safety belt pretensioners is to activate in frontal. • The design of the side airbags is to inflate in certain side impact crashes. and in rollovers. Rather. Supplementary Restraints System The fact that the safety belt pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a crash does not mean that something is wrong with the system. • The design of the Safety Canopy is to inflate in certain side impact crashes or rollover events. or a certain likelihood of rollover. crash severity. belt usage) were not appropriate to activate these safety devices. it means the restraints control module determined the accident conditions (for example.

Operation is subject to the following two • You touch the inside of the front conditions: (1) This device may not cause exterior door handle. Use the key blade to start your vehicle and wireless headphones. You can lock and unlock the doors with the key. harmful interference. you will not be able to use your functions as the remote control. See Remote technical specifications were met. remote controls and unlock or lock the driver door from outside alarm systems. Keys and Remote Controls GENERAL INFORMATION ON Intelligent Access (If Equipped) RADIO FREQUENCIES The system uses a radio frequency signal to communicate with your vehicle and This device complies with Part 15 of the authorize your vehicle to unlock when one FCC Rules and with Industry Canada of the following conditions are met: license-exempt RSS standard(s). You can user's authority to operate the equipment. Control (page 43). If excessive radio frequency interference Note: Changes or modifications not is present in the area or if the transmitter expressively approved by the party battery is low. One of Integrated Keyhead Transmitters the following could cause a decrease in (If Equipped) operating range: • weather conditions • nearby radio towers • structures around the vehicle • other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The radio frequency used by your remote control can also be used by other short E142585 distance radio transmissions. The transmitter portion jammed. undesired operation. Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before leaving it unattended. If the frequencies are your vehicle. and (2) This device • You press the luggage compartment must accept any interference received. use the mechanical key blade in your The term IC before the radio certification intelligent access key to open the driver number only signifies that Industry Canada door in this situation. Note: If you are in range. including interference that may cause • You press a button on the transmitter. for example amateur radios. Vehicles with the remote start feature will have a greater range. 43 C-MAX (CCG) . medical equipment. the remote control will operate if you press any button unintentionally. remote control. The typical operating range for your transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10 REMOTE CONTROL meters). button. you may need to responsible for compliance could void the mechanically unlock your door.

Carefully remove the cover. Remove the key blade. Keys and Remote Controls Mechanical Key Blade The intelligent access key also contains a removable mechanical key blade that you can use to unlock the driver door. 2. Intelligent Access Key (If Equipped) Type 1 E87964 1 To release the mechanical key blade: 1. 44 C-MAX (CCG) . Press and hold the push buttons on the edges of the transmitter to release the cover. transmitter to release the key blade. then The key must be in your vehicle to activate pull the blade out. Type 2 E162192 Type 2 E142431 E138616 Your intelligent access keys operate the Slide the release on the back of the power locks and the remote start system. Keep the label in a safe place for future reference. Type 1 2 E138615 Note: Your vehicle’s keys came with a security label that provides important 1 vehicle key cut information. the push-button start system.

2. 45 C-MAX (CCG) . Press and hold the buttons on the edges to release the cover. E138619 1. 2 Note: Replacing the battery will not delete the transmitter from the vehicle. Twist a thin coin in the slot of the transmitter near the key ring to remove the battery cover. Carefully remove the cover. Snap the battery cover back onto the Note: Refer to local regulations when transmitter. Integrated Keyhead Transmitter E87964 1 1. Press the battery down to make sure it is fully in the housing. Refer to the with a security tag that provides important instructions inside the transmitter for vehicle key cut information. a safe place for future reference. 2. Intelligent Access Key (Type 1) Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals or on the back surface of the circuit board. Replacing the Battery 4. The transmitter should operate normally. Keep the tag in the correct orientation of the battery. disposing of transmitter batteries. Insert the new battery. The remote control uses one coin-type three-volt lithium battery CR2032 or 1 equivalent. Remove the old battery. Keys and Remote Controls E138618 E138620 Note: Your vehicle’s back-up keys came 3. Remove the key blade.

key. transmitter. Keys and Remote Controls Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or the printed circuit board with the 3 screwdriver. Install a new battery with the + facing downward. Assemble the two halves of the remote control. 5 E125860 E138622 46 C-MAX (CCG) . 6. Carefully remove the battery with the screwdriver. 7. 4 E142432 2. E105362 8. Do not use the 4. 5. Twist the screwdriver in the position Intelligent Access Key (Type 2) shown to start separating the two 1. 3. Remove the backup key from the halves of the remote control. Twist the screwdriver in the position backup key to remove the cover or you shown to separate the two halves of could damage the intelligent access the remote control. Install the key blade. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden E119190 behind the backup key head to remove the battery cover.

Press the button again or • The powertrain fault indicator was on E138624 switch the ignition on to the last time your vehicle was driven deactivate it. We recommend you Check your local and state or provincial use this method to locate your vehicle. Remove the old battery. Your vehicle WARNING will not remote start and the horn will not To avoid exhaust fumes. remote start if your vehicle is parked indoors or areas that are not well ventilated. can be configured to operate when the vehicle is remote started. range. The remote start button is on the transmitter. E138625 E138626 The label on your transmitter details the starting procedure. This feature allows you to start your 4. Press the battery down to transmitter has an extended operating make sure it is fully in the housing. The horn sounds and restrictions for the use of remote start. Snap the battery cover back onto the Vehicles with automatic climate control transmitter and install the backup key. Note: If locking was not successful or if any the remote door or the liftgate is open. • The transmission is not in P Press the button to activate the • The vehicle battery voltage is too low alarm. The downward. Keys and Remote Controls 3. laws for specific requirements regarding rather than using the panic alarm. Remote Starting the Vehicle Remote Start (C-MAX Energi Only) Note: You must press each button within three seconds of each other. the horn will sound twice and • The ignition is on the lamps will not flash. • The alarm system triggers Sounding a Panic Alarm (If Equipped) • You disable the feature Note: The panic alarm will only operate • The hood is open when the ignition is off. do not use sound if you do not follow this sequence. To remote start your vehicle: 47 C-MAX (CCG) . or if the hood is The remote start system will not work if open on vehicles with a perimeter alarm or any of the following occur: remote start. Note: Do not use remote start if your vehicle is low on fuel. remote start systems. Press the lock button on the key twice Many states and provinces have within three seconds. 5. the turn signals flash. Insert a new battery with the + facing vehicle from outside the vehicle. See Automatic Car Finder Climate Control (page 105).

vehicle. Quiet start See General Information (page 88). you must Replacement keys or remote controls can switch the ignition on before driving your be purchased from an authorized dealer. If you remote start your vehicle with Authorized dealers can program remote an intelligent access transmitter. The power windows will not work during the remote start and the radio will not turn on automatically. Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote Starting Press the button once. Extending the Vehicle Run Time Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still running to extend the run time for another remote start duration. system see an authorized dealer. You can extend the remote start up to a maximum of 30 minutes. You can switch it on or off in the information display. and the added noise of the running vehicle. The exterior lamps will flash twice. will run the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce noise. Press the remote start button twice. Press the lock button to lock all the You may have to be closer to the vehicle doors. The parking lamps will turn off. See Passive press the START/STOP button on the Anti-Theft System (page 63). The parking lamps will remain on and the vehicle will run for 5. unless quiet start is on. You can disable or enable the remote start The horn will sound if the system fails to system through the information display. or 15 minutes. start. E138625 48 C-MAX (CCG) . than when starting due to ground reflection 2. For example. Wait at least five seconds before remote starting after a vehicle shutdown. the duration will extend by another 10 minutes. if the vehicle had been running from the first remote start for five minutes. instrument panel once while applying the To re-program the passive anti-theft brake pedal before driving your vehicle. Keys and Remote Controls 1. If the duration is set to last 10 minutes. depending on the setting. REMOTE CONTROL Note: If you remote start your vehicle with an integrated keyhead transmitter. the vehicle will continue to run now for a total of 20 minutes. you must controls for your vehicle. 10. See General REPLACING A LOST KEY OR Information (page 88).

The audio system will mute MyKey allows you to program keys with when the front seat occupants’ safety restricted driving modes to promote good belts are not fastened. present. The low-fuel warning programmed to the vehicle can be activates earlier. the admin fob will be recognized • Vehicle speed minders of 45. you can configure the information display: certain MyKey settings when you first create a MyKey and before you recycle the • How many admin keys and MyKeys are key or restart the vehicle. You Note: For vehicles with intelligent access cannot override the set speed by fully with push-button start. you can access the following information using With an admin key. You cannot disable this feature. The following settings cannot be changed by an admin key user: • Audio system maximum volume of 45%. You cannot program them followed by an audible tone when your individually. Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the Warnings will be shown in the display same settings. more time to refuel. the speed-sensitive or compensated automatic volume control will be disabled. All but one of the keys • Early low fuel. admin keys. 55 or 65 by the vehicle while switching the ignition mph (75. lane departure • create a MyKey warning and forward collision warning • program configurable MyKey settings system. followed by an audible tone Non-configurable Settings when the preselected vehicle speed is exceeded. • A vehicle speed limit can be set. driving habits. You can also programmed to your vehicle. • Always on setting. select a speed. A message will be shown in the display when you attempt to exceed the limited volume. traveled using a MyKey. giving the MyKey user activated with these restricted modes. • clear all MyKey features. 49 C-MAX (CCG) . Also. Any keys that have not been programmed • Driver assist features. when both a MyKey depressing the accelerator pedal or by and an admin intelligent access key fob are setting cruise control. 90 or 105 km/h). These can be used to: blind spot information system (BLIS) with cross traffic alert. Once you on to start the vehicle. you will not be able to turn off Advance Trac (if your vehicle is equipped with this feature). Configurable Settings When you have programmed a MyKey. it will be shown in the display. MyKey™ PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION • Belt-Minder. are forced on: parking aid. vehicle reaches the set speed. change the settings afterward with an • The total distance your vehicle has admin key. When this is selected. if equipped on are referred to as administrator keys or your vehicle.

you the ignition. 3. Press OK or > to make a selection. Switch the ignition on using an admin Tracks the distance when drivers use a key or fob. Switch the ignition on. and select Settings and then MyKey by pressing OK Note: When you clear your MyKeys. To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings. you or the > button. See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page You can clear all MyKeys within the same 124). Access the main menu and select restricted at your vehicle's next start. hold the intelligent your MyKey settings. The key will be 1. and select key to clear your MyKey. however. Use the arrow buttons to get to a or an admin key user recently cleared and configurable feature. Details on the correct fob placement and CLEARING ALL MYKEYS position is in another chapter. information display controls. then MyKey by pressing OK does not accumulate as expected. If the distance Settings. Access the main menu on the accumulated distance is by using an admin information display controls. Make sure 2. MyKey. the admin keys. STATUS Programming/Changing Configurable Settings You can find information about your programmed MyKeys by using the Use the information display to access your information display. Access the main menu on the MyKeys. Hold the OK button until ALL You can also program configurable MYKEYS CLEARED displays. use the information display to do the 5. Note: You can clear or change your MyKey Use the information display to create a settings at any time during the same key MyKey: cycle as you created the MyKey. key cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you 1. settings for the key(s). Settings. Refer to Programming/Changing Configurable CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM Settings. 50 C-MAX (CCG) . hold the OK button following: until you see a message informing you to label this key as a MyKey. When prompted. access key next to the steering column. you will need to use an admin key to clear your 3. however. Press OK or the > button to select Create MyKey. switch your ignition off. If your vehicle is equipped with will need an admin key to change or clear a push-button start. 3. The only way to delete the 2. then recreated a MyKey. the intended user is not using the MyKey. then or the > button. remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their original admin key status at once. then MyKey. Insert the key you want to program into have switched the engine off. configurable MyKey settings: MYKEY DISTANCE 1. MyKey™ CREATING A MYKEY 4. Scroll to Clear MyKey and press the you label it so you can distinguish it from OK button. 4. If you 2. MyKey is successfully created.

total count of MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED. Use this you open the door or shift the vehicle into feature to detect how many MyKeys you gear. it is possible to program all MyKey is not compatible with real keys as MyKeys unintentionally. Always treat the remote start fob as you would any other admin key. follow these steps: Aftermarket Remote Start Systems • Enter the vehicle and close all doors. In that Vehicles With Ford-approved case. a MyKey. START SYSTEMS With a Ford-approved aftermarket remote start system. the system stalls the engine after programmed to your vehicle. the MyKey restrictions remain USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE active. This is intentional. start fob. then the remote start fob is the start systems. the vehicle recognizes remote start fob. to program the remote start system as a and detect if an additional MyKey has been MyKey. MyKey™ NUMBER OF MYKEY(S) When you start your vehicle with a Ford-approved aftermarket remote start Indicates the number of MyKeys system. you cannot 50). That way. Use this As an added precaution. If you choose to install a admin key. you can create status menu display includes the remote a new MyKey. See Creating a MyKey start system as an additional key in the (page 50). You can also program the remote start as Follow Steps 1-3. when the MyKey driver starts the vehicle with the remote start system. See Note: For vehicles with Intelligent Access Checking MyKey System Status (page keys (push-button start). programmed to your vehicle. If you want to have only one remote start system. or do not want to have authorized dealer for a Ford-approved any MyKeys. then you need to use your remote start system. it reads your real key a MyKey has been deleted. program the remote start system as a MyKey. Vehicles With Non-Ford-approved Aftermarket Remote Start Systems 51 C-MAX (CCG) . the remote start system as an additional admin key. It is the vehicle’s default setting. When using a Ford-approved aftermarket • Remote start the vehicle using your remote start system. the MyKey system After clearing your MyKeys. • See Clearing All MyKeys (page 50). (traditional key or intelligent key fob) NUMBER OF ADMIN KEY(S) status instead of the remote start system’s Indicates how many admin keys are status. If this non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote happens. remote start to clear all MyKeys. if the MyKey driver uses the remote programmed. As a result. please see your Ford real key as a MyKey. When you restart have for your vehicle and determine when your vehicle. owners of vehicles feature to determine how many equipped with traditional keys may want unrestricted keys you have for your vehicle.

See Creating a MyKey Note: The MyKey system status menu (page 50). display may include the remote start system Note: For vehicles with Intelligent Access as an additional key in the total count of Keys (Push-button Start). then you may retain some MyKey functions. This action forces • See Clearing All MyKeys (page 50). if the MyKey driver uses the remote authorized dealer for a Ford-approved start fob. That way. · The key or fob used to start the vehicle is the only admin key (there always has to be at least one admin key). If you functions. unintentionally. 52 C-MAX (CCG) . owners of vehicles non-Ford-approved aftermarket remote equipped with traditional keys may want start systems. See Checking MyKey MyKey. it is possible to MyKey compatible with program all real keys as MyKeys non-Ford-approved remote start systems. then the but may help you retain some MyKey remote start fob is the admin key. as you would any other admin key. follow these steps: admin key with its associated privileges. non-Ford-approved remote start system. a new MyKey. If this happens. the vehicle may recognize you need to use your remote start to clear the remote start system as an additional all MyKeys. want to have only one real key as a MyKey. See Keyless Starting (page 124). you cannot MYKEY(S) PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS program the remote start system as a PROGRAMMED. With a non-Ford-approved aftermarket The actions provided below do not make remote start system. In that case. ignition completely. When using a non-Ford-approved remote or do not want to have any MyKeys. when the MyKey driver system. instead of the remote start fob and then After clearing your MyKeys. If you choose to install a to program the remote start system as a remote start system. you can create uses the key's associated privileges. MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING Condition Potential Causes I cannot create a MyKey. Always treat the remote start fob System Status (page 50). · Vehicles with push-button start: The intelli- gent access key fob is not positioned correctly next to the steering column. If • Enter the vehicle and close all doors. the MyKey restrictions will be The following information may help customers who choose to install a remain active. your vehicle to read the traditional key Follow Steps 1-3. you restart the engine by inserting a key • Remote start the vehicle using your into the ignition cylinder and recycling the non-Ford-approved remote start fob. please see a Ford MyKey. MyKey™ MyKey is not compatible with As an added precaution. starts the vehicle with the remote start system. · The key or fob used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges. then start system.

· An unknown key or fob has been created as a MyKey. not have admin privileges. · No MyKeys are created. · The vehicle's system does not recognize any programmed MyKeys. · No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 50). Clear all MyKeys by using the remote start. · The key or fob used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 51). MyKey™ Condition Potential Causes · SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 51). See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 51). I cannot clear the MyKeys. · The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges. · The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges. See Passive Anti-Theft System (page 63). I accidentally programmed all keys as · The vehicle has a remote start system that is MyKeys. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 51). Purchase a new key from your authorized dealer. to the vehicle as an admin key. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 51). I cannot program the configurable · The key or fob used to start your vehicle does settings. 53 C-MAX (CCG) . recognized as an admin key. Admin key total includes one additional · An unknown key or fob has been programmed key. I lost a key Program a spare key. · The vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is not programmed with admin privileges. See Creating a MyKey (page 50). I lost the only admin key. MyKey total includes one additional key. See Creating a MyKey (page 50). · The vehicle has a remote start system.

· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 50). · The key system has been reset. 54 C-MAX (CCG) . Access key. No MyKey functions with the Intelligent · An admin fob is present at vehicle start. MyKey™ Condition Potential Causes · The vehicle has a remote start system. See Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 51). · An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys. MyKey distances do not accumulate. · The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.

Locks LOCKING AND UNLOCKING Press and hold both the lock and unlock buttons on the remote control for four You can use the power door lock control seconds to disable or enable two-stage or the remote control to lock and unlock unlocking. intelligent access. or if the hood is open on vehicles with a perimeter alarm or remote start. the horn will sound and the turn signals will flash if Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage all the doors and the luggage Unlock) compartment are closed. 55 C-MAX (CCG) . The turn signals will Power Door Locks flash twice to indicate a change to the unlocking mode. Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area before using the liftgate Press the button again within three control. The An LED on the instrument panel will light turn signals will illuminate. The doors will lock again. the horn will sound twice and the lamps will not flash. Locking the Doors B Type 1 E162487 A Unlock Type 2 B Lock Door Lock Indicator E138623 Press the button to lock all the doors. allows all vehicle doors to unlock with one press of the button. when you lock the doors. Press the button again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are Remote Control closed. Disabling two-stage unlocking your vehicle. The unlocking mode The power door lock control is on the driver applies to the remote control and and front passenger door panels. Intelligent access at the driver door will unlock all doors when you disable A two-stage unlocking. Type 1 Note: If locking was not successful or any door or the liftgate is open. seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signals will flash. Type 2 Liftgate E138629 WARNINGS Press the button to unlock the driver door. It is not a functional control.

Right-Hand Side Mechanical Key Turn counterclockwise to lock. 56 C-MAX (CCG) . Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate. (page 60). The intelligent access key must be within 3 feet (1 meter) of your vehicle. Locks WARNINGS Make sure to close and latch the liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious personal injury. The first only. The unlock sensor is on the back of the handle. If you must drive with the liftgate open. Make sure not to touch the lock sensor area on the front of the handle. This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. pull unlocks the door and the second pull will unlatch the door. Opening a Rear Door from Inside Turn the top of the key toward the rear of Pull the interior door release handle twice your vehicle once to unlock the driver door to unlock and open a rear door. At the Front Doors Pull a front exterior door handle to unlock and open the door. Turn the top of the key toward the front of your vehicle once to lock all doors. close or stop the movement of Left-Hand Side a power liftgate. See Power Liftgate Turn clockwise to lock. lock the Activating Intelligent Access (If doors individually using the key in the Equipped) position shown. Press twice within three seconds to: E138630 E112203 • unlatch a manual liftgate • open. Locking the Doors Individually If the power locks fail to operate. keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle.

57 C-MAX (CCG) . all of the doors will immediately avoid unlocking the door inadvertently. Smart Unlocks For Integrated Autolock (If Equipped) Keyhead Transmitter The autolock feature will lock all the doors This feature helps to prevent you from when: locking yourself out of your vehicle if your • all doors are closed key is still in the ignition. you can lock your vehicle by any method. If your vehicle finds a about a second to lock your vehicle. and control. vehicle in park and ignition off). • your vehicle attains a speed greater than 4 mph (7 km/h). the ignition is on. regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not. When you open one of the front doors and • you shift into any gear putting your lock your vehicle with the power door lock vehicle in motion. sensor. all the doors will lock then unlock if your key is still in the ignition. there is a brief delay before you can you can lock your vehicle after all doors unlock your vehicle. When you lock your vehicle using the power door lock control (with the door open. unlock. your E87384 vehicle will search for an intelligent access key in the passenger compartment after Press and hold the lock sensor area for you close the door. If both front doors are closed. This delay lets you pull are closed by pressing the lock button on the handle to make sure it locked. intelligent access key in your hand. another intelligent access key or touching Note: Keep the door handle surface clean the locking area on the handle with another to avoid issues with operation. make sure you only touch the lock sensor and not other areas of the door handle. • the ignition is on. all doors will lock then unlock if on the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle. Locks Smart Unlocks For Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped) This feature helps to prevent you from unintentionally locking your intelligent access key inside your vehicle’s passenger compartment or rear cargo area. You can still lock your vehicle with the key in the ignition by pressing the lock button on the transmitter even if the doors are not closed. To key. In order to override the smart unlock feature and intentionally lock the After locking the doors with the lock intelligent access key inside your vehicle. When you open one of the front doors and At the Liftgate lock your vehicle using the power door lock Press the exterior liftgate release button control.

and your vehicle has been in ignition off. • you open the driver door within 10 Illuminated Entry minutes of the switching the ignition off or to accessory. Switch the ignition off. all the doors are After programming the feature. electronically lock your vehicle after you switch the ignition off and before you open The illuminated entry system will turn off the driver door. 3. switch the closed. The horn will sound once motion at a speed greater than 4 mph indicating programming is complete. The lights will not turn off if: To enable or disable these features. Press the power door unlock button lamps will illuminate when all doors are three times. The horn The autounlock feature will unlock all the will sound once if disabled or twice (one doors when: short and one long) if enabled. Battery Saver Autolock: Press the power door unlock If you leave the courtesy lamps or dome button then the lock button. complete the procedure. sound indicating your vehicle is in programming mode. Illuminated Exit 1. 58 C-MAX (CCG) . Enabling or Disabling Autolock and Autounlock • you press the remote control lock button. autounlock feature independently of the and autolock feature. The lamps will turn off if all the doors 4. • the ignition is on. • 25 seconds elapse. Press the power door unlock button remain closed and: three times. the sound once if disabled or twice (one short battery saver shuts them off after some and one long) if enabled. Switch the ignition on. (7 km/h). do the • you turn them on with the lamp control. The horn will • you lock your vehicle from the outside. The horn will lamps on and switch the ignition off. or Note: Your authorized dealer can perform • after 25 seconds of illumination. or 5. Locks Autounlock (If Equipped) Autounlock: Press the power door lock button then the unlock button. following: or Note: You will have 30 seconds to • any door is open. • your vehicle comes to a stop and you Note: You can enable or disable the switch the ignition off or to accessory. or you can do the procedure yourself. The interior lamps and select exterior lamps will illuminate when you unlock the Note: The doors will not autounlock if you doors with the remote entry system. closed and you switch the ignition off. this procedure. The interior lamps and select exterior 2. time. Switch the ignition on. the lights if: • you start your vehicle.

people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Be liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat liftgate. Do not allow people to ride E138632 in any area of your vehicle that is not Press the button located in the top of the equipped with seats and safety belts. This could damage the liftgate and its components. A handle is located inside the liftgate to help with closing. keep the vents or windows open so outside air comes into your vehicle. from the glass or liftgate. Locks Accessory Mode Battery Saver for Opening the Liftgate Intelligent Access Keys (If Equipped) Manually If you leave the ignition on after leaving your vehicle. and then pull on the outside and using a safety belt properly. MANUAL LIFTGATE WARNINGS It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area. In a crash. This could damage the liftgate and its components. This will also E138630 liftgate. Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while E155976 driving. Note: Be careful when opening or closing the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area to avoid damaging the liftgate. it will shut off 15 minutes after you close all of the doors. Note: Do not hang anything. Failure to Closing the Liftgate follow this warning could result in serious personal injury. If you must drive with the liftgate open. With the Remote Control Make sure to close and latch the Press the button twice within liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust three seconds to unlock the fumes into your vehicle. inside or outside of a vehicle. 59 C-MAX (CCG) . for example a bike rack. Manually open the prevent passengers and cargo from falling liftgate. out. Failure to handle. follow this warning could result in serious personal injury or death.

these areas are more likely to be seriously If the liftgate falls to the closed direction injured or killed. Five short chimes indicate a problem with the Press the remote control button open or close request. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area. In a collision. checked by an authorized dealer if you still Make sure to close and latch the have the issue after you remove the load. especially in an enclosure. This could damage the liftgate and is power closing and is near the latch may its components. Be indicate excessive weight on the gate or a sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat possible gas strut failure. Locks POWER LIFTGATE (IF EQUIPPED) • the ignition is on and the transmission is not in P. Have the system and using a safety belt properly. motion with your foot for hands-free Note: Do not hang anything. E138633 Three warning tones will sound once as With the Remote Control the liftgate begins to power close. E138630 60 C-MAX (CCG) . Note: Be careful when opening or closing Do not allow children to play near an the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed open or moving power liftgate. area to avoid damaging the liftgate. personal injury. Keep keys out of reach of children. or by using a kicking damage the liftgate or its components. Make sure that you close the direction with a second press of the liftgate before operating or moving the instrument panel button or the control vehicle. caused by: twice within three seconds. cause the liftgate to reverse to full open Note: You can stop the liftgate movement position. If you must drive with the liftgate open. Failure to power liftgate area before using the follow this warning could result in serious power liftgate control. WARNINGS • or the battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage. This will also Opening and Closing the Liftgate prevent passengers and cargo from falling out. liftgate to prevent drawing exhaust fumes into your vehicle. a second press of the garage or a parking structure. Press the instrument panel If the vehicle is running. bike rack. This could damage the liftgate and its From the Instrument Panel components. WARNING keep the vents or windows open so outside Make sure all persons are clear of the air comes into your vehicle. like a button on the liftgate. four short warning chimes equipped with seats and safety belts. from the spoiler. for example a liftgates. glass or liftgate. inside or outside of a • or the vehicle speed is at or above 3 vehicle. people riding in mph (5 km/h). the liftgate will only button. You could transmitter button. Do not allow people to ride after the liftgate has stopped in the open in any area of your vehicle that is not position. operate with the transmission in park. Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while Note: Cycling the ignition while the liftgate driving.

Locks Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped) With the Outside Control Button Make sure you have an intelligent access Opening transmitter within 3 feet (1 meter) of the liftgate. rear bumper detection area while washing your car. the liftgate will unlock when you press the liftgate release button. If an intelligent access transmitter is within 3 feet (1 meter) of the liftgate. 61 C-MAX (CCG) . Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle detection feature and E174120 stops the power operation. 2. Note: Allow the power system to open the liftgate. Press the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle. Do not move your foot sideways or the sensors may not detect the motion. Note: Allow the power system to open the liftgate after pressing the control. Keep the E138636 intelligent access transmitter away from the Press and release the button. Move your foot under and away from Closing the center rear bumper in a single-kick motion. Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle detection feature and stops the power operation. 1. The liftgate will power open or close. 1. Unlock the liftgate with the remote control or power door unlock control. E138632 2. Note: Splashing water may cause the hands-free liftgate to open.

repeat the above procedure. 2. check the instrument cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or warning indicator. Once you remove the obstacle. Locks WARNING When Opening Keep clear of the liftgate when The system stops when it detects an activating the rear switch. To change the programmed height. Open the liftgate. Before driving off. 3. let the power liftgate close completely before you enter your vehicle. you can manually move it to a different height. you can fully open the liftgate by manually pushing it upward to the maximum open position. The new open liftgate height will now be recalled when the power liftgate is opened. Press and hold the control button on the liftgate until you hear a chime. you can power close the liftgate. To prevent this. When operating the power liftgate after you have programmed a lower height than full-open. Remove the obstacle to operate the liftgate. Manually move the liftgate to the desired height. indicating programming is complete. Note: Entering your vehicle while the liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to bounce and activate obstacle detection. Setting the Liftgate Open Height 1. 62 C-MAX (CCG) . Note: You cannot program the height if the liftgate position is too low. obstacle and two short tones sound. Failure to do this could result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate open while driving. Obstacle Detection When Closing The system stops when it detects an obstacle and two short tones sound. Once you open the power liftgate.

Insert the first previously programmed coded key into the ignition. Keep the ignition on for at least three seconds. All eight can be switch the ignition off. but no more than 10 seconds. as before you begin. as well as a remote control. integrated keyhead transmitters. your authorized dealer to have the spare key programmed if two previously The intelligent access key functions as a programmed coded keys are not available. 63 C-MAX (CCG) . You can program your own integrated Automatic Disarming keyhead transmitter or standard Switching the ignition on with a coded key SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. Security PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT If your programmed transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys SYSTEM (integrated keyhead transmitters only) are lost or stolen and you do not have an extra SecuriLock® coded key. You from starting unless you use a coded key need to erase the key codes from your programmed to your vehicle. any inconveniences. 1. you will need to have your The system helps prevent your vehicle vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. Keyhead Transmitter Automatic Arming Note: You can program a maximum of eight Your vehicle arms immediately after you coded keys to your vehicle. A message may appear in the your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent information display. Switch the ignition off and remove the first coded key from the ignition. See vehicle. happened. 2. See your authorized If you are unable to start your vehicle with dealer to purchase additional spare or a correctly coded key. 3. well as a remote control. programmed key that operates the driver door lock and activates the intelligent Read and understand the entire procedure access with push button start system. Using the vehicle and program new coded keys. Switch the ignition from off to on. A message may appear in the Programming a Spare Integrated information display. or standard SecuriLock keys. a malfunction has replacement keys. This disarms your vehicle. procedure will program both the vehicle immobilizer keycode and the remote entry Replacement Keys portion of the remote control to your vehicle Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two integrated keyhead transmitters or two Only use integrated keyhead transmitters intelligent access keys. The integrated keyhead transmitter You must have two previously functions as a programmed ignition key programmed coded keys and the new that operates all the locks and starts your unprogrammed key readily accessible. wrong key may prevent your vehicle from Store an extra programmed key away from starting.

After three seconds but within 10 The direction indicators flash and the horn seconds of switching the ignition off. Note: Pressing the panic button on the If programming was not successful. 64 C-MAX (CCG) . but will not disarm the system. take your vehicle to your authorized dealer. Remove the newly programmed coded or keyless entry keypad. Security 4. Take all remote controls to an authorized 5. seconds. Keep dealer if there is any potential alarm the ignition on for at least three problem with your vehicle. 6. After three seconds but within 10 the vehicle to arm the alarm. actions: 8. • Unlock the doors or luggage compartment with the remote control 9. sounds if unauthorized entry is attempted insert the second previously coded key while the alarm is armed. not a key in the ignition. into the ignition. Switch the ignition from off to on. then switch the ignition on new key is an integrated keyhead within 12 seconds. programmed it will start your vehicle and • Use a key in the driver’s door to unlock operate the remote entry system (if the the vehicle. ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED) The system warns you of an unauthorized entry to your vehicle. Programming a Spare Intelligent Access Key See your authorized dealer to have additional keys programmed to your vehicle. It triggers if any door. seconds of switching the ignition off and removing the previously Disarming the Alarm programmed coded key. Switch the ignition from off to on. wait remote control will stop the horn and signal 10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8. Keep the ignition on for at least six seconds. indicators. insert the new Disarm the alarm by any of the following unprogrammed key into the ignition. Electronically lock 7. Switch the ignition off and remove the Arming the Alarm second previously programmed coded The alarm is ready to arm when there is key from the ignition. the luggage compartment or the hood opens without using the key or remote control. but no more than 10 seconds. key from the ignition. transmitter). • Switch the ignition on or start the If the key has been successfully vehicle. If you are still unsuccessful.

Unlock the steering column. You can operate the following functions 2 with the control: 1 E95178 A 1. C B E129463 A Volume up B Seek up or next 65 C-MAX (CCG) . Steering Wheel ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL WARNING Do not adjust the steering wheel when your vehicle is moving. AUDIO CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) Select the required source on the audio unit. Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the correct position. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. See Sitting in the Correct Position (page 110). Lock the steering column. D 2. 3 E95179 2 3.

VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL E129464 Pull the control to select or deselect voice control. Next or Previous Press the seek button to: • tune the radio to the next or previous stored preset • play the next or the previous track. Press and hold the seek button to: • tune the radio to the next station up or down the frequency band • seek through a track. Steering Wheel C Volume down CRUISE CONTROL D Seek down or previous Seek. E142437 See Cruise Control (page 171). See Information Displays (page 88). See E130248 MyFord Touch™ (page 322). 66 C-MAX (CCG) . See SYNC™ (page 287).

67 C-MAX (CCG) . Press OK to make a selection. Steering Wheel Multimedia Controls (If Equipped) E145434 Use the arrows on the right side of the steering wheel to navigate through the menus.

Wipers and Washers WINDSHIELD WIPERS Intermittent Wipe Note: Fully defrost the windshield before switching on the windshield wipers. install new wiper blades. Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry windshield. If that does not resolve the issue. If that does not resolve the issue. Note: If you switch on the autolamps with the autowipers. Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears. B Intermittent wipe Note: Make sure you switch off the C Normal wipe windshield wipers before entering a car D High speed wipe wash. Note: Clean the windshield and wiper blades if they begin to leave streaks or smears. 68 C-MAX (CCG) . Speed dependent wipers (if equipped) When your vehicle speed increases. B Intermittent wipe C Long wipe interval Use the rotary control to adjust the intermittent wipe interval. Note: Make sure the windshield wipers are switched off before entering a car wash. the interval between wipes will decrease. E168041 damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper motor to burn out. This may scratch the glass. E168040 AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED) A Single wipe Note: Fully defrost the windshield before switching on the windshield wipers. install new wiper blades. Always use the A Short wipe interval windshield washers before wiping a dry windshield. the low beam headlamps will turn on automatically when the rain sensor turns on the windshield wipers continuously.

snow or a salty road The rain sensor is very sensitive. and the wipers will turn on when the rain sensor detects a large amount of moisture on the windshield. inconsistent or unexpected wiping or debris around the interior rear view mirror smearing may occur. the wipers will The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor operate for a short time. Note: Do not operate the washers when the washer reservoir is empty. Set the control to high sensitivity. 69 C-MAX (CCG) . that is located in the area around the A wipe will occur a few seconds after interior rear view mirror. Use the rotary control to adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor. area will affect the autowipers' performance. Set the control to low sensitivity. • Switch to normal or high-speed wipe. the autowipers In these conditions. E168041 A High sensitivity E168042 B On To operate the washers and spray the C Low sensitivity windshield. windshield and automatically turns the wipers on. When you release the lever. This may cause the washer pump to overheat. and the wipers will turn on when the rain sensor detects a small amount of moisture on the windshield. For example. WINDSHIELD WASHERS • Switch the autowipers off. • Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers to reduce the amount of smearing. pull the lever toward you. conditions with ice. you can do the may turn on if dirt. mist or insects hit the following: windshield. It will adjust the wiper speed by the amount of moisture that the sensor detects on the windshield. Wipers and Washers Note: During wet or winter driving Keep the outside of the windshield clean. Dirt or mist. The rain sensor washing to clear any remaining washer monitors the amount of moisture on the fluid.

Press the bottom of the button to switch the wiper off. push the lever away from you. When you release the E168043 lever. Wipers and Washers REAR WINDOW WIPER AND Rear Window Washer WASHERS Rear Window Wiper E168044 To use the rear washer function. 70 C-MAX (CCG) . When you shift into R (Reverse). A Intermittent wipe B Low-speed wipe C Off Press the top of the button at the end of the lever to switch on the intermittent wiper. the wiper will operate for a short time. the rear wiper will turn on to intermittent if the front wipers are activated. or to change the wiper speed from low-speed to intermittent. Press the button again to switch on low-speed wipe.

Information Displays (page 88). license plate lamps and AUTOLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED) tail lamps C Headlamps High Beams E142451 The headlamps will switch on and off automatically in low light situations or during inclement weather. A Off B Parking lamps. See off. beams on. 71 C-MAX (CCG) . E162679 The headlamps will remain on for a period Push the lever forward to switch the high of time after you switch the ignition off. Lighting LIGHTING CONTROL Headlamp Flasher E162680 E142449 Pull the lever toward you slightly and release it to flash the headlamps. Use the information display controls to Push the lever forward again or pull the adjust the period of time that the lever toward you to switch the high beams headlamps will remain on. instrument panel lamps.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER Note: If you disconnect the battery or it E165366 becomes discharged. the desired level is reached. A B Note: If you have autolamps switched on you can only switch the high beam headlamps on once the system has turned the headlamps on. the windshield wiper activated exterior lamps will turn on within 10 seconds when you switch the windshield wipers on. Lighting When the headlamp switch is in the Vehicles With Front Fog Lamps Autolamps position. This feature does not turn on the exterior lamps: • during a mist wipe • while the wipers are on to clear washer fluid during a wash condition • if the wipers are in automatic or intermittent modes. the illuminated components will switch to the maximum A Press repeatedly or press and setting. 72 C-MAX (CCG) . The exterior lamps will turn off approximately 60 seconds after you switch the windshield wipers off. B Press repeatedly or press and hold to brighten. Note: You may have to manually switch Vehicles Without Front Fog Lamps the headlamps on in severe weather conditions. hold to dim. Note: If you have autolamps and E132712 autowipers switched on the low beam headlamps will turn on automatically when Press repeatedly or press and hold until the windshield wipers operate continuously.

4. Lighting HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY FRONT FOG LAMPS After you switch the ignition off. The headlamps will switch off automatically after three minutes with any door open or 30 seconds after the last door has been closed. You can cancel this feature by pulling the direction indicator toward you again or switching the ignition on. 2. E162681 or parking lamp position. you can switch the headlamps on by pulling the direction indicator lever toward you. Switch the lighting control to the off. The system does not activate the tail lamps DIRECTION INDICATORS and may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions. Switch the ignition on. headlamps on in low light situations or during inclement weather. Push the lever up or down to use the 3. Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision. E142453 DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF Press the control to switch the fog lamps EQUIPPED) on or off. direction indicators. To switch the system on: 1. WARNING You can switch the fog lamps on when the lighting control is in any position except Always remember to switch your Off and the high beams are not on. You will hear a short tone. Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the direction indicators flash three times to indicate a lane change. Disengage the parking brake. The system switches the headlamps on with a reduced output in daylight conditions. Make sure the transmission selector lever is not in position P. INTERIOR LAMPS The lamps will switch on when one of the following conditions have been met: 73 C-MAX (CCG) .

E160818 A E142455 (A) You can switch individual map lamps on independently by pressing switch. Press this switch to disable the interior E160819 lamps. The door function E160816 indicator lamp will illuminate yellow with (C) Individual lamp on and off lamps disabled. Press the switch again to turn interior lamps back on. The door function indicator lamp will illuminate yellow with B A lamps disabled. A B Front Interior Lamp Without panorama roof C D C E142454 (A) Door function switch. The indicator E160818 lamp will illuminate blue. Press the switch again to switch. With panorama roof • You press a remote control button. 74 C-MAX (CCG) . Press (B) All lamps on and off switch. Lighting • You open any door. E160816 (C)Passenger individual lamp on and off switch. E160817 (D) Driver individual lamp on and off switch. (A) Door function switch. Rear Interior Lamp (If Equipped) (B) All lamps on and off switch. this switch to disable the interior E160819 lamps. The indicator E161163 lamp will illuminate blue. turn interior lamps back on. • You press switch B on the front interior lamp.

The ambient lighting control is located in the overhead console. Lighting AMBIENT LIGHTING (IF EQUIPPED) The ambient lighting system illuminates the interior with a choice of several colors. The ambient lighting will switch on when the following conditions have been met: • you switch the ignition on • you switch the headlamps on The ambient lighting will remain on until you switch the ignition off and one of the following conditions have been met: • you lock your vehicle • the accessory delay timer expires. Press C again to switch off the interior lamps and return the ambient lighting to the previously selected color. Press A to cycle through the color choices. A B C E142456 A Color palette B Control knob C Search mode Rotate B past the first detent to switch on and adjust to the desired brightness. Press C to switch on all interior lamps and the ambient lighting. 75 C-MAX (CCG) .

you should verify they are free of obstructions and make sure that children and pets are not in the proximity of the window openings. It illuminates when you lock the rear window controls. Bounce-Back (If Equipped) The window will stop automatically while closing. 76 C-MAX (CCG) . Take care noise. when closing the windows to avoid personal injury or damage to your vehicle. E70850 Press the control to lock or unlock the rear window controls. Press the switch to open the window. Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature E70848 WARNING Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when When you override the bounce-back just one of the windows is open. When closing the power windows. Press 1. Press or lift it again to stop the window. Close the window twice until it reaches again or lift it to stop the window. Lift the switch to close the window. One-Touch Up Lift the switch fully and release it. Windows and Mirrors POWER WINDOWS Window Lock WARNINGS Do not leave children unattended in your vehicle and do not let them play with the power windows. Proceed as follows to override this protection feature when there is a One-Touch Down resistance. Lower the feature the window will not reverse opposite window slightly to reduce this if it detects an obstacle. the point of resistance and let it reverse. for example in winter: Press the switch fully and release it. They may seriously injure themselves. It will reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way.

Press and hold the switch until the window is fully open. 5. Release the switch. 77 C-MAX (CCG) . The the windows with the ignition off. press and hold the remote control The bounce-back feature remains unlock button to open the windows. second. Do not adjust the mirrors when your 3. 1. Lift the switch again for one more vehicle is moving. Windows and Mirrors 2. window will go past the point of resistance and you can close it fully. Reset and repeat the procedure if the E70846 B window does not close automatically. Open the window and then try to close it automatically. The bounce-back feature is now disabled and you can You can use the remote control to operate close the window manually. If you have disconnected the battery. A C 8. 4. WARNING 2. 7. 6. Lift and hold the switch until the Power Exterior Mirrors window is fully closed. Release the switch. memory. You can only open the windows for a short Resetting the Bounce-Back Feature time after you unlock your vehicle with the remote control. After you unlock your WARNING vehicle. Lift and hold the switch until the window is fully closed. Press the lock or unlock button to stop movement. Note: To operate this feature. See an authorized dealer as soon as possible if the window does not close after Opening the Windows the third attempt. A Left-hand mirror Accessory Delay (If Equipped) B Off You can use the window switches for C Right-hand mirror several minutes after you switch the ignition off or until you open either front door. accessory delay must not be active. Close the window a third time to the GLOBAL OPENING point of resistance. you must reset the bounce-back memory EXTERIOR MIRRORS separately for each window. turned off until you reset the Release the button once movement starts.

signal that you intend to change lanes. The vehicle will transition to your peripheral field of view as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C). E70847 Press the arrows to adjust the mirror. Heated Exterior Mirrors (If Equipped) B See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page 107). The image of the approaching vehicle is Blind spot mirrors have an integrated small and near the inboard edge of the convex mirror built into the upper outboard main mirror when it is at a distance. Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors Push the mirror toward the door window glass. Windows and Mirrors Check the main mirror first before a lane change. C Signal Indicator Mirrors The outer portion of the appropriate mirror housing blinks when you activate the turn signal. The image will transition from the main mirror and begin to appear in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle approaches (B). then check the blind spot mirror. Make sure that you fully engage the mirror in its support when returning it to its original position. The corner of the exterior mirrors. 78 C-MAX (CCG) . If no vehicles are present in the blind spot mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is at a safe distance. vehicle approaches (A). They are image becomes larger and begins to move designed to increase your visibility along outboard across the main mirror as the the side of your vehicle. Glance over your shoulder to verify traffic is clear and carefully change lanes. Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors WARNING A Objects in the blind spot mirror are E138665 closer than they appear.

To stop motion during one-touch operation. A rear center passenger or shade or leave them unattended in raised rear center head restraint may also the vehicle. It will automatically obstructions and make sure that return to normal reflection when you select children and pets are not in the proximity reverse gear to make sure you have a clear of the sunshade. The mirror will dim automatically to reduce When closing the sun shade. view when backing up. Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives. The control is located in the overhead console. SUN SHADES (IF EQUIPPED) Auto-Dimming Mirror (If Equipped) Note: Do not block the sensors on the front WARNINGS and back of the mirror. Windows and Mirrors INTERIOR MIRROR SUN VISORS WARNING Illuminated Vanity Mirror (If Equipped) Do not adjust the mirror when your vehicle is moving. The sun shade has a one-touch open and close feature. Mirror performance Do not let children play with the sun may be affected. fuel or other petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning products. This lets you move the mirror head up or down and from side to E162197 side. themselves. You can adjust the interior mirror to your preference. Lift the cover to switch the lamp on. They may seriously hurt block light from reaching the sensor. press the control a second time. 79 C-MAX (CCG) . Pull the tab below the mirror toward you to reduce glare at night. you glare when bright lights are detected from should verify that it is free of behind your vehicle. Some mirrors also have a second pivot point.

follow this relearning procedure: 1. Switch the ignition off. until the sun shade fully opens. If you do not complete Step 2 within 15 seconds of Step 1. Start the procedure again from the beginning. Press the rear of the control to the first action point twice and release it within two seconds. Windows and Mirrors Opening and Closing the Sun 4. Fully press and release the front of the control to open the sun shade. Make sure that there are no obstacles in the way of the moving sun shade. 80 C-MAX (CCG) . In case the sun shade no longer opens or closes properly. Bounce-Back The sun shade will stop automatically while closing. until the sun shade fully closes. Sun Shade Relearning WARNING The bounce-back function is not active during this procedure. Note: You must start the relearning process within 30 seconds of switching the ignition on. wait for another 30 seconds and then switch the ignition back on again. 2. Press and hold the rear of the control Shade to the first action point. 3. It will reverse some distance if there is an obstacle in the way. Press the front of the control to the first action point twice and release it within two seconds. the relearning function end. Press and hold the front of the control to the first action point. Fully press and release the rear of the control to close the sun shade. Confirm that relearning was successful by E138668 opening and closing the sun shade.

The more leaves and vines that are displayed. the better your fuel distance your vehicle has traveled. Leaves and vines will Fuel Economy occasionally appear and disappear to indicate a change in driving efficiency. as well as environmental Trip Computer conditions such as hills and weather. See General Information (page 88). 81 C-MAX (CCG) . See Common Displays below. Vehicle Settings and Personalization See General Information (page 88). See General impacted by your use of brakes. and accessories. Instrument Cluster GAUGES A B C E162393 A Left Information Display B Speedometer C Right Information Display See General Information (page 272). economy. Left Information Display Right Information Display Efficiency Leaves Odometer Efficiency leaves indicate short term driving Located in the bottom of the information display Registers the accumulated efficiency. For Note: The efficiency leaves display can be additional menu options. accelerator Information (page 88).

When the vehicle is operating on battery power only. When the fill operation will be included in the reaches empty your vehicle will calculation. The level will increase button on the left hand steering wheel or decrease as the battery charges and controls. reset while on the MyView screen. Displays your average and instantaneous fuel economy on most Display Mode • Charge Fill (Hybrid Mode) . Charge Assist and Regen Display.The fill level indicates the continuously averaged since the last amount of energy stored in the high reset. When the vehicle is in Hybrid Mode the information is shown with a simple battery graphic. maximum scale number. 82 C-MAX (CCG) . Note: For Energi vehicles there are two versions of the battery gauge. level. • Charge Fill (Energi Plug-in Power • Average Fuel Economy .If your Note: The Charge Fill is always shown for instantaneous fuel economy is greater Plug-in Power Mode. EV is displayed and the gauge fill is shown in blue. or State of Charge indicates the amount of energy stored in the high Note: You can reset your average fuel voltage battery as a percent of total economy by pressing and holding the OK energy capacity. Average fuel economy cannot be discharges during normal operation. Battery Gauge: Note: Battery gauge information can be individually selected on or off through Battery Display in the Options sub-menu. • Instantaneous Fuel Economy .The fill screens. A full fill OK button on the left hand steering represents the total amount of energy wheel controls. From any main display a right arrow press on the steering wheel controls will take you to the Options sub-menu. even if Charge Fill is than the maximum value displayed. You can reset your average fuel voltage battery which is available for economy by pressing and holding the Plug-in Power Mode. a not selected under Battery Display in the + sign will be shown next to the Options sub-menu.is Mode) . When in Plug-in Power Mode an enhanced battery graphic is provided and available electric range is added to the display. For Energi vehicles both you can get from an external charge Hybrid and Plug-in Power mode (plugging your vehicle in). Instrument Cluster Common Displays The high voltage battery gauge appears on the right side of the information display Fuel Economy Displays: screen. This provides Charge Fill (State of Charge). automatically enter Hybrid Mode.

The distance traveled on battery power down arrow below the battery only (EV distance) and Regen distance indicates battery discharging to provide are displayed. the battery indicates battery charging • Distance . 83 C-MAX (CCG) . It coaches you energy presently available in the high to brake in a manner which maximizes the voltage battery and your typical energy amount of energy returned through the usage while driving. battery while plugged in. Regen distance is the power for propulsion or vehicle estimated range gained from energy accessories. Mode is displayed in kilowatt hours (kWh). The percent drive habits as well as your use of displayed is an indication of the accessories such as Climate Control. Fuel Gauge: • Brake Score .The up and down arrows provide information about the Trip Summary is displayed upon shutting energy going into and out of the high off your vehicle. The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol indicates on which side of the vehicle the WARNING LAMPS AND fuel filler door is located. such as from regenerative braking.The average percentage The fuel gauge will indicate approximately of braking energy recaptured and how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. This includes your regenerative braking system. INDICATORS The following warning lamps and indicators will alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious. a circular arrow symbol • Fuel Use .When stepping on the braking. refer to the respective system warning lamp for further information.The average fuel economy appears in the center of the Battery and total fuel used are displayed. If any lamps remain on after starting your vehicle. the total electrical through the regenerative braking energy used while in Plug-in Power system. In Gauge when energy is being recaptured addition for Energi. The data is calculated over voltage battery. The returned to the high voltage battery fuel gauge may vary slightly when your through regenerative braking.The total distance traveled. vehicle is moving or on a gradient. The The Brake Coach appears after your estimate is based on the amount of vehicle has come to a stop. brake pedal. Trip Summary: • Charge Assist . Instrument Cluster • Electric Range (Energi Plug-in Power Brake Coach Display: Mode) . The up arrow above the last on and off cycle. recaptured through regenerative • Regen Display .The electric range estimate is personalized to the driver's key. regenerative braking efficiency with 100% The available battery energy refers to representing the maximum amount of the energy gained from charging the energy recovery. Some lamps will light when you start your vehicle to make sure they work.

See Engine Oil Check (page 212). 84 C-MAX (CCG) . Switch and any door is not completely off all unnecessary electrical closed. E71340 Anti-Lock Braking System Direction Indicator If it lights when you are driving. Have your vehicle checked by your authorized dealer immediately. this Displays when the ignition is on indicates a malfunction. feature. switch off the engine and let cool. If you do not have the parking If it lights with the engine running brake engaged. (page 222). this fluid level or a brake system malfunction. You Lights when you switch on the will continue to have normal left or right direction indicator or braking (without anti-lock braking system) hazard warning flasher. parking brake with the ignition Stop the vehicle as soon as E144522 on. See Hybrid Electric risk of personal injury. this indicates a malfunction. Driving your vehicle with the warning Note: Do not resume your journey if it lights lamp on is dangerous. check that you do not have the parking brake Engine Oil engaged. A significant despite the level being correct. E144814 Vehicle (page 129). If the unless the brake system warning lamp also indicators stay on or flash faster. Instrument Cluster Note: Some warning indicators appear in Cruise Control (If Equipped) the information display and function the same as a warning lamp but do not display Lights when you switch on this when you start your vehicle. Have the system checked by an a burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb authorized dealer. this indicates low brake or while you are driving. Have the decrease in braking performance system checked by an authorized dealer may occur. and switch off the engine. Stop Have the system checked immediately by your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so an authorized dealer. your vehicle. Driving EV Now extended distances with the parking brake Lights when you select this engaged can cause brake failure and the feature on. Engine and Motor Coolant Temperature Brake System Lights when the engine or motor Lights when you engage the coolant temperature is high. Battery Door Ajar If it lights while driving. equipment and have the system checked by an authorized dealer immediately. indicates a malfunction. It will take you longer to stop immediately. check for lights. possible. If it lights when you are driving. Check the engine WARNING oil level.

Instrument Cluster EV Later Low Fuel Level Lights when you select this Lights when the fuel level is low feature on. or begins to flash at or remains on. driving. It will flash when you use the headlamp Lights when you switch the flasher. If it does not light when you your vehicle. this indicates a any time. parking lamps on. If the lamp remains on with safety belt. an authorized dealer. Liftgate Ajar Powertrain Fault Lights when the liftgate is not completely closed. Lights when the overdrive function in the transmission E162456 turns off and the grade assist High Beam turns on. Lights when the system detects E162453 a powertrain or high-voltage charge system fault. If the Low Battery (If Equipped) indicator stays on or continues to come on. You may also see a E144691 message suggesting you reduce your usage of the climate system. See Safety Belt the engine running or when Minder (page 30). have the system checked by an malfunction. Refuel as soon as possible. E151263 Vehicle (page 129). Front Airbag It also lights momentarily when you switch on the ignition to confirm the lamp is If it fails to light when you start functional. Fasten Safety Belt Low Tire Pressure Warning It will light and a tone will sound Lights when your tire pressure is to remind you to fasten your low. Have the system checked by authorized dealer. low. 85 C-MAX (CCG) . contact an authorized dealer as soon as Lights when the battery level is possible. check your tire pressure as soon as possible. Lights when you switch the high Parking Lamps beam headlamps on. continues to flash switch on the ignition. Overdrive Cancel and Grade Assist Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped) (If Equipped) Lights when you switch the front fog lamps on. See Hybrid Electric or the fuel tank is nearly empty.

See Using Stability Control (page 161). press the turn itself off if no malfunctions are brake pedal and release it. In limp home service engine soon light blinks eight times. catalytic converter. then accelerator pedal. During a vehicle on and it is ready to drive. See of the vehicle emissions control system. Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and Vehicle Plugged in (If Equipped) deceleration) and have your vehicle serviced immediately. vehicle operation. Lights when the system is active. It will go out when indicates that the On-Board Diagnostics you switch the system back on system (OBD) has detected a malfunction or when you switch the ignition off. A corresponding excessive exhaust temperatures could message may display after damage the catalytic converter or other attempting to start the vehicle. E144693 component fault or failure that will cause the vehicle to If the light is blinking. If this happens. See maximum speed of 35 mph (56 km/h) on Emission Control System (page 143). engine misfire is shutdown or enter into a limited operating occurring which could damage your mode. See Emission Control System Indicates an electrical (page 143). However. This will activate present. your vehicle will it means that the vehicle is not ready for accelerate in a controlled manner up to a Inspection and Maintenance testing. A message may also display. if after 15 seconds the limp home vehicle operation. Normally. Instrument Cluster Note: If your vehicle detects certain faults. dealer immediately. If you apply the brake pedal or move the transmission to neutral (N) you Stability Control can override your vehicle’s acceleration. vehicle components. a flat surface. Using Stability Control (page 161). Lights after your switch your this indicates a malfunction. Ready to Drive If it remains on or does not light E138639 when you switch the ignition on. The service engine soon indicator lights when you first switch on the ignition prior to engine start to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection and Maintenance testing. Have E144692 A corresponding message may the system checked by an authorized display stating ready to drive. E144694 vehicle. malfunction. this system off. 86 C-MAX (CCG) . the system will turn off. Lights after you plug in your Note: Under engine misfire conditions. Service Engine Soon Stability Control Off If the service engine soon indicator light stays on after you Lights when you switch the switch on the engine. Refer to On-Board diagnostics (OBD) in the Fuel and Refueling chapter for more Stop Safely information about having your vehicle serviced. the service engine soon light will it will not allow you to operate the stay on until you switch on the engine.

If the warning chime remains on after you have released the parking brake. Headlamps On Warning Chime Sounds when you remove the key from the ignition and open the driver's door and you have left the headlamps or parking lamps on. Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped) Sounds the horn twice when you exit the vehicle and the keyless vehicle is in RUN. Engine On Warning Chime A warning chime will sound when any door is opened if the vehicle exceeds a relatively low speed. have the system checked by your authorized dealer immediately. Instrument Cluster AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND INDICATORS Key in Ignition Warning Chime Sounds when you open the driver's door and you have left the key in the ignition with it in the off or accessory position. A message will be shown in the display. Automatic Transmission Warning Chime Sounds when you have not moved the transmission selector lever to position P. 87 C-MAX (CCG) . Parking Brake On Warning Chime Sounds when you have left the parking brake on and drive your vehicle. indicating the vehicle is still on.

Display Mode E162394 Use the up and down arrow buttons to choose between the • Press the up and down arrow buttons E144639 following display options. to scroll through and highlight the options within a menu. 88 C-MAX (CCG) . device that may take your focus off the road. crash and injury. Press the left arrow key as needed to exit back to the main menu. Information Displays GENERAL INFORMATION • Press the left arrow button to exit a menu. We strongly recommend that • Press the OK button to choose and you use extreme caution when using any confirm settings or messages. Information Information Display Controls E144642 Settings E100023 Scroll up or down to highlight one of the categories. Make sure you are aware of all applicable Display Mode local laws that may affect the use of E144639 electronic devices while driving Trip 1 & 2 Various systems on your vehicle can be E138660 controlled using the information display Fuel Economy controls on the steering wheel. Note: The cluster will remember menu level 2 state when the individual key state is • Press the right arrow button to enter a changed from RUN to the OFF position. We recommend From the main menu bar on the left side against the use of any hand-held device of the information display. you can choose while driving and encourage the use of from the following categories: voice-operated systems when possible. Corresponding information is displayed in E144640 the information display. loss of vehicle control. WARNING • Press and hold the left arrow button at any time to return to the main menu Driving while distracted can result in display (escape button). then press the right arrow key or OK to enter into that category. sub-menu. Your primary responsibility is the safe Main menu operation of your vehicle.

Information Displays Display Mode Menu level 2 Menu level 3 Menu level 4 Menu level 5 Vehicle Range Instantaneous Fuel — — (Estimated Range + Battery Gauge + Fuel Battery Display Regen Active Apply to all screens? Gauge) Yes / No Charge Assist Charge Level Help Help — — Inform Instantaneous Fuel — — (Avg Fuel Economy + Battery Gauge + Fuel Battery Display Regen Active Apply to all screens? Gauge) Yes / No Charge Assist Charge Level Help Help — — Enlighten Instantaneous Fuel — — (Power + Avg Fuel Economy + Battery Battery Display Regen Active Apply to all screens? Gauge + Fuel Gauge) Yes / No Charge Assist Charge Level Help Help — — Engage Instantaneous Fuel — — (Split Power + Avg Fuel Economy + Battery Display Regen Active Apply to all screens? Battery Gauge + Fuel Yes / No Charge Assist Gauge) Charge Level Help Help — — Empower Instantaneous Fuel — — 89 C-MAX (CCG) .

Information Displays Display Mode (Power (with engine Battery Display Regen Active Apply to all screens? on/off threshold) + Yes / No Avg Fuel Economy + Charge Assist Battery Gauge + Fuel Charge Level Gauge) Help Help — — MyView Change MyView Vehicle Range Vehicle Range (MyView + Battery Gauge + Fuel Gauge) Avg Fuel Avg Fuel Power Inst. Fuel Split Power Coolant Temp Power + Threshold Accessory Power Tach rpm x 1000 Trip 1 Tach rpm x 1000 + Trip 2 Avg mpg Accessory Power Fuel History Trip 1 Coach Trip 2 Blank Display Mode (cont'd) Menu level 2 Menu level 3 Menu level 4 Menu level 5 MyView (cont'd) Change MyView Fuel History — (MyView + Battery (cont'd) Gauge + Fuel Gauge) Coach — Blank — Battery Display Regen Active Apply to all screens? Yes / No Charge Assist Charge Level Help Help — — 90 C-MAX (CCG) .

Engage Inform Engage replaces the power demand gauge Inform shows the fuel level. the total default. fill is blue. Information Displays Display Mode (cont'd) Energy Use (Energi Battery Display Regen Active Apply to all screens? only) Yes / No Auto EV Charge Assist (consumption gauge Charge Level + climate power gauge + battery gauge Help + fuel gauge) EV Now Help — — (consumption gauge with budget cup + climate power gauge + engine enable + battery gauge + fuel gauge) EV Later (consumption gauge + climate power gauge + battery gauge + fuel gauge) Vehicle Range Enlighten Indicates the estimated distance the Enlighten displays power demand in vehicle will travel with the energy currently addition to the typical information and available. The Instantaneous estimate is based on the fuel remaining in Fuel Economy gauge will be displayed by the gasoline tank. EV is displayed. gauge fill is white. battery display and average fuel economy. EV in Hybrid Mode fueled by gasoline. When both the engine and high Mode. 91 C-MAX (CCG) . For Hybrid. When the vehicle is operating on battery power only with the engine off. EV is displayed. Changes in driving pattern may voltage battery are providing power the cause the values to vary. The engine power gauge fill is white the vehicle is operating on battery power and the high voltage battery power gauge only with the engine off. plus the is displayed and the gauge fill is shown in electric range available in Plug-in Power blue. the vehicle range options from Inform. When power. For Energi. with options from Enlighten with separate gauges for available for the Battery Display and an engine power and high voltage battery Instantaneous Fuel Economy gauge. When the vehicle is operating on estimated range equals the range available battery power only with the engine off.

When power demand is below the Climate includes the power being used by threshold the vehicle is operating on high voltage climate control components battery power only with the engine off. engine will typically run continuously • Use the right and left arrows to move when the indicator is blue. • The right column is reserved for the Battery Gauge and the Fuel Gauge. vehicle and let the engine cool. If the amber. Other includes all power being used by the When power demand exceeds the low voltage accessories (cabin fans. MyView The thermometer indicator next to the gauge will illuminate in blue or white to You can choose what to display in this indicate the following (not available for view. threshold both the engine and the high headlights. EV such as the electric A/C compressor and is displayed and the gauge fill is shown in the electric heater (Energi vehicles only) blue. etc. The gasoline content. At normal When power demand surpasses the amber operating temperature. heated seats. this level of demand and indicator will be white and will be in the associated fuel economy are shown in normal range (between H and C). The gauge is designed to power but do not contribute to show you how close you are to the gasoline propelling the vehicle. Selecting Change MyView in the Energi vehicles): options menu allows you to scroll through two columns of content choices.This indicates that the hybrid system is not warm enough • Press the up or down arrow to view to allow EV operation. • Blue thermometer . 92 C-MAX (CCG) . voltage battery provide power and the • Coolant Temp – Indicates engine gauge fill is white. Stop the vehicle button on the left hand steering wheel as soon as safely possible. Information Displays Empower Unique content available in MyView: Empower adds an engine on/off threshold • Accessory Power— Indicates electrical to the power demand gauge from power demands from your vehicle’s Enlighten. turn off the controls. between the left column content and the middle column content. Once you have your desired content showing in each column then press OK to save. the level indicator. the level indicator Note: You can reset your average fuel will change to red to indicate that the economy by pressing and holding the OK engine is overheating. The threshold is shown as a blue accessory systems. accessories. This becomes your new MyView screen. engine coolant temperature exceeds the normal range. The gauge engine on/off threshold and how much separately displays power demand in power you are requesting based on how kilowatts (kW) for climate and other far you press the accelerator pedal. Accessories use double outline. coolant temperature.).

to blue. When electric A/C compressor and the the vehicle is operating on battery electric heater. Your energy use includes input from After the first engine start the indicator will the accelerator pedal as well as the turn white when the gasoline engine is warm accessories. enough to turn off. Keep your current energy use mostly system warm. such as Climate Control. This is normal operation and does using more energy (lower is better). and average fuel economy cannot be reset in MyView. A higher line means you are period. Information Displays Note: During silent key start mode. E138660 and a climate power gauge in addition to fuel level and battery display. Note: The trip data. the within the cup while driving and you should thermometer indicator will revert back achieve your electric range estimate. These components use power only with the engine off. the • Consumption Gauge: Your current thermometer indicator will be blue. You can press OK to enable the engine when viewing this screen during EV Now operation. not indicate a problem with your vehicle. Trip 1 & 2 Energy Use (Energi only) Use the arrow buttons to choose Energy Use provides an energy use gauge between the following. the tachometer you vehicle’s high voltage climate gauge displays the engine speed in control components such as the revolutions per minute (RPM). When operating in EV Now a blue cup • White thermometer . When you select EV Now operation this screen will automatically be shown. This that the hybrid system is warm enough represents the maximum energy usage you to allow EV operation. This is the result traveled is represented by the white of the vehicle computer allowing the engine line that moves up and down in the to be cooler during the silent key start gauge.This indicates shape is shown around the gauge. See Hybrid Electric Vehicle (page 129). The gauge out. 93 C-MAX (CCG) . it is possible that the gasoline battery gauge at the time of entering EV engine may need to run to keep the now. In this case. • Climate Power Gauge: Indicates high • Tach rpm x 1000 — When the gasoline voltage electrical power demand from engine is running. displays power demand in kilowatts (kW). EV is power but do not contribute to displayed and the tachometer is greyed propelling the vehicle. but the present energy use per distance gasoline engine will not run. Note: Pressing OK resets the odometer and timer. If the vehicle can maintain in order to achieve the operates on battery power long estimated electric range shown on the enough.

Estimated amount of fuel consumed and Estimated amount of electricity consumed (Energi only) • Average fuel economy .Standard options plus. Trip distance and EV distance • Elapsed trip time — timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when the vehicle is restarted. Fuel Economy Use the arrow buttons to choose the desired energy display. • Trip distance — shows the accumulated trip distance. E144640 94 C-MAX (CCG) . • EV distance — shows the distance traveled while operating on battery power only with the engine off. Enhanced . • Estimated amount of fuel consumed — shows the amount of fuel used for a given trip. Information Displays Trip 1 & 2 Menu level 2 Menu level 3 Menu level 4 Menu level 5 Trip 1 & Trip 2 Standard — — (Trip Data+Battery Gauge+Fuel Gauge) — — — — Enhanced — — — — — — Battery Display Regen Active Apply to all screens? Yes / No Charge Assist Charge Level Help — Help — — Standard .is continuously averaged since the last reset. For Energi vehicles both hybrid and plug-in power mode operation will be included in the calculation. Average fuel economy.Elapsed trip time. • Estimated amount of electricity consumed — shows the amount of plug-in electricity used for a given trip.

• Coach: This view provides a comparison of your recent Acceleration. 2 or 6 minutes. the color is Amber. The data is represented as an average for time intervals of either 1. with the left most interval being the most recent. Note: Fuel economy is not always a measure of appropriate driving behavior. Intervals — (Instantaneous Fuel Economy + Fuel Battery Display Regen Active Apply to all screens? Economy History + Yes / No Charge Assist Avg Fuel Economy+Battery Charge Level Gauge+Fuel Gauge) Help Help — — Coach Battery Display Regen Active Apply to all screens? (Coach+Battery Yes / No Gauge+Fuel Gauge) Charge Assist Charge Level Help Help — — • Fuel History: This view from left to right starts with the instantaneous fuel economy gauge and adds historical fuel economy data. Information Displays Fuel Economy Menu level 2 Menu level 3 Menu level 4 Menu level 5 Fuel History Interval Time 1. For example. when driving uphill and maintaining an appropriate speed. suggesting that a change in behavior is needed to achieve better energy efficiency. 95 C-MAX (CCG) . Braking and Cruising behavior to what is recommended for most efficient use of energy under present conditions. Info In this mode. Total time for the 5 intervals is shown at the bottom of the view. The horizontal bars fill from left to right with best behavior (and Blue color) shown as at least half full. your instant fuel economy may not be good (losing leaves) but the Coach may show a blue bar for Acceleration or Cruising. Intervals shown in grey color are from the previous drive. When the bars are less than half full. 6 min. Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button on the left hand steering wheel controls. 2. you can view different vehicle system E144642 information and perform a system check.

Use the up/down arrows to scroll through the tutorials. MyKey MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed) MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a programmed MyKey) Admin Keys (Number of admin keys) System Check All active warnings will display first if applicable. Use the up/down arrows to scroll through the warn- ings. you can configure different driver setting choices. In this mode. The system check menu may appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. View them immediately by pressing OK and then OK again to enter system check. E100023 Settings Menu level 2 Menu level 3 Menu level 4 Menu level 5 Driver Assist Traction On or Off — Control ECO Cruise On (default — on key cycle) or Off Hill Start On (default — Assist on key cycle) or Off EV + Mode On or Off — Rear Park Aid On (default — on key cycle) or Off 96 C-MAX (CCG) . Use the up/down arrow buttons to scroll through the list. Information Displays Information Warnings Displays the number of warnings that need immediate attention in red. Tutorial Displays a number of different system tutorials. Then press OK to view. You can only view the warnings from the System Check menu. Note: Some items are optional and may Settings not appear.

Information Displays Settings Vehicle Lighting Auto Light On or Off Rain Home Light Select time interval Remote Start Climate Heater – A/C Auto or Last Control Settings Front Defrost Auto or Off Rear Defrost Auto or Off Driver Seat Auto or Off Passenger Seat Auto or Off Duration 5. Settings (cont’d) Menu level 2 Menu level 3 Menu level 4 Menu level 5 Vehicle (cont’d) Tire Mobility Kit Select number of years — MyKey Create MyKey Hold OK to Create — MyKey Traction Control Always On or User — Selectable Max Speed Choose desired speed or — off Speed Minder Choose desired speed or — off Volume Limiter On or Off — Clear MyKeys Hold OK to Clear All — MyKeys Display Language Select the desired — language 97 C-MAX (CCG) . 10 or 15 minutes Quiet Start On or Off System Enable or Disable Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.

Other messages will be removed automatically after a short time. 98 C-MAX (CCG) . E130248 Press the OK button to acknowledge and remove some messages from the information display. Information Displays Settings (cont’d) Units Distance Select the desired units of measure Temperature Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C) Brake Coach On or Off — Display Driving History Hold OK to Reset — INFORMATION MESSAGES Note: Depending on the vehicle options equipped with your vehicle. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. AdvanceTrac® Message Action Service AdvanceTrac Displayed when the system has detected a condition that requires service. not all of the messages will display or be available. Certain messages may be abbreviated or shortened depending upon which cluster type you have. Certain messages need to be confirmed before you can access the menus.

Information Displays Alarm Message Action To Stop Alarm. Liftgate Ajar Displays when the liftgate is not completely closed. Check Battery Charge Displays when battery charge level is low. Battery and Charging System (High Voltage) Message Action Is Vehicle Plugged-In? Displays when confirmation is needed that the vehicle is unplugged before a start is allowed. Stop Safely Now Displays when the stop safety hazard warning lamp is illumin- ated. Start Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthor- Vehicle ized entry. You must make sure the vehicle is unplugged and respond to the message prompt before starting your vehicle. Doors Message Action X Door Ajar Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed and the vehicle is moving. This indicates an electrical component fault/failure that will cause the vehicle to shut down or enter into limited operating mode. Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed. Unplug Prior to Starting Displays when the vehicle detects it is still plugged and the Vehicle power is activated. 99 C-MAX (CCG) . See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 64). Engine On Displays when the engine is on. Ready to Drive Displays when the vehicle is ready to drive.

Close Fuel Door Displays when the fuel door listed is not closed. Key Inside Vehicle Displays to remind you that the key is in the luggage compartment. See Fuel Quality (page 136). No Key Detected Displayed if the key is not detected by the system. Hill Start Assist Active Displays when hill start assist is active. 100 C-MAX (CCG) . Keys and Intelligent Access Message Action Starting System Fault This message is displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. See Keyless Starting (page 124). Key Not Inside Car Displays if the key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting (page 124). Refuel Error See Manual Displays when there is a vehicle error and it cannot be refueled. See your authorized dealer for service. Hill Start Assist OFF Displays when hill start assist is off. Information Displays Fuel Message Action Fuel Level LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition. Fuel Door Opening Displays when the fuel door is opening. See Hill Start Assist (page 157). Check Fuel Fill Inlet Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed. Contact your Available authorized dealer. Hill Start Assist Message Action Hill Start Assist Not Displays when hill start assist is not available. Fuel Freshness Displays when EV functionality is disabled and the engine is running to maintain fuel freshness. See Keyless Starting (page 124). Fuel Door Open Displays when the fuel door is opened and the vehicle is ready to be refueled.

when an intelligent Total access key is programmed to the system. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Change Engine Oil Soon Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. Oil Change Required Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%. Engine Coolant Overtem. Check the oil level. Max Number of Keys Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum Learned number of keys have been programmed. See Engine Oil Check (page 212). contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Press Brake + Start Displayed as a reminder to apply the brake and push the start Button button to start the vehicle. Could Not Program Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key Integrated Key using two existing MyKeys. See Brake Fluid Check (page 217). Accessory Power Active Displayed when the vehicle is in the Accessory ignition state. Press Brake to Start Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.Displays when the engine coolant temperature is excessively perature high. Brake Fluid Level LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately. Information Displays Message Action Restart Now or Key is Displayed when the start/stop button is pressed to shut off Needed the engine and a Intelligent Access Key is not detected inside the vehicle. 101 C-MAX (CCG) . Check Brake System Displays when the brake system needs servicing. turn off the engine. Maintenance Message Action LOW Engine Oil Pressure Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible. See Engine Oil Check (page 212). Contact your authorized dealer. Key Programmed x Keys Displayed during spare key programming. Place Key in Backup Slot Displayed as needed by the system for proper function. If the warning stays on or continues to come on with your engine running.

Oil Maintenance Displays when EV functionality is disabled and the engine is running to maintain oil quality. See Engine Oil Check (page 212). Audio Traction Control On . Information Displays Message Action Motor Coolant Overtem. Displays when a MyKey is in use and Traction control is MyKey Setting activated. Check Speed Drive Displays when MyKey is active. Service Tire Mobility Kit Displayed when the kit needs service. See Manual Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction. MyKey Park Aid Cannot Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activated. See your authorized dealer. Vehicle at Top Speed of Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is MyKey Setting reached. Safely Near Vehicle Top Speed Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h). Be Deactivated 102 C-MAX (CCG) .Displays when the motor coolant temperature is excessively perature high. Safely Buckle Up to Unmute Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated. MyKey Message Action MyKey Not Created Displayed during key programming when MyKey cannot be programmed. MyKey Active Drive Displays when MyKey is active.

the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5 km/h). See your authorized dealer. See Parking Aid (page 162). Steering malfunction The power steering system is not working. Rear Park Aid On Off Displays the park aid status. contact your authorized dealer. Stop the vehicle a Stop safely safe place. Park Aid Malfunction Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service. Check Rear Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires attention. See Parking Aid (page 162). See Parking Aid (page 162). Remote Start Message Action Remote Start Active Displayed when the remote start system is active. 103 C-MAX (CCG) . Power Steering Message Action Steering malfunction The power steering system has detected a condition that Service now requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released. Check Front Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires attention. Contact your authorized dealer. Information Displays Park Aid Message Action Check Park Aid Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service. Park Brake Message Action Park Brake Engaged Displays when the parking brake is set. Contact your authorized dealer. See Parking Aid (page 162).

Transmission Message Action Shift to Park Displays as a reminder to shift into park. If the warning stays on or continues to come on. contact your authorized dealer. Tire Pressure Monitor Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is Fault malfunctioning. 104 C-MAX (CCG) . Information Displays Tire Pressure Monitoring System Message Action Low Tire Pressure Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. Tire Pressure Sensor Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning. see See Tire Pres- sure Monitoring System (page 259). contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the warning stays on or continues to come on. For more information on how the system operates under these conditions. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 259). See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 259). or Fault your spare tire is in use.

airflow distribution. Pressing one of the fan speed buttons while in AUTO takes the system out of AUTO fan mode. the fan speed automatically adjusts to the highest speed and the temperature display returns to the full cool position. This re-cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient than normal air conditioning. Press this button again to return to the previous airflow selection. B Fan speed: Press the large fan icon to increase the fan speed. 105 C-MAX (CCG) . and outside or recirculated air. You can use this mode to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice. Air conditioning automatically turns on. Climate Control AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL A B C D E E141422 J I H G F A AUTO: Press to switch on full automatic operation. C On and off button: Press to switch the system on or off. Once you select your desired temperature using the temperature control. the system then automatically determines fan speed. Automatically turns on rear window defroster and heated mirrors. press the small fan icon to decrease the fan speed. E MAX A/C: Press to distribute recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle. D MAX Defrost: Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents. Recirculated air may help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle. A/C on or off. to heat or cool the vehicle to reach and maintain the desired temperature.

The display switches to permanent heating. the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates.5°C) in steps temperature on the driver’s side remains of 1°F (0. When you select recirculated air.5°C) and 85°F (29. or manually in any airflow mode except defrost. driver's side and passenger's side In position HI. shows the temperature settings for each side. the system temperatures independently. 86°F (30°C). Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency. Single Zone Temperature Control Temperature Control In this mode. In position LO. unchanged. 59°F (15°C). Dual Zone Temperature Control Select a temperature for the passenger’s E133115 side using the rotary control on the passenger’s side. I Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents and front and rear seat floor vents. Air conditioning also turns on automatically in some modes.5°C). G Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents. Single zone temperature You can set the temperature between control automatically switches off. the system adjusts the temperature to the same setting on the passenger’s side. Press again to switch off floor mode. Press the control again to switch off recirculated air and allow fresh air to enter into the vehicle. This may reduce the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Recirculated air turns on automatically when you select MAX A/C. Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce fog potential. Climate Control F Recirculated air: Press to switch from outside air to recirculated air. The system automatically provides outside air to reduce window fogging. Press again to switch off defrost mode. You can now adjust the the system switches to permanent cooling. The 60°F (15. If you adjust the setting using the rotary control on the driver’s side. the climate control system links the temperature settings for both the driver's side and passenger's side. J A/C: Press to switch air conditioning on or off. H Instrument panel: Press to distribute air through the instrument panel vents. 106 C-MAX (CCG) . Press again to switch off panel mode.

When the interior reaches the selected temperature. the system automatically selects passenger’s side temperature switches to recirculated air to maximize cooling of the the driver’s side temperature setting. economy when using the climate control system by using outside air instead of air Note: Do not place objects under the front conditioning. Note: You must switch the ignition on to use this feature. from the footwell air vents regardless of the air distribution setting. For maximum cooling performance. 107 C-MAX (CCG) . Temperature Control and the interior and exterior temperatures Press and hold AUTO for 2-4 seconds. The in the display. the instrument panel fresh air enters the vehicle. the air intake area at the base of the • Set the air distribution to panel or floor windshield. the system directs the air stream toward the windshield and side HEATED WINDOWS AND windows for as long as the engine remains cold. Climate Control Switching Back to Single Zone Note: When the system is in AUTO mode. interior. ice or leaves from 60°F (15. and side air vents should be fully open. your vehicle. The are high. • Press the small fan button until the fan is at its lowest setting. • Turn the temperature control knob(s) so the interior temperature is set to Note: Remove any snow. Note: At low ambient temperatures with AUTO selected. MIRRORS (IF EQUIPPED) Note: When you switch off the system. HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE Note: When you select windshield INTERIOR CLIMATE defrosting and defogging. (or both). Outside air flows into your Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may vehicle.5°C). Heated Rear Window outside air does not enter your vehicle. system automatically adjusts to the previously stored settings. To aid in side window defogging and demisting in cold weather. For the system • Press the recirculated air button so to function efficiently. do not drive with the system switched off or with recirculated air always In mild weather. press the floor Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside vent button. press Note: You may feel a small amount of air MAX A/C. you can improve your fuel switched on. Note: Do not adjust the settings when your • Press A/C so that A/C OFF appears vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold. seats as this may interfere with the airflow to the rear seats. cause the windows to fog up. the system automatically selects outside air. the instrument panel and footwell level functions switch General Hints off automatically and air conditioning switches on.

Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or attempt to readjust the REMOTE START (IF EQUIPPED) mirror glass that has frozen in place. system Automatic Settings Your cabin air filter is located under the instrument panel in the passenger footwell You can set the climate control to operate area. Climate Control Press the button to clear the rear window The particulate filtration system gives you of thin ice and fog. Turn the ignition petroleum-based cleaning products. the system is set to 72°F (22°C). Do not use razor blades or other sharp • It improves the interior compartment objects to clean the inside of the rear cleanliness. or • It improves your driving comfort by when you switch the ignition off. See result in degradation or damage to the Information Displays (page 88). The climate in the air supplied to the interior of your control system automatically sets the vehicle. cabin temperature during remote start. such as: CABIN AIR FILTER • heated seats • heated mirrors Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter • heated rear window. Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of You cannot adjust the system during any mirror with harsh abrasives. or to remove decals from the • It protects the climate control inside of the rear window. This may components from particle deposits. spores and pollen Control > Heater-A/C > Auto. Running You can adjust the settings using the the system without a filter in place could information display controls. Your warranty does not cover this Replace the filter at regular intervals. window. vehicle-dependent features back on. mist and settings. cause damage to the heated grid lines. the Scheduled Maintenance chapter. fog when you switch on the heated rear You need to turn certain window. In hot weather. 108 C-MAX (CCG) . The feature will turn off benefits: automatically after several minutes. This prevents foreign objects from entering the system. See damage. The particulate filtration system in AUTO mode through the information reduces the concentration of airborne display setting: Remote Start > Climate particles such as dust. on to return the system to its previous The heated mirrors remove ice. These actions could cause damage to the glass The climate control system adjusts the and mirrors. see an authorized dealer. You can now make adjustments. Press the button again and your passengers the following to switch it off. fuel or other remote start operation. reducing particle concentration. interior temperature to 72°F (22°C). Heated Exterior Mirror (If Equipped) For more information about your filter. installed at all times.

and selected to AUTO in the information displays) during remote start. Last Settings You can set the climate control to operate using the last climate control settings through the information display setting: Remote Start > Climate Control > Heater–A/C > Last Settings. Climate Control In moderate weather. Heated and Cooled Devices The climate control system controls other heated and cooled devices inside the vehicle. the system is set to 72°F (22°C). The rear defroster and heated mirrors automatically turn on. The rear defroster. You can switch these devices on (if available. Heated devices usually switch on during cold weather. The heated seats are set to high (if available. In cold weather. and cooled devices during hot weather. heated mirrors and heated seats do not automatically turn on. 109 C-MAX (CCG) . the system either heats or cools (based on previous settings). and selected to AUTO in the information display). The climate control system automatically uses the settings last selected before you turned off the engine.

can take weight off the seat cushion • Adjust the head restraint so that the and affect the decision of the passenger top of it is level with the top of your sensing system. An improperly adjusted head restraint may not adequately protect an occupant during an impact from the rear. WARNINGS Sitting improperly. breastbone and the air bag cover. serious injury in the event of a crash • Bend your legs slightly so that you can or during heavy braking. Do not adjust head restraint. the seat. press the pedals fully. resulting in (25 centimeters) between your serious injury in the event of a crash. of a crash. 110 C-MAX (CCG) . We can cause the occupant to slide recommend a minimum of 10 inches under the safety belt. Do not place objects higher than the • Hold the steering wheel with your arms seat back to reduce the risk of slightly bent. HEAD RESTRAINTS WARNINGS Fully adjust the head restraint before you sit in or operate your vehicle. or death in the event of a crash. Always sit Make sure that you remain upright against your seat back. The head restraint is a safety device. • Position the shoulder strap of the safety belt over the center of your shoulder and position the lap strap tightly across your hips. Seats SITTING IN THE CORRECT We recommend that you follow these guidelines: POSITION • Sit in an upright position with the base of your spine as far back as possible. feet on the floor. with your comfortable. Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied. This E68595 will help minimize the risk of neck When you use them properly. • Keep sufficient distance between Do not recline the seat back as this yourself and the steering wheel. safety belt and air bags will the head restraint when your vehicle is provide optimum protection in the event moving. injury in the event of a crash. Make sure that your driving position is comfortable and that you can maintain full control of your vehicle. resulting in serious injury head and as far forward as possible. out of position or • Do not recline the seat back more than with the seat back reclined too far 30 degrees.

Pull the head restraint up. Adjust the head restraint so that Raising the Head Restraint the top of it is level with the top of your head and as far forward as possible. Installing the Head Restraint Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves E138642 and push the head restraint down until it locks. Press and hold button C. Seats WARNINGS C Guide sleeve adjust and unlock Install the head restraint properly to button. adjust the head restraint to Lowering the Head Restraint its highest position. button. help minimize the risk of neck injury D Guide sleeve unlock and remove in the event of a crash. B Two steel stems. Rear center seat head restraint Rear Seat Outboard Head Restraints E138645 E162605 The head restraints consist of: A An energy absorbing head restraint. 3. If you are extremely tall. Note: Adjust the seat back to an upright Adjusting the Head Restraint driving position before adjusting the head restraint. 2. 1. Front seat head restraint 2. that you remain comfortable. Make sure Pull the head restraint up. Press and hold buttons C and D. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches its highest position. Push the head restraint down. Removing the Head Restraint 1. 111 C-MAX (CCG) .

Tilting Head Restraints (If Equipped) The front head restraints tilt for extra comfort. To tilt the head restraint. After the head restraint reaches the C Guide sleeve unlock and remove forward-most tilt position. do the following: E162375 E144727 112 C-MAX (CCG) . pivot it forward button. To reduce the risk of injury. B Two steel stems. 2. Press and hold button D. Pull the head restraint up. Moving the Seat Backward and Forward Folding the Head Restraint 1. do not Installing the Head Restraint adjust the driver's seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving. again to release it to the rearward. Removing the Head Restraint MANUAL SEATS 1. position. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving or riding position. 2. Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves and push the head restraint down until it locks. un-tilted D Fold button. Pivot the head restraint forward toward your head to the desired position. Seats The head restraints consist of: 1. Press and hold buttons C. A An energy absorbing head restraint. WARNING 2. Pull it back up to reset.

Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped) E70730 Recline Adjustment E161564 POWER SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) WARNINGS Do not adjust the driver's seat or seatback when your vehicle is moving. it to the original position. Adjusting your seatback while your vehicle is in motion may cause loss of control of your vehicle. An unlatched seat may become dangerous if you stop suddenly or have a crash. E163872 113 C-MAX (CCG) . Seats WARNING WARNING Rock the seat backward and forward Do not place cargo or any objects after releasing the lever to make sure behind the seatback before returning that it is fully engaged. Do not place cargo or any objects behind the seatback before returning it to the original position. Pull on the seatback to make sure that it has fully Adjusting the Height of the latched after returning the seatback to its Driver's Seat original position.

Seats E138647 Power Lumbar (If Equipped) E138648 114 C-MAX (CCG) .

115 C-MAX (CCG) . needles or other pointed objects. press the button the battery to lose charge. Allow the seat to dry thoroughly. such as a blanket or cushion. chronic illness. Doing so can cause 1. spinal cord injury. This may cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not do the following: • Place heavy objects on the seat. especially if used for long periods of time. An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury. Folding the Seatback (If • Operate the heated seats unless the Equipped) engine is running. With the seat empty. • Operate the heated seat if water or any E155554 other liquid is spilled on the seat. Make sure the rear center headrest is in the full down position. 2. This may damage the heating element which may cause the heated seat to overheat. diabetes. must exercise care when using the heated seat. Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat. Pull the lever up on the outboard side of the seat to fold the seat. medication. exhaustion or other physical conditions. alcohol use. on the outboard side of each rear outboard headrest to fold them. E138653 Adjust the control to the desired heat setting. Do not puncture the seat with pins. The heated seat may cause burns even at low temperatures. Unfolding the Seatback Rotate the seatback upward until the seat back latches to return the seat to the upright position. Seats REAR SEATS HEATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING People who are unable to feel pain to their skin because of advanced age.

Seats REAR SEAT ARMREST (IF EQUIPPED) E138656 Fold the armrest down to use the armrest and cupholder. 116 C-MAX (CCG) .

To change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed. Federal Safety home. turn your ignition to the on position. entry door an object. See Erasing the function button codes later in this section. Universal Garage Door Opener HomeLink Wireless Control The universal garage door opener replaces System (If Equipped) the common hand-held garage door opener with a three-button transmitter WARNING that is integrated into the driver’s sun visor. signaling the door to stop and locks and home or office lighting.S. security systems. garage. Note: We recommend that upon the sale or lease termination of your vehicle. Note: Make sure you keep the original Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held remote control transmitter for use in other transmitter. reverse. you erase the programmed function buttons for security reasons. Using a garage door found online at www. Do not use the system with any The system includes two primary features. See Erasing the function 1. garage door opener that does not a garage door opener and a platform for have the safety stop and reverse remote activation of devices within the feature as required by U. be programmed to operate entry gate A garage door opener which cannot detect operators. E142657 117 C-MAX (CCG) . button. Note: Make sure that the garage door and In-vehicle programming security device are free from obstruction This process is to program your hand-held when you are programming. you must first erase the E142658 current settings. Hold your hand-held garage door transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8 centimeters) away from the HomeLink button you want to program.homelink.com or by opener without these features increases calling the toll-free help line on the risk of serious injury or death. Note: You can program a maximum of three devices. This will ensure quicker training vehicles as well as for future system and accurate transmission of the programming. 1982). 1-800-355-3515. the system transmitter can opener manufactured before April 1. 2. Do not program transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink the system with the vehicle in the garage. radio-frequency signal. does not meet current federal Additional system information can be safety standards. but do not start your vehicle. With your vehicle parked outside of the button codes later in this section. As well as being programmed for Standards (this includes any garage door garage doors.

Depending Note: You may need a ladder to reach the on your brand of garage door opener. then opener motor. unit and you may need to remove the cover you may need to repeat this sequence or lamp lens on your garage door opener. If your garage door HomeLink at www. DO NOT release either one until the HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly and then rapidly. please contact to activate the door. You may need to do this twice For questions or comments. Return to your vehicle. the Programming your garage door opener programming is complete. When the indicator light flashes rapidly. Repeat this step. The rapid flashing indicates successful training. the HomeLink button is not programmed 2.homelink. yet. release. See motor Programming your garage door motor 1. 3. Universal Garage Door Opener 3. Using both hands. indicator light. watch the HomeLink 1-800-355-3515. both buttons may be released. Do the following: Press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release the hand-held transmitter button every 2 seconds. Press the learn button on the garage later in this section. Erasing the Function Button Codes Note: You cannot erase individual buttons. press and hold the desired HomeLink button and the hand-held transmitter button. release. If the indicator light stays on. repeat you programmed for five seconds. steps. 118 C-MAX (CCG) . E142659 4. door opener motor and then you have If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2 30 seconds to complete the next two seconds and then turns to a constant light. The HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly once the HomeLink function button recognizes and accepts the hand-held transmitter’s radio frequency signal.com or does not operate. Press and hold the function button you begin programming your garage door want to program for 2 seconds. a third time. Press and hold the HomeLink button To program additional buttons. simultaneously. then Steps 1 – 4. E142658 After programming the HomeLink button.

Press and hold both the programmed after 20 seconds. release the button until the with the garage door opener. When the indicator lights flash. contact visor will flash rapidly when the HomeLink at www. follow these steps: 3. The indicator light will change the buttons. 2. Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for up to 30 seconds. follow Step 1 in the transmitter and the button you want Programming section. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches 1. the Genie transmitter must be changed out of program mode. 2. Without releasing the Genie button on the hand-held button.com or programming is successful. indicator light turns off before pressing the button again. The indicator light will begin to flash 4. Press and hold the desired button. If Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter the Genie transmitter indicator light displays must already be programmed to operate green and red. 1. Universal Garage Door Opener A B E142660 E142661 1. Do (2–8 centimeters) of the button on the NOT release the button. Note: To program HomeLink to the transmitter you must first put the Once HomeLink has been programmed transmitter into programming mode. release seconds. The codes for all buttons from green to red and green. visor you want to program. Press and hold one of the buttons on the hand-held transmitter for 10 2. To do this: 119 C-MAX (CCG) . Red indicator light buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the B. successfully. Press and hold the outer two function A. The indicator light on the For questions or comments. to program. Press the same button twice to confirm Reprogramming a Single Button the change to programming mode. If done properly the indicator light will To program a device to a previously trained appear red. Green indicator light indicator lights above the buttons flash rapidly. button. are erased. If HomeLink does not Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2 program within 30 seconds the Genie Garage Door Opener transmitter will need to be pressed again. 1-800-355-3515.homelink.

time both buttons should be released. Programming has now been erased. and 1. Only the operation. Press and hold the previously programmed Genie button on the programmed button on the visor for 2 hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. Operation is subject to the E142662 following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference. and the indicator light should blink slowly to indicate the device is in train mode when any of the three HomeLink buttons are pressed. Programming is now complete. to red and green. Note: The next two steps must be completed in 30 seconds. Both indicator lights on the garage door opener motor unit should now flash purple. seconds. Press and release the program button. If done correctly the Clearing a HomeLink Device indicator light will turn green. Press the same button twice to confirm the change. Release the program button. 2. interference that may cause undesired 2. Press and release the Genie Intellicode 2 hand-held transmitter’s previously programmed button. To erase programming from the three Programming HomeLink to the Genie HomeLink buttons press and hold the two Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash. 4. at which garage door opener motor. FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada Compliance This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Repeat this step up to 3 times The indicator light will change from red until the garage door moves. flash. 120 C-MAX (CCG) . including both blue indicator lights turn on. responsible for compliance can void the The larger purple indicator light will user’s authority to operate the equipment. Press and hold the program button on (2) this device must accept any the garage door opener motor until interference received. Press and hold the previously 5. not expressly approved by the party 3. The indicator light will Note: You may need a ladder to access the begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds. Universal Garage Door Opener 1. smaller round indicator light should be Changes or modifications to your device on.

power point to overload due to powering Note: Do not insert objects other than an multiple devices that can reach beyond accessory plug into the power point. since it will defeat the safety may be insufficient power to restart your protection design. Note: Do not use the power point for operating a cigar lighter element. Note: Always keep the power point caps closed when not in use. Auxiliary Power Points 12-volt DC power point • on the front of the center console • inside the center console storage bin WARNING • in the luggage compartment. Do not plug optional electrical accessories into the cigar lighter 110-volt AC power point (If Equipped) socket (if equipped). There power point. This the 150-watt load limit and could result in will damage the outlet and blow the fuse. Locations Power points may be found: 121 C-MAX (CCG) . It is located on the rear of the center running. console. Doing so my cause the vehicle. fire or serious injury. the battery will discharge. • Do not leave devices plugged in overnight or when the vehicle is parked for extended periods. To prevent the battery from E143941 being discharged: The power point is used for powering • Do not use the power point longer than electrical devices that require up to 150 necessary when the vehicle is not watts. Note: The power point will turn off when the ignition is switched off or the battery Note: Do not use the power point over the voltage drops below 11 volts. Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the power point. Note: Improper use of the power point can cause damage not covered by your warranty. vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or a fuse may blow. and can result in fire or serious injury. Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use. Improper use of the lighter can cause damage not WARNING covered by your warranty. Do not use Note: If used when the vehicle is not any extension cord with the 110-volt AC running. Note: Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug.

122 C-MAX (CCG) . • Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply: microcomputer-controlled electric blankets. such as medical equipment. etc. • Measuring devices. which process precise data. the ignition is off or no device is plugged in. measuring equipment. etc. Let the system cool off. touch-sensor lamps. It can also switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded. The power point temporarily turns off power if the 150-watt limit is exceeded. compressor-driven refrigerators. • flashing — the power point is in fault mode. such as vacuum cleaners. overheated or has shorted. Unplug your device and switch the ignition off then on for overloading and shorting conditions. etc. Auxiliary Power Points When the indicator light. • off — the power point is off. is: • on — the power point is working. the ignition is on and a device is plugged in. located on the power point. then turn the ignition off then on for an overheating condition. electric saws and other electric power tools. tube-type televisions • Motor loads. The power point is not designed for electric devices such as: • Cathode-ray.

including hot drinks which may spill. 123 C-MAX (CCG) . auxiliary input jack. acceleration or collisions. USB port and media hub C Auxiliary power point OVERHEAD CONSOLE E131605 Press near the rear edge of the door to open it. Available console features include: A B C E142433 A Cupholder B Storage compartment with auxiliary power point. Storage Compartments CENTER CONSOLE Stow items in the cupholder carefully as items may become loose during hard braking.

II (on) .cranks the engine. you smell exhaust fumes.The ignition is off. This is because the engine management system must realign itself with the engine. your vehicle indicators illuminate. Do not drive your vehicle if vehicle battery to lose charge. accessories.All electrical circuits are operational and the warning lamps and If you disconnect the battery. may exhibit some unusual driving characteristics for approximately 5 miles III (start) . creating the risk of fire or other damage. standard requirements regulating the Note: A valid key must be located inside impulse electrical field or radio noise. 124 C-MAX (CCG) . system. Note: When you switch the ignition off and Do not start the vehicle in a closed leave your vehicle. do not leave your key in garage or in other enclosed areas. (8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This could cause your immediately. Do not park. idle or drive your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground E72128 cover. your vehicle to switch the ignition on and When you start the vehicle. your vehicle. the ignition. This could cause your vehicle Exhaust fumes can be toxic. creating the risk of fire. open the garage door before you start the I (accessory) . Starting and Stopping the Engine GENERAL INFORMATION IGNITION SWITCH WARNINGS Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system. have your vehicle Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this checked by an authorized dealer position for too long. the accelerator pedal before and during operation.Allows the electrical vehicle. The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust 0 (off) . avoid pressing start the vehicle. function if the key is close to metal objects The powertrain control system meets all or electronic devices such as cellular Canadian interference-causing equipment phones. You can KEYLESS STARTING disregard any unusual driving Note: The keyless starting system may not characteristics during this period. Always battery to lose charge. to operate If you smell exhaust fumes inside while the engine is not running. Only use the accelerator pedal when you have difficulty starting the vehicle. such as the radio.

Note: If you cannot start the vehicle on the • Start: Starts the vehicle. 1. • Move the transmission selector lever E146431 to position P. press and release the button once. If you are unable to start the vehicle. idle speed does not slow down automatically. Fully press the brake pedal. this start at the time of the vehicle start. Since your vehicle is equipped When the engine starts for the first time with a silent key start. the idle speed increases. • The key frequencies are jammed. Note: Cranking may last for up to 15 • Without applying the brake pedal. Starting and Stopping the Engine Ignition Modes Before starting the vehicle. check the following: • Make sure all occupants have fastened their safety belts. See helps to warm up the engine. 2. or when the vehicle is on but not 1. Turn the key to position III to start the • On: All electrical circuits are vehicle. Vehicles with an Ignition Key press and release the button once Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. see the following instructions. the engine may not on your drive. have your vehicle checked The system does not function if: by an authorized dealer. • Press the brake pedal. and then Vehicles with Keyless Start press the button until the vehicle Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal. may not start when the vehicle starts. • Make sure the headlamps and electrical accessories are off. The engine first try. Release the key when the operational and the warning lamps and vehicle starts. STARTING A GASOLINE Note: The green ready indicator illuminates ENGINE letting you know that the vehicle is ready for driving. Fully press the brake pedal. • Turn the ignition key to position II. indicators illuminate. If the engine Hybrid Electric Vehicle (page 129). moving. seconds. • Without applying the brake pedal. do the following: 125 C-MAX (CCG) . • Off: Turns the ignition off. turns on. wait for a short period and try again. If The keyless starting system has three your vehicle is equipped with a keyless modes: ignition. 2. Press the button. when the ignition is in the on mode. or until the vehicle starts. • Make sure the parking brake is on. • The key battery has no charge.

vehicle is still moving will result in a loss of brake and steering assistance. E145988 2. Within 20 seconds of switching the vehicle Vehicles with an Ignition Key off. Press the button once. Hold the key next to the steering Is Moving column as shown. it remains running until you press the button. WARNING 2. press the brake pedal and press the button. Move the transmission selector lever to position P. you can use the start button to switch the Switching off the vehicle when the ignition on and start your vehicle. You cannot restart the vehicle if the system does not detect a valid key within 20 seconds. but higher effort will be required. Turn the key to position 0. 2. 126 C-MAX (CCG) . you 1. Apply the parking brake. Move the transmission selector lever to position P. If you open and close a door while the vehicle is running. even if the system does not detect a valid key. E142874 Switching Off the Vehicle When It 1. present. Apply the parking brake. Move the transmission selector lever can no longer restart the vehicle without to position N and use the brakes to the key present inside your vehicle. the system searches for a valid key. After 20 seconds have expired. even if a valid key is not off. Switching Off the Vehicle When It Is Stationary Vehicles with an Ignition Key 1. 3. Note: This switches off the ignition. 5-button remote 3. Starting and Stopping the Engine 3-button remote Once the vehicle has started. some electrical circuits. Vehicles with Keyless Start 1. warning lamps and indicators. Fast Restart The steering will not lock. When the ignition is The fast restart feature allows you to switched off. restart the vehicle within 20 seconds of warning lamps and indicators may also be switching it off. bring your vehicle to a safe stop. all electrical circuits. With the key in this position.

we recommend that you Suitable for Use with Outdoor do one of the following: Appliances. • Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord Take precautions to avoid its dangerous that is product certified by effects. position P. This allows Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes the climate control system to respond quickly. This extension cord must be suitable for use outdoors. Press and hold the button for one Note: The heater is most effective when second. 4. Apply the parking brake. or press it three times within outdoor temperatures are below 0°F two seconds. When your vehicle has stopped. (-18°C). have your vehicle electrical source. Carbon for a safe and correct operation: monoxide is present in exhaust fumes. The heater acts as a starting aid by warming the engine coolant. and be clearly marked for long periods. checked by your authorized dealer immediately. This could centimeters) result in an electric shock or become a fire hazard. There is a risk the transmission selector lever to of electrical shock. move ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF the transmission selector lever to position P and turn the key to position EQUIPPED) 0. Move the transmission selector lever to position N and use the brakes to Do not use your heater with bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Apply the parking brake. Do not use an indoor • Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5 extension cord outdoors. in cold If you stop your vehicle and leave it idling temperatures. ungrounded electrical systems or 2. 3. • Do not use multiple extension cords. Do not drive your vehicle if We recommend that you do the following you smell exhaust fumes. When your vehicle has stopped. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards Association Important Ventilating Information (CSA). WARNINGS Failure to follow engine block heater Vehicles with Keyless Start instructions could result in property damage or serious personal injury. 1. 3. • Set your climate control to outside air. Starting and Stopping the Engine 2. 127 C-MAX (CCG) . The equipment includes a heater WARNING element (installed in the engine block) and a wire harness. You can connect the If you smell exhaust fumes inside system to a grounded 120-volt AC your vehicle. move two-pronged adapters. • Use as short an extension cord as possible.

the extension cord plug and heater cord plug connections are free and clear of water. • Make sure your vehicle is parked in a clean area. • Make sure the heater. Clean them with a dry cloth if necessary. • Make sure the heater system is checked for proper operation before winter. Using the heater longer than three hours does not improve system performance and unnecessarily uses electricity. Using the Engine Block Heater Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use.0 kilowatt-hours of energy per hour of use. Make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the block heater cord plug when not in use. heater cord and extension cord are firmly connected. 128 C-MAX (CCG) . Starting and Stopping the Engine • Make sure that when in operation. • Check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately 30 minutes. It achieves maximum temperature after approximately three hours of operation. clear of combustibles. This could cause an electric shock or fire. The system does not have a thermostat.4 to 1. The heater uses 0. • Make sure the system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving your vehicle.

the powertrain system will methods: automatically switch to hybrid mode. You can view your estimated This mode provides an electric electric range in this mode from the only driving experience. This will change power. and will Hybrid mode uses both the gasoline engine automatically return to EV Now after and electric motor to power your vehicle eight seconds or when the engine is no and maximize fuel economy as with longer needed. Your 1. Press the EV button. 129 C-MAX (CCG) . of the EV button. This voltage battery's extended range mode will be the only one available if the capability. Unique Driving Characteristics HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE Auto EV This mode provides an Plug-in Power Mode and Hybrid automatic use of high voltage Mode (C-MAX Energi Only) E155152 battery power during the drive. System conditions may require engine operation. Press the accelerator pedal fully. the engine as needed. The enhanced battery gauge on the instrument E144814 left-hand information display panel display. The system maximizes the will change to an Energy Use screen that use of electric-only operation in plug-in supplies EV specific tools and functions. These modes are available when the vehicle can run under high voltage battery 3. plug-in power has been depleted. A message Engine Enabled for System Performance will display if this occurs. the mode to EV Later and permit you can change EV modes with each press engine operation. power mode. C-MAX Hybrid. With the vehicle in driving mode. Press the OK button on the left 5–way battery gauge will show an electric range steering wheel control while viewing of zero before transitioning to a simple the EV screen. A pop EV Modes (C-MAX Energi Only) up message stating Press OK to Enable Engine will appear. disappear if you release the accelerator pedal. require it. the The vehicle may accelerate more slowly system uses plug-in power whenever and the top speed may be lower than in possible. you add electrical energy that is then used to propel the vehicle in plug-in power EV Now mode. This is normal function. 2. The current mode will be The vehicle may automatically enter displayed in the left hand instrument Engine Enabled mode if system conditions cluster screen. The vehicle will enable battery graphic upon entering hybrid mode. You must plug C-MAX Energi vehicles in staying in electric mode when possible and regularly for optimal use of the high running the engine when needed. Your engine may be enabled When your plug-in power has been at any time by using one of the following depleted. Auto mode. Press OK Your vehicle contains selectable on the left steering wheel button to EV modes through the EV button activate as needed. When you charge your vehicle. The message will E144814 on the center console. however. and your vehicle will return to EV Now when possible.

the EV icon will be yellow. will display if this occurs. or both). the engine will not start unless the vehicle Your vehicle will run the engine as needed is cold. This temporary condition is and the outside temperature is cold. or standing. the gas engine normally information display. plug-in power usage is most efficient). Unique Driving Characteristics The vehicle may enter Enable Engine mode Note: You may notice higher engine speeds if the climate control is in a defrost mode upon start-up. 130 C-MAX (CCG) . engine. When you enable EV Later. The engine may not start because this EV Later vehicle is equipped with silent key start. gasoline propulsion to provide breakthrough performance and improved • Ascending a hill efficiency. You may press the EV button running include: twice during the next drive to return to EV • Considerable vehicle acceleration Later mode. A normal and necessary to heat up the cabin message Engine Enabled Due to Defrost and minimize emissions. This fuel saving feature allows your vehicle This mode saves most of the to be ready–to–drive without requiring the high voltage battery plug in gas engine to be running. if desired. Familiarizing yourself with these • Charge level of high voltage battery is unique characteristics will provide an low optimal driving experience from your new vehicle. a blue EV icon portion of the instrument cluster and a displays in the left-hand information ready to drive message will appear in the display. EV Now will automatically exit when the Plug in power has been depleted. E144692 light will appear in the lower right When you enable EV Now. but later your drive will be vehicle is capable of movement (using its at low speeds in an urban area where electric motor. If defrost is not Starting: When you start your needed. a green ready indicator mode to permit EV Now. Typically. coming to Later icon appears on the left-hand a stop. shuts down and the vehicle operates in The EV Later mode will automatically reset electric-only mode. This indicator will E151263 power for future use (for remain on while the vehicle is on. • Vehicle speed above 85 mph (137 Hybrid Vehicle Operation (C-MAX km/h) However. you know that the vehicle is ready for driving. a climate control change is and keep most of the high voltage battery requested. Conditions that may to EV Auto mode when you power the cause the engine to start up or remain vehicle off. letting Enabled mode. whether example. starts and stops to provide power when needed and to save fuel when not needed. If the vehicle is in the Engine middle of the left cluster screen. your initial drive is at high speeds the engine is running or not to indicate the on open roads. plug in power for later use in Auto Mode or Driving: The gas engine automatically EV Now mode. or the accelerator is pressed. a white EV While coasting at low speeds. select a different climate control vehicle. the maximum speed Hybrid and C-MAX Energi) for electric-only operation may be lower while driving in hot temperatures This hybrid vehicle combines electric and or on hilly terrain.

is not directly tied to your vehicle speed. Avoid placing objects Transmission Operation: Due to the at the vent holes that block airflow to the technologically advanced. You may temperature. Reverse: In position R. Here is a description of the This only occurs when the high voltage major differences: battery charge is low. This is intentional and of time because this will discharge your maintains the battery charge level. performance. you will not feel shift Engine: The engine speed in your hybrid changes like those of a non-hybrid vehicle. This hybrid system. the engine stays Low Gear: Low gear (position L) is on. In low gear. high voltage battery. The engine will not start or stop. This is the normal Low gear will produce high engine speeds operation of the electric generator in the to provide necessary engine braking. notice slight changes in driveability during this process. optimization features. Unique Driving Characteristics • Very high or low outside temperature Unique Hybrid Operating (to provide system cooling or heating) Characteristics For C-MAX Energi vehicles. operating your vehicle. In prolonged mountainous driving. Simply step on the accelerator when you The high voltage battery is cooled by cabin are ready to drive. performance. but it is an important part of Stopping: The gas engine may shut off your hybrid's high voltage battery to conserve fuel as you come to a stop. Your vehicle's engine and transmission are Note: Since engine speed is controlled by designed to deliver the power you need at the transmission. or if the outside Battery: Your hybrid is equipped with a temperature is cold enough to require high voltage battery. the gas engine will remain on more often than in position D. A cool battery ensures the engine to provide additional heat battery life and provides the best possible for the cabin. climate control demands by passengers may Your vehicle behaves differently compared not directly cause the engine to run. This is normal hybrid operation and heavy accelerations. you may Neutral: It is not recommended to idle the see the engine tachometer changing vehicle in position N for an extended period without your input. During this engine braking. vehicle speed is limited to 22 mph (35 km/h). You high voltage battery and decrease fuel may also notice during extended downhill economy. air drawn from vent holes in the trim panels behind the rear seats. Restarting the vehicle is not required. but it is not using any fuel. During times. 131 C-MAX (CCG) . it may seem elevated at the most efficient engine speed. Your hybrid high voltage • Engine not warm enough to provide battery may periodically re-condition itself passenger requested cabin to ensure maximum efficiency. system in position N. to a non-hybrid. your hybrid may reach helps deliver fuel efficiency and high engine speeds (up to 6000 RPM). You may also designed to mimic the enhanced engine hear a slight whine or whistle when braking available in non-hybrid vehicles. is normal and will not damage your vehicle. electronically-controlled continuously variable transaxle. driving that your engine continues to run and cannot provide power to the hybrid instead of shutting off.

is a normal condition. the engine may accessories that may increase continue to operate for three to five aerodynamic drag. The EV indicator will cases. Your vehicle will recognize your frequent Driving to optimize fuel economy destinations and allow for more EV driving as you approach them. your vehicle. may become disconnected or disabled. For example. In general. See Information Displays (page 88). In some stay in electric mode. your fuel economy. Once the battery is reconnected and after • Be mindful of adding external driving the vehicle. is performed by your transmission and it captures brake energy and stores it in your EV+ Mode high voltage battery. As with any vehicle. The vehicle is ready to regenerative braking. 132 C-MAX (CCG) . • Perform all scheduled maintenance. keep You can clear these destinations with a in mind these tips: Driving History reset through the Settings • Keep the tires properly inflated and menu. Unique Driving Characteristics During certain events (such as vehicle Additional Tips: servicing) your low voltage 12-volt battery • Do not carry extra loads. This • Observe posted speed limits. you can achieve better fuel economy with mild to moderate acceleration and deceleration. Regenerative braking drive immediately after starting. throughout your hybrid's break-in period. Note: The EV+ feature can be turned on or • Aggressive driving increases the off through the Driver Assist section of the amount of energy required to move Settings menu. it is actually more efficient than display EV+ when this mode is active. For best results. Braking: Your hybrid is equipped with • There is no need to wait for your engine standard hydraulic braking and to warm up. your driving habits and Note: Frequent destinations are learned by accessory usage can significantly impact your vehicle after two to four weeks of use. only use the recommended size. when Note: Having your engine running is not nearing your home it should be easier to always an indication of inefficiency. seconds after the key is turned to off. should see this approximately 1/8 mile Your fuel economy should improve (200 meters) from a frequent destination. You driving in electric mode. Moderate braking is particularly important since it allows you to maximize the energy captured by the regenerative braking system.

) Why does it take a long time before the There are several reasons the engine stays engine shuts down? on for an extended amount of time when you first start it. Silent key start will start the engine if it is necessary for cabin heating. (For C-MAX Energi vehicles. 133 C-MAX (CCG) . Why does my engine stay on when it is In order to ensure that the climate control extremely cold outside? system can begin heating the cabin or defrosting the windshield as soon as a driver requests it. One common reason is to ensure that the emissions components are warm enough to minimize tailpipe emis- sions. Unique Driving Characteristics Frequently asked questions Question Answer What are the series of clicks from the cargo The high voltage battery is electrically isol- area when I first turn the key in the ignition? ated from the rest of the vehicle when the key is off. windshield defrost. high voltage contactors inside the battery are closed to make the electricity available to the motor/generator and enable the vehicle to drive. When you turn the key on. Why does the engine sometimes start at The vehicle's computer will determine if an key-on? engine start is required at key-on. the engine may not be required to operate these functions. Why does my engine never shut down The engine is required to turn on above this above 85 mph (137 km/h) speed to protect the transmission hard- ware. this engine-on time is extended. the engine coolant temperature has to be kept sufficiently hot. or if the outside temperature is low. As the climate gets cooler. Keeping the engine on is required to main- tain the correct coolant temperature. The clicks are the sound of these contactors as they close and open during start up and shut down.

These are character- istics of the Atkinson engine cycle and the transmission technology that help maximize your hybrid's fuel economy. See Towing (page 182). but you may notice slightly reduced fuel economy because ethanol contains less energy per gallon than gasoline. What is the engine oil change service Change the engine oil every 10000 miles interval? (16000 kilometers) or once per year under normal operating conditions. Your hybrid vehicle can be flat towed with all four wheels down? without modification. Unique Driving Characteristics Question Answer Why does my engine rev up so high some. Can I put E15 or E85 in my vehicle. and may fluctuate during steady state driving. How long will my high voltage battery last? The high voltage battery system is designed Does it need maintenance? to last the life of the vehicle and requires no maintenance. This fan turns on when the battery requires cooling air. 134 C-MAX (CCG) . (For C-MAX Energi vehicles. This may be higher than expected during heavy accelerations. Can you charge the battery with a plug into There are no provisions for charging the an A/C outlet? high voltage battery from a power supply external to the vehicle. Your hybrid vehicle is not designed to use E85 (85% ethanol).) Can I tow the hybrid behind my motor home Yes.Your vehicle's engine and transmission are times when I accelerate? designed to deliver the power you need at the most efficient engine speed. 85% gasoline) fuel. the vehicle can be plugged into a 110-volt outlet with charge cord provided. The fan speed. and associated noise level. will change according to the amount of cooling required to maintain good performance. What is the fan noise I hear from the rear The fan noise comes from a fan located of my hybrid? next to the high voltage battery pack. and how Your hybrid vehicle can use E15 (15% will it affect my fuel economy? ethanol. Maintaining the battery temperature at optimal conditions also prolongs the useful life of the battery and helps to achieve better fuel economy.

even if no cause leakage and lead to fuel spray symptoms are immediately apparent. or skin Observe the following guidelines when contact could cause an adverse handling automotive fuel: reaction. remove contaminated clothing and When refueling always shut the wash skin thoroughly with soap and engine off and never allow sparks or water. promptly cancer-causing agent. The toxic effects of fuel may not be The fuel system may be under visible for hours. • Extinguish all smoking materials and If fuel is splashed on the skin. If you hear a hissing sound • Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. flush with The flow of fuel through a fuel pump water for 15 minutes and seek medical nozzle can produce static electricity. Repeated or prolonged skin open flames near the filler neck. and fire. attention. If injury or death if misused or fuel is splashed in the eyes. Failure to seek proper which can cause a fire if fuel is medical attention could lead to pumped into an ungrounded fuel container. Inhaling too near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel much fuel vapor of any kind can lead capless fuel system). 135 C-MAX (CCG) . Avoid “Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram inhaling excess fumes. The permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed. refueling. Fuel such as WARNINGS gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or Do not overfill the fuel tank. If fuel is splashed on contain benzene. In sensitive individuals. permanent injury. Breathing gasoline vapors. • Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed Fuel ethanol and gasoline may through the skin. which is a the skin. serious personal injury or sickness may result. serious illness and permanent injury. water. which could cause serious personal breathing of fuel vapor can cause injury. contact lenses (if worn). clothing or both. Fuel and Refueling SAFETY PRECAUTIONS • Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed. remove mishandled. pressure. pressure in an overfilled tank may call a physician immediately. Otherwise. excessive or prolonged out. promptly any open flames before refueling your wash skin thoroughly with soap and vehicle. the sound stops. contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes Never smoke or use a cell phone while skin irritation. Consult a physician immediately • Always turn off the vehicle before if you experience an adverse reaction. do not refuel until to eye and respiratory tract irritation. Automotive fuels can cause serious • Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes. refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely • Be particularly careful if you are taking hazardous under certain conditions. fuel may spray In severe cases. for the treatment of alcoholism.

impair the emission control system indicate that fuel freshness mode is or cause loss of vehicle performance. Choosing the Right Fuel Fuel Freshness Mode (Energi Vehicles Only) Use only UNLEADED gasoline or UNLEADED gasoline blended with a This feature helps keeps the fuel system maximum of 15% ethanol in your gasoline functional and the fuel fresh. • Most of the plug-in power will be Octane Recommendations stored until fuel freshness mode is completed. the gasoline in your Do not use: tank eventually becomes old. If your vehicle is a Flex Fuel Vehicle If you operate your vehicle mainly in plug-in (FFV). your vehicle will automatically enter fuel • fuels containing methanol freshness mode. In fuel freshness mode • fuels containing metallic based operates. Refueling after consuming a full tank in fuel freshness mode will end the mode. refueling the vehicle will end areas. 136 C-MAX (CCG) .8 liters) of fuel is left in the tank. Any active. Fuels with octane levels below 87 fuel freshness mode and EV Now will now are not recommended. fuel freshness mode will • leaded-fuel (The use of leaded fuel is consume fuel until about 1 gallon (3. including manganese-based mode causing the gasoline engine to run compounds in order to consume the fuel in the fuel • fuels containing the octane booster tank. Fuel and Refueling FUEL QUALITY Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly. additive. EV Now will not be available.8 liters) prohibited by law) is left in the tank. Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is Note: EV Now can resume if less than 1 recommended. Old fuel can damage the engine and fuel system. methylcyclopentadienyl Note: If new fuel is not added during an 18 manganese tricarbonyl (MMT) month period. when the fuel level is rating below 87. Note: Use of any fuel other than the During fuel freshness mode: recommended fuel can cause powertrain • The information display screen will damage. damage to the vehicle that is caused by the use of fuel not recommended will not be • The vehicle will only run in hybrid mode. it will have a yellow bezel placed power mode using electricity from plugging over the fuel fill inlet. your vehicle will operate in hybrid additives. in without refueling. • fuels containing more than 15% ethanol or E-85 fuel To prevent the fuel from becoming old. become available. see your damage. particularly in high altitude below 1/4 tank. Some fuel stations offer gallon (3. However. covered under warranty. a loss of vehicle performance and authorized dealer to prevent any engine repairs may not be covered under warranty. vehicle. damage. fuels posted as regular with an octane Note: In most cases. if it Note: Use of any fuel other than those knocks heavily while you are using fuel with recommended may cause powertrain the recommended octane rating.

adding 1 gallon (3. In C-MAX vehicles. If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade. This could damage the fuel system and its seal. just start the engine. they stabilizer if you consume less than a full will not work with the capless fuel system tank of fuel during an 18 month period. use the funnel situation may have an adverse effect on included with the vehicle. If you have run out of fuel: • You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine. RUNNING OUT OF FUEL When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a Avoid running out of fuel because this portable fuel container. Fuel and Refueling Note: It is recommended to use a fuel Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels. inside WARNINGS storage compartment Do not insert the nozzle of portable 1. Locate the portable funnel that comes fuel containers or aftermarket with your vehicle. and can damage it. powertrain components. This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others. Do not try to pry open or push open the capless fuel system with foreign objects. E162449 Refilling With a Portable Fuel Container In C-MAX Energi vehicles the funnel is located in the rear of the vehicle. and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank.8 liters) of compartment. For more information on the service engine soon indicator. the funnel is located in the rear of the vehicle inside the load • Normally. which could result in serious personal injury. See Symbols Glossary (page 7). On restarting. more than 1 gallon (3. cranking time will take a few seconds longer than normal.8 liters) may be required. fuel is enough to restart the engine. With E162448 keyless ignition. The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle. 137 C-MAX (CCG) . funnels into the capless fuel system. Crank time will be longer than usual. • The service engine soon indicator may come on.

do not refuel until the sound stops. • Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact Note: For C-MAX Energi vehicles. flames and smoking materials away from fuel. Use the following guidelines to avoid electrostatic charge build-up when filling an ungrounded fuel container: • Place an approved fuel container on the ground. which could cause serious Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel personal injury. Extra funnels can Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System be purchased from your authorized (Non-Energi Vehicles) dealer if you choose to dispose of the WARNING funnel. capless fuel system. clean the funnel or properly dispose of it. When done. fuel may WARNINGS spray out. Read and follow all the instructions When fueling your vehicle: on the pump island. This is 2. Keep sparks. the fuel pump handle in the fill position. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the the vehicle (including the cargo area). The fuel system may be under pressure. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle. 138 C-MAX (CCG) . Slowly insert the funnel into the against the law in some places. press the with the fuel container while filling. Do not use personal electronic devices while refueling. Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended E142668 when refueling your vehicle. Otherwise. fire can cause severe injuries. If you hear a hissing sound REFUELING near the fuel filler door. portable fuel container. Fuel and Refueling WARNINGS Switch off your vehicle when you are refueling. fuel button located on the instrument panel • Do not use a device that would hold before performing step 3. E145428 • Do not fill a fuel container while it is in 3. Keep children away from the fuel pump and never let children pump fuel. 4.

do not refuel spill onto the vehicle. nozzle fully inserted to open both doors 4. Hold the funnel provided with the vehicle several handle higher during insertion for easier times to dislodge any debris and allow access. the inlet to close properly. Safely pull off the road. do the following: 1. which could cause serious personal injury. overfilling the fuel tank. Insert the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill until pumping is complete. slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully any visible debris from the fuel fill into the fuel system. Open the fuel filler door and remove 3. Do not overfill the 2. Otherwise. A driving cycle consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city or highway driving. the message may not reset immediately. fuel may spray out. If this action corrects the problem. 139 C-MAX (CCG) . Put the vehicle in park (P) and switch the ignition off. Continuing to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well. Allow WARNING approximately five to ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel The fuel system may be under filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel pressure. tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler nozzle. and leave the opening. It may take several driving cycles for the message to turn off. Fuel and Refueling 1. Put the vehicle in park (P) and switch Note: A fuel spill concern may occur if the ignition off. E154765 Easy Fuel™ Capless System (Energi Vehicles Only) 4. If you did not close the fuel fill inlet properly. Open the fuel filler door. E156032 3. until the sound stops. 2. Once pumping is complete. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located below and in front of the fuel filler door. If you hear a hissing sound to drain back into the fuel tank and not near the fuel filler door. a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may appear in the information display. At the next opportunity.

a Fuel Door Opening message 7. This could take up to fifteen seconds before the fuel filler door pops open allowing the insertion of the fuel filler nozzle. Do not overfill the 20 minutes is required. 4. After pumping fuel. slowly remove the will appear in the information display fuel filler nozzle. Wait up to fifteen seconds before E154765 opening the fuel filler door. 140 C-MAX (CCG) . If more than overfilling the fuel tank. into the fuel system and leave the 2. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully the ignition off. a Fuel Door This allows residual fuel to drain back Open message will appear in the into the fuel tank and not spill onto the information display en indicating that vehicle. E145428 3. During this time. Open the fuel filler door. you must first press the button located on the center console. door and an auto-sealing feature that locks the fuel tank refueling valve. Fuel and Refueling Note: Your vehicle features a locking fuel 5. your vehicle is ready to refuel. Press the fuel button located on the nozzle fully inserted to open both doors center console. until pumping is complete. Pressing this button will unlock the fuel tank refueling valve allowing the fuel filler door to open so that you can insert the fuel filler nozzle into the fuel inlet. again. Put the vehicle in park (P) and switch 6. The vehicle will remain ready to refuel for Note: A fuel spill concern may occur if approximately 20 minutes. five to ten seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle. When the door is open. Before you can refuel your vehicle. The overfilled may experience the fuel pump turn off fuel may run down the drain located below if you do not press the refuel button and in front of the fuel filler door. You bypass the fuel filler nozzle. Allow approximately screen. you will need to tank to the point that the fuel is able to press the refueling button again. When fueling your vehicle: E156032 1. Hold the handle higher while inserting for easier access.

The manual override lever is located inside of the luggage compartment on the right rear side panel. the vehicle hatch. Put the vehicle in park (P) and switch the ignition off. Insert the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel. a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message manual override. 3. Continuing to drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well. consists of an engine start-up (after four or more hours with the engine off) followed by city or highway driving. do not refuel until 4. several times to dislodge any debris and allow the inlet to close properly. At 2. provided with the vehicle. the sound stops. When using the fuel door manual override to access the fuel fill inlet: E162484 141 C-MAX (CCG) . which could cause serious personal injury. fuel may spray out. Safely pull off the road. Switch the ignition on prior to using the properly. Otherwise. 4. Fuel and Refueling If you did not close the fuel fill inlet 1. Insert the fuel nozzle slowly. may appear on the information display. It E162486 may take several driving cycles for the 3. If you hear a hissing sound E154767 near the fuel filler door. Remove the panel located in luggage the next opportunity. the message may not reset immediately. If this action corrects the problem. Pull the manual override mechanism. Note: The vehicle must be in park (P) when using the manual override feature. Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening. 2. do the following: compartment on the right rear area of 1. A driving cycle mechanism. Using the manual override lever WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure. Locate the manual override message to turn off.

an fuel fill funnel provided with the vehicle inaccurate reading results if the engine several times to allow the inlet to close is left running. Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the • Turn the ignition off before fueling. Do not rely on this fuel for If you did not close the fuel fill inlet driving. you might not be able to Note: A fuel spill concern may occur if refuel the full amount of the advertised overfilling the fuel tank. remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty. do the following: empty. a Check Fuel Fill Inlet message tank is the amount of fuel that can be put may appear in the information display. close fuel door and repeat the Note: The amount of usable fuel in the procedure. Open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill For consistent results when filling the fuel opening. message to turn off. A driving cycle Results are most accurate when the filling consists of an engine start-up (after four method is consistent. frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are not accurate ways to measure fuel economy. This will dislodge any debris • Use the same fill rate preventing the inlet from sealing. The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located below Empty reserve is the amount of fuel and in front of the fuel filler door. empty reserve varies and should not be This will enable you to refuel without any relied upon to increase driving range. bypass the fuel filler nozzle. When issue. (low-medium-high) each time the tank If this action corrects the problem. first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of driving (this is your engine’s break-in period). tank: 4. The advertised capacity is the total 1. ignition off. message may not reset immediately.4800 kilometers). Key off and complete refueling within FUEL CONSUMPTION 20 minutes. It • Allow no more than two automatic may take several driving cycles for the click-offs when filling. The usable capacity of the fuel properly. At into the tank after the gauge indicates the next opportunity. Fuel and Refueling 5. the is filled. Put the vehicle in park (P) and turn the capacity plus the empty reserve. refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty. Safely pull off the road. fuel expense. 142 C-MAX (CCG) . If more than 20 minutes is required. properly. Continuing to Calculating Fuel Economy drive with the message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as Do not measure fuel economy during the well. Filling the Tank 3.3000 miles (3200 kilometers . a more accurate measurement is obtained after 2000 miles . Do not overfill the capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty tank to the point that the fuel is able to reserve still present in the tank. or more hours with the engine off) followed by city and highway driving. Also. fuel tank size – it is the combined usable 2.

record the catalytic converter that will enable your amount of fuel added. speeds. lower temperatures mean lower in scheduled maintenance information are fuel economy. Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately. emission control components and a 2. Do not drive if you An improperly operating or damaged smell exhaust fumes. The scheduled maintenance items listed In general. • Do not turn off the ignition while your Keep a record for at least one month and vehicle is moving. Calculate fuel economy by dividing continue to work properly: miles traveled by gallons used (For • Use only the specified fuel listed. vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards. especially at high record the type of driving (city or highway). catalytic converter and other emission fill the fuel tank and record the current control components continue to work odometer reading. Subtract your initial odometer reading To make sure that the catalytic converter from the current odometer reading. Illumination of the service engine soon Exhaust leaks may result in entry of indicator. have your dealer inspect your control system is not working properly. After at least three to five tank fill ups. then divide by kilometers traveled). performance and durability. which can start a fire. To make sure that the 3. or drive your vehicle of components affecting emission control. and other emission control components 5. keeping maintenance information performed records during summer and winter show according to the specified schedule. fluid leaks. Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts are used for WARNINGS maintenance replacements or for service Do not park. properly: 4. charging system warning light or harmful and potentially lethal fumes the temperature warning light. Metric: Multiply liters used by 100. This provides an accurate estimate of the vehicle’s fuel economy under current • Have the items listed in scheduled driving conditions. in dry grass or other dry ground cover. Fuel and Refueling 1. essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM If other than Ford. exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle. Each time you fill the tank. such non-Ford parts should be equivalent The emission system heats up the to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in engine compartment and exhaust system. 143 C-MAX (CCG) . Fill the fuel tank completely and record Your vehicle is equipped with various the initial odometer reading. • Avoid running out of fuel. into the passenger compartment. If strange odors. vehicle immediately. Additionally. how temperature impacts fuel economy. idle. smoke or loss of engine you smell exhaust fumes inside your power could indicate that the emission vehicle.

the vehicle is considered not ready for I/M testing. Examples are: inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration. or supervises a fleet of vehicles After three driving cycles without these or are not permitted to intentionally remove any other temporary malfunctions present. Driving through deep water—the that some of the emission control systems electrical system may be wet. 1. The OBD-II system also assists Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) your authorized dealer in properly servicing Testing your vehicle. The OBD-II system protects the lead to more costly repairs. indicator is on or the bulb does 2. This system is commonly known emissions. See On-Board Diagnostics. The vehicle has run out of fuel—the If the service engine soon engine may misfire or run poorly. 138). quality fuel. When the service engine soon Some state/provincial and local indicator illuminates. Failure to pass this illuminate. The fuel fill inlet may not have been the service engine soon indicator is on or properly closed. services. leases. or if the OBD-II system has determined 4. See Refueling (page not working properly (bulb is burned out). an emission control device or prevent it the service engine soon indicator should from working. By law. Poor fuel quality or water in the not work. and (OBD-II). reduced as the on-board diagnostics system engine and transmission smoothness. sells. In this case. lower fuel economy. vehicles. on. the OBD-II governments may have system has detected a Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs malfunction. vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle A driving cycle consists of a cold engine Emission Control Information Decal startup followed by mixed city/highway located on or near the engine. the vehicle may need fuel—the engine may misfire or run to be serviced. Although some On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II) malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not have symptoms that are apparent. properly closing the fuel fill repairs. No additional vehicle service is also lists engine displacement required. This decal driving. Temporary malfunctions may to inspect the emission control equipment cause the service engine soon indicator to on your vehicle. trades inlet or letting the electrical system dry out. environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission Readiness for standards. have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity. vehicle corrected by filling the fuel tank with good owners and anyone who manufactures. Your vehicle is equipped with a computer continued driving with the service engine that monitors the engine’s emission control soon indicator on can result in increased system. Please consult your warranty information If the service engine soon indicator remains for complete details. Information about your stay off the next time the engine is started. Fuel and Refueling Do not make any unauthorized changes to These temporary malfunctions can be your vehicle or engine. Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if 3. have not been properly checked. poorly. 144 C-MAX (CCG) .

or the battery has recently run down or been replaced. turn the ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds without cranking the engine. To determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M testing. the OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. If the service engine soon indicator blinks eight times. do not turn off the vehicle until the above driving cycle is complete. If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing. The OBD-II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving. The vehicle must warm up to its normal operating temperature. Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours with the ignition Off. start the vehicle and complete the above driving cycle. A complete check may take several days. it means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. if the service engine soon indicator stays on solid. Once started. Then. the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed: 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway/highway followed by 20 minutes of stop-and-go driving with at least four 30-second idle periods. the above driving cycle will have to be repeated. 145 C-MAX (CCG) . If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. it means that the vehicle is ready for I/M testing. Fuel and Refueling If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has just been serviced.

by an authorized electric vehicle orange striped tape or both. you must unplug the circuit from the circuit port connected to The high-voltage service disconnect turns the battery. result in personal injury or death. The high-voltage battery system uses an air cooled system to regulate the high-voltage battery temperature and help maximize high-voltage battery life. Do not block the flow of cabin air to this To disable the battery and stop all area. All WARNING of the high-voltage power flows through specific wiring assemblies labeled as such Have the battery pack serviced only or covered with a solid orange convolute. high-voltage electric activity in the vehicle HIGH-VOLTAGE SERVICE you can access high-voltage disconnect DISCONNECT circuit. The high-voltage battery system is a high-voltage. High Voltage Battery GENERAL INFORMATION Your vehicle consists of various high-voltage components and wiring. lithium-ion battery system. off power from the high-voltage battery. 146 C-MAX (CCG) . It is important automatically disable the high-voltage to keep these openings free of obstructions. battery. Do not come technician. E163462 Note: The high-voltage battery is equipped Note: There is a disconnect circuit in your with air vents in the package tray that help vehicle. require regular service maintenance. Note: The high-voltage battery does not The pack is located in the rear cargo area. Improper handling can in contact with these components. To do this. Disconnecting the circuit will to regulate its temperature.

The high-voltage service disconnect is located behind the rear fold down seats. E171514 3. High Voltage Battery Note: The service disconnect has an outer lever to aid in the proper seating of the service disconnect lever. For Energi vehicles. Remove this to disconnect the high-voltage service disconnect. Fold down the rear seats and remove the cover panel. If equipped. E163538 Disabling the High-Voltage Battery 1. E163537 Service disconnect location for Energi vehicles. E146133 147 C-MAX (CCG) . Locate the access door and remove the plastic cover. 2. E147234 4. pull the end of the outer lever toward the front of the vehicle and remove the outer lever from the service disconnect. slide the handle outboard and to the left. Service disconnect location for non-Energi vehicles. Slide the handle on the service disconnect outboard to the right.

High Voltage Battery 5. The system will detect if the electrical system is safe and turn on automatically. do not use the 120-volt the standard 120-volt convenience cord convenience cord in commercial takes approximately 7 hours to completely garages. Do not use the 120-volt convenience Note: The 120-volt convenience cord allows cord with an extension cord or you to charge the high-voltage battery using adapter. you will need to reconnect the circuit before you can reactivate it. Reactivating the High-Voltage Battery Note: If you have manually disconnected your high-voltage shut off circuit. 148 C-MAX (CCG) . do not expose to flammable vapors. Using a 240-volt charging station will take approximately 2 ½ hours to fully charge an empty battery. a standard 120-volt household outlet. CHARGING THE HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY (IF EQUIPPED) E78097 CHARGING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY (ENERGI VEHICLES) Your vehicle is equipped with a standard 120-volt convenience cord located in the WARNINGS floor compartment behind the driver seat. charge from an empty battery. This equipment has arcing or sparking parts. Position this equipment at least 18 inches (80 millimeters) above the floor. Using In Canada. E145429 Ford recommends upgrading to the optional 240-volt charging station for faster more efficient charging. Pull the handle toward you and remove Charging Equipment the service disconnect from the vehicle to disable the high-voltage battery.

Make sure that the 120–volt convenience cord is completely unwound before charging. same circuit. Forcing the door open or Power (green light) — this indicator closed will damage the charge port. two full times. well. but the vehicle is not charging. There is an indentation located on and in good condition. The light ring will light up to reset the failure and could restart the corresponding quadrant(s) so that the the charging cycle. If you do not use a dedicated circuit. If the fault persists. If you do not have a dedicated circuit. the circuit breaker could trip or open. that activates when you initiate a charge cycle. in 25 percent increments. lights up when you plug the cord into the The light ring located around the charge AC wall outlet. contact a licensed professional electrician for proper installation. confirming the system case of a detected failure. open or closed. The AC outlet must be The charge port is located between the a three-prong 110-120 volt AC outlet that is front left side door and front left wheel properly grounded. • Blinking light means that the charging There is a cord acknowledgment feature is in process. of charging: Divided into four quadrants. Do not forget to press the unplug the cord and then plug it back lock button on your key fob to re-lock your in to reset the fault. The four light quadrants will each • Solid light means you have connected individually flash clockwise starting with the cord. Press in and release dedicated line. charge and fault. the charge • No light means you have not connected port light ring displays the state of charge the cord to the vehicle. vehicle. You need to ring will not light. Note: Do not force the charge port door power. • Solid red triangle light – means that If the charge is below 25 percent. contact your authorized dealer. port indicates the charge status of the Charge (green light) — indicates status high-voltage battery in your vehicle. current state of charge can be determined. 149 C-MAX (CCG) . which means you cannot with your thumb to open and close the have other appliances connected to the door. You must use a the charge port door. Always plug the cord into the AC outlet before connecting the charging coupler into the charge port receptacle of your vehicle. the light the fault is permanent. 15–20 amps (or greater). possible: Use your key fob to view the charge status • Blinking red triangle light – means that of your vehicle at any time by pressing the the 120–volt convenience cord is trying unlock button. the top right light and ending with the top Fault (red triangle light) — Lights up in left. High Voltage Battery Note: Your electrical source must meet Charge Port certain requirements for the high-voltage batteries to charge. The 120–volt convenience cord inline control box has three indicator E144779 lights that represent the charging status. No charging is detects the charging coupler.

Locking the Charging Coupler 3. Plug the charging coupler into the Note: You will need a padlock or a charge port receptacle on your vehicle. combination lock with a shackle diameter Make sure the button clicks confirming of 0. the indentation located on the charge port door and the door will rotate open. The and the bottom right quadrant is vehicle may delay charging to take pulsing. See MyFord Touch™ (page • When the top right quadrant is pulsing. If using a 240-volt charging station. the charge is Charging between 50-75 percent. Note: The light ring will turn off one minute 2. High Voltage Battery The light ring will also display the current • When the light on both right side state of charge when opening the doors. Waiting to Charge The light ring will display how far along the Note: See Charge Settings in the MyFord charge is: Touch section. Note: Your vehicle must be in P (PARK) to • When the light on three quadrants are charge. press in and release after reaching a full charge. Verify that the cord acknowledgment feature activates.0 in (25. 322). E144780 E172036 4. the charge is between 0-25 percent. With your thumb. length or more. This indicates the 1. 150 C-MAX (CCG) . The percent.2 in (5 mm) or less and the straight you have completely engaged the portion of the shackle of 1. Insert the lock through the hole in the beginning of a normal charge cycle. on and the top left quadrant is pulsing. vehicle will optimize the charge schedule to be complete by the next GO Time. When you select Value Charge. Put the vehicle in park and power down are on. your vehicle. To charge your high-voltage battery: • When all the lights on the entire ring 1. the charge is between 25-50 advantage of off-peak electricity rates. quadrants are on and the bottom left quadrant is pulsing. charging • When the top right quadrant light is on may not begin upon plugging in. 2.4 mm) coupler. Lock the padlock or combination lock. the charge is complete. the charge is between 75-100 percent. charging coupler button. follow the instructions on the charge station to begin the charging process. 5.

Disconnecting the Charging Coupler For vehicles equipped with a push button Note: Do not pull the wall plug from the start system: wall while the vehicle is charging. Remove the lock from the charging 2. the entire light ring will flash The high-voltage shut off operation shuts continuously for one minute and then turn off power from the high-voltage battery off. repeat steps 1 and 2. Press the button on the charging charging). unplug the charging after a collision. the light ring will indicate the coupler. If this happens. Doing so 1. the charge is between 75–100 percent. Turn the ignition on. the charge is between 0–25 percent. the charge is between 50–75 percent. If the problem persists. While holding the button. the charge is between 25–50 percent. remove the battery as follows: charging coupler from the charge port • When the top right quadrant light is off. See 2. Turn the ignition off. receptacle on your vehicle. 4. • When three quadrant lights are on and the top left quadrant is off. If the vehicle is not powered after this sequence. 3. conditions. 151 C-MAX (CCG) . HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY CUT- Note: If the system detects a vehicle OFF SWITCH charging system fault at any point in a charge cycle. MyFord Touch™ (page 322). port receptacle. START/STOP button. E144781 • When all lights on the entire ring are on. • When both right side quadrant lights are on and the bottom left quadrant is off. turn ignition off. perform the following steps: You can modify the light ring lighting 1. 1. Close the charge port door by pressing the indentation on the charge port Note: When the vehicle is waiting to charge. Continue pressing the indentation the light ring will turn off one minute after while the door rotates displaying the present state of charge. Press the brake pedal and press the coupler button. See Charge Port Light Ring Settings in the MyFord Touch section. present state of charge of the high voltage 3. door. • When the top right quadrant light is on and the bottom right quadrant is off. the vehicle automatically begins charging. High Voltage Battery When waiting to charge (not actively 2. the charge is 100 percent. the light ring will turn on and display how far along the charge is per the section above. When counterclockwise and closes. To reactivate the vehicle after either event contact your authorized dealer. Press the START/STOP button to may damage the outlet and the cord. or if your vehicle receives coupler and then plug it back into the charge a substantial physical jolt.

contact an authorized dealer. Note: After completing this process the vehicle will detect if the electrical system is safe and reactivate. Note: In the event the vehicle does not reactivate after the second key cycle. Press the START/STOP button again to re-enable the vehicle. Once your vehicle determines the electrical system safe you can start your vehicle as you would normally by pressing the brake in combination with the START/STOP button. Remove your foot from the brake pedal and press the START/STOP button (ignition off). High Voltage Battery 3. 152 C-MAX (CCG) . 4.

Fully press down the brake pedal. Always come accelerator pedal simultaneously. Always set the parking brake fully Come to a complete stop before putting and make sure the gearshift is your vehicle into and out of P (Park) latched in P (Park). 2. With the gearshift lever in R (Reverse). E146092 E144820 153 C-MAX (CCG) . Transmission AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION P (Park) This position locks the transmission and WARNINGS prevents the front wheels from turning. which may result in difficulty N (Neutral) maintaining speed in traffic and could lead With the gearshift lever in N (Neutral). Automatic Transmission D (Drive) Putting your vehicle in gear: The normal driving position for the best 1. Press and hold the button on the front D (Drive) with Grade Assist (If of the gearshift lever. Press the transmission control switch on the side of the gearshift lever to activate 4. vehicle is free to roll. hold the brake pedal down while in this position. Equipped) 3. fuel economy. Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear. the Do not apply the brake pedal and vehicle will move backward. for more than three seconds will limit engine rpm. Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key R (Reverse) whenever you leave your vehicle. to a complete stop before shifting into and Applying both pedals simultaneously out of R (Reverse). transmission will remain in the selected gear. the to serious injury. Release the button and your grade assist.

you will E162619 be taking the vehicle out of park which means the vehicle can roll 1. Remove the side panel on the right side freely. • The transmission may be shifted into L (Low) at any vehicle speed. maintain vehicle speed when Use the brake shift interlock lever to move descending a grade. the gearshift lever from the park position • As the vehicle determines the amount in the event of an electrical malfunction or of engine motoring and high-voltage if your vehicle has a dead battery. dealer. Transmission Grade assist: Note: See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used. When doing this procedure. See your authorized into the N (Neutral) position. vehicle speed when descending a grade. the brakes may not be lever out of the P (Park) position and working properly. Use 2. wheel chocks if appropriate. To avoid unwanted vehicle of the gearshift lever. Press the transmission control switch again to return to normal D (Drive). L (Low) • Provides maximum engine braking. Locate the access hole. always fully set the parking brake prior to doing this procedure. Brake-Shift Interlock WARNINGS Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brake lamps are working. Insert the screwdriver (or similar tool) If the parking brake is fully released. battery charging. The grade assist lamp will appear in the instrument cluster E144523 when grade assist is turned on. • Provides additional grade braking with a combination of engine motoring and Note: For some markets this feature will be high-voltage battery charging to help disabled. you may notice the Apply the parking brake and turn the engine speed increasing and ignition off before performing this decreasing to help maintain your procedure. 3. movement. into the access hole and press the lever but the brake warning lamp remains foreword while pulling the gearshift illuminated. • The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated. 154 C-MAX (CCG) .

Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than a minute or damage to the transmission and tires may occur. stopping between shifts in a steady pattern. or the engine may overheat. If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or Snow Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur. If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow. Remove the tool and reinstall the panel. Start the vehicle and release the parking brake. Transmission 4. it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears. 155 C-MAX (CCG) . 5. Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

ignition on. brake warning lamp illuminates when you release the parking brake. Brakes GENERAL INFORMATION Brake Assist Brake assist detects when you brake Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. brakes wear and does not contribute to This lamp momentarily brake noise. apply the braking of an internal combustion engine brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe and assist the standard brake system while stop. 156 C-MAX (CCG) . It provides continuous squeal sound is present. once the accelerator pedal is released. Wet brakes result in reduced braking efficiency. normal few times when driving from a car wash or braking is still effective. the motor is authorized dealer. the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking. Have E144522 the system checked by an authorized dealer. In effect. If designed to fully stop the car if none are found and the condition persists. The standard brake system is accelerator pedal for any interference. have Brake Over Accelerator the system checked by an authorized dealer. If heavily by measuring the rate at which you a metal-to-metal. remains on or Indicators (page 83). the motor changes from an energy user to an energy producer. This feature is used to simulate the engine If you experience this condition. Have the press the pedal. In the event the accelerator pedal becomes stuck or entrapped. Inspect the economy. switch the engine off and and storing it in the battery to improve fuel apply the parking brake. Anti-lock Brake System have it checked by an authorized dealer. Gently press the brake pedal a If the system is disabled. spun as a generator to create electrical current. apply steady and firm pressure to the brake pedal to Regenerative Braking System slow the vehicle and reduce engine power. the system may be disabled. regenerative braking is not available. flashes. If stopping distances in critical situations. Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the This system helps you maintain steering wheels. have your vehicle towed to the nearest During regenerative braking. If the light does not See Warning Lamps and illuminate during start up. Some dust is inevitable as the the brakes from locking. Move the transmission selector lever recovering some of the energy of motion to position P. If the E144522 standing water to dry the brakes. continuous grinding or press the brake pedal. Brake assist can reduce system checked by an authorized dealer. See Cleaning the Alloy illuminates when you turn the Wheels (page 236). the maximum braking efficiency as long as you brake linings may be worn-out. even under normal driving control during emergency stops by keeping conditions. This recharges the battery and slows the vehicle.

always apply the parking brake and put the transmission in park (P). Press the release button and push the system. You must remain in your vehicle once you have activated the system. move the transmission HINTS ON DRIVING WITH selector lever to P and turn the steering ANTI-LOCK BRAKES wheel toward the curb. Regenerative facing uphill. it only 2. further. Brakes When the accelerator pedal is released or PARKING BRAKE the brake pedal is applied. is almost fully charged. place of the standard friction brakes. the brake controller automatically detects the WARNING amount of deceleration requested and optimizes how much of the deceleration Always set the parking brake fully will be produced by regenerative braking. 157 C-MAX (CCG) . You may also hear a noise from the 3. and the requested pulling the lever up. Regenerative braking has fullest extent. Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and facing downhill. the amount of regenerative braking is limited to avoid Note: Do not press the release button while overcharging. Press the brake pedal firmly. To apply the parking brake: Regenerative braking does not take the 1. you are responsible for controlling your vehicle. Pull the lever up slightly. and leave your vehicle with the The remaining portion is generated by transmission selector lever in standard friction braking. also been designed to interact with the Note: If you park your vehicle on a hill and anti-lock brake system. pedal. move the transmission selector braking is disabled when the anti-lock lever to position P and turn the steering brake system is activated or the battery is wheel away from the curb. Press the foot brake pedal firmly. supervising the system and intervening. if required. This is normal. Maintain pressure on the brake 2. When the battery position P. fully charged. During all times. deceleration is produced by standard friction braking alone. When you leave your • the road surface is poor. Pull the parking brake lever up to its assists them. lever down. The anti-lock braking system will not eliminate the risks when: HILL START ASSIST • you drive too closely to the vehicle in front of you WARNINGS • your vehicle is hydroplaning The system does not replace the • you take corners too fast parking brake. the brake pedal will pulse and may travel 1. To release the parking brake: Note: When the system is operating. vehicle.

3. The brakes will release automatically. the system will activate automatically. your vehicle will remain stationary on the slope for two to three seconds after you release the brake pedal. This is an advantage when pulling away on a slope. traffic lights or when reversing uphill into a parking space). When the system is active. The system makes it easier to pull away when your vehicle is on a slope without the need to use the parking brake. 158 C-MAX (CCG) . Brakes WARNINGS If the engine is revved excessively. your vehicle will remain on the slope without rolling away for about two or three seconds. Press the brake pedal to bring your vehicle to a complete standstill. This allows you time to move your foot from the brake to the accelerator pedal. This hold time will automatically be extended if you are in the process of driving off. 2. (for example from a car park ramp. or if a malfunction is detected. the system will be deactivated. 4. Drive off in the normal manner. Using Hill Start Assist 1. The system will activate automatically on any slope that will cause significant vehicle rollback. When you remove your foot from the brake pedal. The brakes are released automatically once the engine has developed sufficient drive to prevent your vehicle from rolling down the slope. Keep the brake pedal pressed. If the sensors detect that your vehicle is on a slope.

system was not manually disabled through the system reduces engine power in order the information display. have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. Press the button. Press the button again to return the system to normal mode. Your vehicle comes with this feature already enabled. personal injury and death. control light still illuminates steadily. When you switch the traction control system off. Operation (page 159). you can either turn the when a driving condition activates the system off using the information display stability system. The stability control off light Switching the System Off Using temporarily illuminates on the Information Display Controls engine start-up and stays on (If Equipped) when you turn the traction control system off. a message appears in the display controls. stability control remains fully active. or by pressing the button. 159 C-MAX (CCG) . Verify that the AdvanceTrac accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces. the and. See Principle of information display showing system status. reduces engine power stability control light will illuminate at the same time. If the wheels spin when steadily. If required. the system If a failure has been detected within applies the brakes to individual wheels the AdvanceTrac system. you can switch When you turn the traction control system this feature off using the information off or on. stuck in vehicle rollover. temporarily illuminates on Depending on the type of system you have E138639 engine start-up and flashes on your vehicle. If the stability to increase traction. You will see a message in conjunction with an illuminated icon in the display. WARNING If your vehicle begins to slide. Switching the System Off Using a Switch (If Equipped) The button is located in the instrument panel. snow or mud. Operating your vehicle USING TRACTION CONTROL with AdvanceTrac disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control. In certain situations for example. when needed. turning the traction control off may be beneficial as this allows the The stability control light wheels to spin with full engine power. Traction Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION System Indicator Lights and Messages The traction control system helps avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction.

steering system. the performance of the AdvanceTrac system. vehicle rollover. a vehicle rollover. B Remember that even advanced A technology cannot defy the laws of B physics. Stability Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control system helps you keep control of WARNINGS your vehicle when on a slippery surface. In addition. Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker B as far as possible from the front center console. and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac sensors. the tunnel. SLOW DOWN. 160 C-MAX (CCG) . The traction control tire construction and wheel and tire size system helps avoid drive wheel spin and may change the handling characteristics loss of traction. If your AdvanceTrac system activates. The electronic stability control portion of Vehicle modifications involving the system helps avoid skids and lateral braking system. vehicle rollover. personal injury and death. this could RSC maintaining control on a reduce the operator’s ability to control the slippery surface. installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system. at least some of the tires have exceeded B Vehicle with AdvanceTrac with their ability to grip the road. vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control. aftermarket roof slides and roll stability control helps avoid racks. suspension. personal injury and death. Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause E72903 you to lose control of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or A Vehicle without AdvanceTrac property damage. Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac system B could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control. It’s always possible to lose A A control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. See Using Traction of your vehicle and may adversely affect Control (page 159). Activation of the with RSC skidding off its AdvanceTrac system is an indication that intended route.

161 C-MAX (CCG) . but the electronic stability control and roll stability control portions of the system are disabled when the transmission is in position R. See Using Traction Control (page 159). The AdvanceTrac with RSC system cannot be completely turned off. You can turn off the traction control portion of the system independently. Stability Control USING STABILITY CONTROL AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™ (RSC®) The system automatically activates when you start your vehicle.

the warning sounds trailer hitches. The system turns on (generally large and fixed) objects when automatically whenever the ignition is moving in reverse on a flat surface at switched on. Do not clean the sensors with sharp objects. Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the bumper or fascia. may create false beeps. As the This system is not designed to vehicle moves closer to the obstacle. the inclement weather. free from snow. particularly those inches (30 centimeters) from the side of close to the ground. ice and large accumulations of dirt. After the warning function of the sensing system. this may goes away. See MyKey™ (page WARNINGS 49). bike or surfboard racks again. the warning detecting large stationary objects to avoid sounds continuously. The system is designed to When the obstacle is fewer than 12 inches provide a warning to assist the driver in (30 centimeters) away. and external radio volume is reduced to a motors and fans may also affect the predetermined level. and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the system. located on the bumper or fascia. activation. the system’s accuracy can be affected. To help avoid personal injury. Sensing is only an aid for some bumper area. Parking Aids PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED) Note: If your vehicle is equipped with MyKey®. Once the system detects an Certain add-on devices such as large object approaching. 162 C-MAX (CCG) . Note: Keep the sensors. If the sensors are covered. Traffic control systems. To help avoid personal injury. The system may not receding object is detected farther than 12 detect smaller objects. objects. When receiving a detection warning. please read and understand the limitations The sensing system warns the driver of of the system as contained in this obstacles within a certain range of the section. leaving it misaligned or bent. the vehicle. the tone sounds for only three seconds. If a stationary or damaging the vehicle. air brakes. parking speeds. the radio volume returns to the include reduced performance or a false previous level. transmission is in R (Reverse). always Rear Sensing System use caution when in R (Reverse) and The rear sensors are only active when the when using the sensing system. the prevent contact with small or moving rate of the audible warning increases. the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms. it is possible to prevent turning the sensing system off.

in the information display and does not allow the driver to switch the faulted • Objects detected by the rear sensors system on. • but not moving. and a moving object is The system sounds an audible warning approaching the rear of the vehicle at when obstacles are near either bumper in a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less the following manner: The system can be switched off through • Objects detected by the front sensors the information display. if gearshift is in any position other than P an obstacle is 24 inches (60 (Park) or N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed centimeters) from the front of the is below 6 mph (10 km/h). For example. If a fault is present are indicated by a high-pitched tone in the system. of the vehicle and about 14 inches (35 centimeters) to the The system detects certain objects while side of the front end of the the transmission is in R (Reverse): vehicle. 163 C-MAX (CCG) . an obstacle is only 16 inches (40 centimeters) from the rear of the vehicle. There is decreased A Coverage area of up to 27 inches coverage area at the outer (70 centimeters) from the front corners of the bumper. Refer to the reverse • and moving toward a stationary object sensing section for details on at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less coverage area. Parking Aids A A E130178 A Coverage area of up to 6 feet E130382 (1.8 meters) from the rear bumper. the lower pitched tone sounds. a warning message appears from the front radio speakers. Front Sensing System • The sensing system reports the obstacle which is closest to the front The front sensors are active when the or rear of the vehicle. at the same time. are indicated by a lower pitched tone from the rear radio speakers. vehicle and. • An alternating warning sounds from the front and rear if there are objects at both bumpers that are closer than 10 inches (25 centimeters).

and judgment. E142733 164 C-MAX (CCG) . tow truck or flatbed truck).e.e. surfboard) is attached to the roof. Note: The sensors may not detect objects with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves. front work in all conditions and is not bumper cover). • a foreign object (i.e. Note: The driver is always responsible for controlling the vehicle. The driver is responsible for avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe Using Active Park Assist distance and speed.e. It will remain off for the entire ignition cycle. a pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the neighboring parked vehicle is high from the ground (i. Note: After a tire change the system will go E142434 through a relearning procedure. WARNING • the front bumper or side sensors are This system is designed to be a damaged (i. even when the system is in use. refer to that something passes between the front section. deteriorate. supervising the system and intervening if required. It may not obstructed by a foreign object (i.e. The system can also be switched off The system should not be used if: through the information display. The system visually and audibly instructs you to park the vehicle. Note: The sensors may not detect objects in heavy rain or other conditions that cause disruptive reflections. The system detects an available parallel parking space and automatically steers the vehicle into the space (hands-free) while you control the accelerator. During this time the system performance may Press the button to switch the system off. intended to replace the driver’s attention • a mini-spare tire is in use. EQUIPPED) • an overhanging object (i. Parking Aids For specific information on the reverse The system may not function correctly if sensing portion of the system. a bus. gearshift and brakes. bike rack or trailer) is attached to the front or rear of the vehicle or at another location close to ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF the sensors.e. in a collision) or supplementary park aid. bumper and the parking space (i.

Parking Aids Press the button. items may not be detected by active park assist. it offers the last one). the system switches off and you need to take full control of the vehicle. indicate which side of the vehicle you want A E130107 When a suitable space is found. Slow down and stop at approximately position (A). the touch screen shows a message to alert you to reduce vehicle speed. the system switches off. While Note: The system always offers the last reversing. back-up slowly. nothing obstructing its movement) and the transmission in R (Reverse). the system graphic to indicate it's searching for a automatically searches on the vehicle's parking space. the vehicle Note: The vehicle should be driven as steers itself as instructions to safely move parallel to other vehicles as possible while the vehicle back and forward in the space passing a parking space. are displayed in the touch screen.g. The steering wheel position will not indicate the Note: Vehicles with overhanging loads (e. street furniture and other to full take control of the vehicle. then follow Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 the instructions on the touch screen. Note: You must observe that the selected space remains clear of obstructions at all Note: If a maneuver is interrupted before times in the maneuver. accompanied by a corresponding graphic.e. 165 C-MAX (CCG) . You must make sure the selected With your hands off the wheel (and space is suitable for parking. completion. displays a message and a corresponding Note: If the turn signal is not on. actual position of the steering and you have a bus or a truck). The touch screen the system to search on. Use the turn signal to passenger side. km/h). the touch Automatic Steering into Parking screen displays a message and a chime Space sounds. the touch screen displays a detected parking space (i. if the vehicle message instructing you to check your detects multiple spaces while you are surroundings (for safety reasons) and to driving. Note: If driven above approximately 20 mph (35 km/h).

166 C-MAX (CCG) . such as: Feature • Traction control has activated on a The system can be deactivated manually slippery or loose surface. Certain vehicle conditions can also Deactivating the Park Assist deactivate the system. Parking Aids E130108 When you think the vehicle has enough space in front and behind it. • grabbing the steering wheel • Any door (except the driver’s) opens. • Something touches the steering wheel. the • driving above approximately 20 mph touch screen displays a message indicating (35 km/h) for 30 seconds during an that the active park assist process is done. bring the vehicle to a complete stop. in P (Park). by: • There is an anti-lock brake system • pressing the active park assist button activation or failure. active park search The driver is responsible for checking the • driving above 6 mph (10 km/h) during parking job and making any necessary automatic steering corrections before putting the transmission • turning off the traction control system. or you hear a solid tone from the parking aid. E130109 When automatic steering is finished.

e. Occasional system messages serviced. the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning the vehicle properly Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly The vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. or of different sizes) A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities 167 C-MAX (CCG) . rolling forward when R [Reverse] is selected) The transmission is in R (Reverse). the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a parking space The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space The vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (i. followed an authorized dealer to have your vehicle by a chime. a recurring or frequent system faults. improper size. contact warning message is displayed. The system performs best when you drive the same distance past the parking space The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (i. Parking Aids If a problem occurs with the system.5 ft (2 m) from the parking space The vehicle is closer than 16 in. For Troubleshooting the System The system does not look for a space The traction control system may be off Any door (except the driver’s) may not be completely closed The system does not offer a particular space Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors There is not enough room on both sides of the vehicle in order to park There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking space The vehicle is farther than 6. not inflated correctly. may occur in normal operation.e. (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles The transmission is in R (Reverse).

snowplow. The system uses three types of guides to If the liftgate is ajar. Make sure the vehicle is aligning your vehicle with another not moving. no and proximity to objects behind the vehicle. driving from a heated garage into the cold. the camera will help you see what is behind your vehicle: be out of position and the video image may • Active guidelines: Show the intended be incorrect. what is behind your vehicle when you place Use caution when using the rear the transmission in R (Reverse). moving truck bed. lines appear in the Note: If the transmission is in R (Reverse) display which represent your vehicle’s path and the luggage compartment is ajar.e. • Centerline: Helps align the center of The rear view camera system provides a your vehicle with an object (i. might not be seen on the The camera is located on the liftgate. or after leaving a car wash) REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED) WARNINGS The rear view camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the interior and exterior mirrors for maximum coverage. object behind you. a video image of the area behind the vehicle. Objects that are close to either E162528 corner of the bumper or under the bumper. Using the Rear View Camera System Back up as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your The rear view camera system displays reaction time to stop the vehicle. 168 C-MAX (CCG) .) The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle passed The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (i. trailer).e. This can be helpful features on or off while in R when backing into a parking space or (Reverse). During operation. Parking Aids The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space A parked vehicle has a high attachment (i. All guidelines (if enabled) path of your vehicle when reversing. etc. • Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path your vehicle is moving in while reversing Use caution when turning camera in a straight line. video camera and the liftgate is ajar. rear view camera features are displayed. screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system. salt sprayer. have been removed when the liftgate is ajar.e.

Note: The camera may not operate correctly under the following conditions: • Nighttime or dark areas if one or both reverse lamps are not operating. water or debris. E Fixed guideline: Red zone Guidelines and the Centerline F Rear bumper Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines Active guidelines are only shown with fixed are only available when the transmission is guidelines. The fixed and active guidelines fade in and out depending on the steering wheel position. lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner. the camera only sees what is being towed behind your vehicle. Clean the lens with a soft. causing the camera to become misaligned. A B C D E Note: When towing. Parking Aids Note: If the image comes on while the transmission is not in R (Reverse). 169 C-MAX (CCG) . the vehicle might deviate from the original intended path. wheel position is changed while reversing. This might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen. The active guidelines are not shown when the steering wheel position is straight. F To access any of the rear view camera E142436 system settings. If the steering Active or Fixed guidelines are on. In some vehicles. • The rear of the vehicle is hit or damaged. turn in R (Reverse). the steering wheel to point the guidelines Note: The centerline is only available if toward an intended path. have the system inspected by your authorized dealer. the guidelines may disappear once the trailer tow connector is engaged. make the following selections in the touch screen when the A Active guidelines transmission is not in R (Reverse): B Centerline • Menu > Vehicle > Rear View Camera C Fixed guideline: Green zone After changing a system setting. To use active guidelines. • The camera's view is obstructed by mud. the touch screen shows a preview of the selected D Fixed guideline: Yellow zone features.

The zoom is only your vehicle as they move from the green active while the transmission is in R zone to the yellow or red zones. Selectable settings for this feature are ON and OFF. only the centerline is shown. Be aware of your surroundings when using the manual zoom feature. when it is used again. camera delay feature is on. FIXED and OFF. Parking Aids Always use caution while reversing. The default setting for the rear reverse sensing system. Selectable settings for this feature are Selectable settings for this feature are + ACTIVE + FIXED. the camera image remains in the effective at speeds above 8 mph (12 km/h) display until the vehicle speed reaches 6 and may not detect certain angular or mph (10 km/h). When shifting the transmission out of R (Reverse) and into any gear other than P Note: The reverse sensing system is not (Park). Note: Manual zoom is only available when the transmission is in R (Reverse). The alert highlights camera delay is OFF. The reverse sensing alert can be disabled and if visual park aid alert is enabled. yellow and green button is selected. This allows you to get a closer view of an Objects in the red zone are closest to your object behind the vehicle. highlights which appear on top of the video Selectable settings for this feature are ON image when an object is detected by the and OFF. Manual Zoom WARNING When manual zoom is on. This occurs when the rear moving objects. The zoomed vehicle and objects in the green zone are image keeps the bumper in the image to farther away. Visual Park Aid Alert Rear Camera Delay Note: Visual park alert is only available when the transmission is in R (Reverse). the closest object detected. the feature get better coverage on both sides and rear automatically turns off and must be reset of the vehicle. the full area behind the vehicle is not shown. or until a radio The system uses red. Note: When manual zoom is enabled. Objects are getting closer to provide a reference. 170 C-MAX (CCG) . highlighted areas are still displayed. When the transmission is side view mirrors and rear view mirror to shifted out of R (Reverse). Use the (Reverse). and -. The default setting for the manual zoom is OFF.

E142437 The cruise controls are located on the steering wheel. Failure to do so could result in loss and release SET+. erased. serious injury or death. on winding roads or when the Changing the Set Speed road surface is slippery. The vehicle speed may increase above set speed will change in approximately the set speed. Release result in loss of vehicle control. USING CRUISE CONTROL 2. of vehicle control. The set speed will not be driving uphill. Accelerate to the desired speed. Press speed. speed. your • Press and release SET+ or SET-. 3. or tap (16 km/h) below your set speed while the brake pedal. Cruise Control PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION The indicator will display in the instrument cluster. When you are going downhill. Switching Cruise Control Off Note: You will erase the set speed if you switch the system off. The system will not 1 mph (2 km/h) increments. Canceling the Set Speed Note: Cruise control will disengage if your vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph Pull CAN toward you and release. Resuming the Set Speed Pull RES toward you and release. 1. apply the brakes. Press and release SET+. Press and release OFF or switch the ignition off. This could • Press and hold SET+ or SET-. serious the control when you reach the desired injury or death. Do not use cruise control in heavy traffic. Take your foot off the accelerator WARNINGS pedal. E71340 Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the Setting a Speed accelerator pedal. Change down a gear to • Press the accelerator or brake pedal assist the system in maintaining the set until you reach the desired speed. 171 C-MAX (CCG) . Switching Cruise Control On Press and release ON.

Cruise Control ECO Cruise Control This feature saves vehicle energy by relaxing acceleration compared to standard cruise control. ECO will appear in the information display when ECO cruise control is activated. It can be switched on or off in the information display. 172 C-MAX (CCG) . your vehicle may temporarily lose speed when going uphill. For example. See General Information (page 88).

communicates with the vehicle's brake Obtain immediate service if a system system to help operate advanced stability error is detected. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. After at least 10 seconds. before the strategy is relearned and all systems are reactivated. Driving Aids STEERING system. Adaptive Learning reset the system by restarting the engine. disconnected or a new battery installed. It vehicle to your dealer to have it checked. and turn wander or pull. If this happens. but a serious condition may exist. Extreme continuous steering may increase the effort it takes for you to steer. This occurs to prevent internal overheating and permanent damage to your steering 173 C-MAX (CCG) . If this should occur. You may not notice control and accident avoidance systems. Typical steering and driving WARNINGS maneuvers will allow the system to cool The electric power steering system and steering assist will return to normal. Failure to do so may result in loss of the vehicle must be driven a short distance steering control. you will neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle Electric Power Steering manually nor will it cause permanent damage. When a system If the steering wanders or pulls. and watch the information display for a The EPS system adaptive learning helps steering message. but it takes more effort. may also make the steering seem to stop the vehicle in a safe place. take the overall handling and steering feel. any difference in the feel of your Additionally. whenever the battery is steering. check for: error is detected a steering message will • an improperly inflated tire appear in the information display. or returns while driving. you can steer the vehicle manually. Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power-assisted steering system. off the engine. If a steering message correct for road irregularities and improves returns. If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving (or if the ignition is turned off). has diagnostic checks that Steering Tips continuously monitor the system to ensure proper operation. a message will be displayed in A high crown in the road or high crosswinds the information display. • uneven tire wear The electric power steering system has diagnostic checks that • loose or worn suspension components continuously monitor the system to • loose or worn steering components ensure proper operation of the electronic • improper vehicle alignment system. When an electronic error is detected.

Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade rearward. Lift the To operate the cargo shade: handle to unlatch the lid. Use the cargo shade to cover items in the cargo area of your vehicle. Secure both ends of the support rod into the retention slots located on the WARNINGS rear quarter trim panels. LUGGAGE COVERS 2. They may obstruct your vision or strike occupants of your vehicle in a sudden stop or crash. 1. Make sure that the posts are properly Removing the Shade latched in mounting features. 174 C-MAX (CCG) . The cover may cause injury in a sudden stop or accident if it is not securely installed. You will see a red mark when the lever is unlatched. and then lift the shade out of the mounting feature. Load Carrying REAR UNDER FLOOR STORAGE E164183 Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the mounting features located behind the rear E162198 seat on the rear trim panels to install the cargo shade. E162195 Press the release lever on each side forward. Do not place any objects on the cargo area shade. The under floor storage compartments are located behind the front seats.

you found on the Tire Label on the must subtract the weight of the B-Pillar or the edge of the driver equipment from the payload listed door (vehicles exported outside on the Tire Label in order to the US and Canada may not have determine the new payload.is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank Vehicle Loading of fuel and all standard equipment.is the combined weight the assembly plant. aftermarket equipment. Load Carrying LOAD LIMIT Base Curb Weight . Look for “THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb. The maximum authorized-dealer installed payload for your vehicle can be equipment on the vehicle. The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum 175 C-MAX (CCG) . familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle’s weight ratings from the vehicle’s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label: PAYLOAD E143816 payload for the vehicle as built by Payload . cargo.” for maximum payload. It does not include This section will guide you in the passengers. a Tire Label).is the Properly loading your vehicle will weight of your new vehicle when provide maximum return of you picked it up from your vehicle design performance. authorized dealer plus any Before loading your vehicle. If you install of cargo and passengers that the any aftermarket or vehicle is carrying. Vehicle Curb Weight . or optional proper loading of your vehicle to equipment. keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability.

Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover. even if there is space available. do not add more cargo. Load Carrying WARNING The appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity (how much space is available) or by payload capacity (how much weight the vehicle should carry). Example only: E142516 176 C-MAX (CCG) . Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle.

door-latch post.is the maximum weight added to the Base Curb allowable weight that can be Weight. including cargo and carried by a single axle (front or optional equipment. The label shall axle (front and rear) including be affixed to either the door hinge vehicle curb weight and all pillar. next to the driver's seating position.is on the Safety Compliance the total weight placed on each Certification Label. or the door payload. The total load on each axle must never exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating. Load Carrying E142517 CARGO E143817 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Cargo Weight . These numbers are shown GAW (Gross Axle Weight) . edge that meets the door-latch post. rear). 177 C-MAX (CCG) .includes all Rating) .

Label. or the door edge GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight that meets the door-latch post. door-latch post. cargo. Load Carrying E162603 Safety Compliance Certification GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) . plus to either the door hinge pillar. plus passengers. Rating) .is the maximum next to the driver's seating allowable weight of the fully position. It is shown on the Example only: E142523 178 C-MAX (CCG) . The Gross Vehicle loaded vehicle (including all Weight must never exceed the options. The label shall be affixed is the Vehicle Curb Weight. passengers Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. equipment. and cargo).

Determine the combined capacities than the original tires weight of the driver and because they may lower the passengers that will be riding vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR in your vehicle. serious damage to the vehicle. Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying 2." on your vehicle’s placard. and GAWR limitations. correct load limit: Do not exceed the GVWR or 1. vehicle handling or performance. Subtract the combined weight with a higher limit than the original of the driver and passengers tires do not increase the GVWR from XXX kg or XXX lb. Locate the statement "The the GAWR specified on the combined weight of occupants Safety Compliance Certification and cargo should never exceed Label. 179 C-MAX (CCG) . XXX kg or XXX lb. limitations. engine. Replacement tires 3. loss of Steps for determining the control and personal injury. transmission and/or structural damage. Load Carrying E142524 WARNINGS WARNINGS Exceeding the Safety Exceeding any vehicle weight Compliance Certification rating limitation could result Label vehicle weight rating limits in serious damage to the vehicle could result in substandard and/or personal injury.

220) . Measuring the calculated in Step 4. passengers in kilograms .440 - (5 x 220) . If you remove pounds (99 kilograms) each and three 100-pound (45-kilogram) the golf bags weigh approximately cement bags. four of your You will need to reduce the load friends and all the golf bags? You weight by at least 240 pounds and four friends average 220 (104 kilograms). No. Now you have 180 C-MAX (CCG) . you have room trailer. you have available amount of cargo and enough load capacity in your luggage load capacity.(9 x 100) = 1400 .150 = 150 pounds. if the “XXX” amount and your golf bags.(12 x 100) = 1400 . weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms).1200 = .(2 x 99 and luggage capacity. capacity to carry you.(5 x 99 kilograms) - your vehicle. inside of the vehicle with the rear 6.540 = -103 kilograms. In metric units.198 .240 pounds.5 kilograms) each.495 - available cargo and luggage 67. In *Suppose your vehicle has a metric units.(12 x 45 kilograms) = to go golfing. Consult this manual to you have enough load capacity to determine how this reduces the transport the cement to your available cargo and luggage home? If you and your friend each load capacity of your vehicle. up cement from the local home That weight may not safely improvement store to finish that exceed the available cargo and patio you have been planning for luggage load capacity the past two years.(5 x 30) = 1400 . then the load 30 pounds (13. load capacity is 650 lb. load from your trailer for twelve 100-pound will be transferred to your (45-kilogram) bags of cement. you do available amount of cargo and not have enough cargo capacity luggage load capacity: to carry that much weight. For vehicle to transport four friends example. You decide kilograms) . equals 1. You and weight of luggage and cargo one of your friends decide to pick being loaded on the vehicle. the calculation would be: 1400 - The following gives you a few (2 x 220) . and there will the calculation would be: 635 be five 150 lb.440 examples on how to calculate the . Determine the combined and luggage capacity. Is there enough load 635 .5 kilograms) = 635 . Do vehicle. Yes. If your vehicle will be towing a seat folded down.(2 x The calculation would be: 1400 . Load Carrying 4.5 kilograms.) 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo 5.1100 900 = 60 pounds.5 = 72. *Suppose your vehicle has a (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb. the calculation would 1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo be: 635 kilograms .400 lb. calculation would be:1400 . The resulting figure equals the . the amount of (5 x 13.

next to the driver's seating position.(2 x 99 kilograms) .(9 x 45 kilograms) = 635 . 181 C-MAX (CCG) . Load Carrying the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home. In metric units. door-latch post.198 . The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Front or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. the calculation would be: 635 kilograms . The label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar.405 = 32 kilograms. or the door edge that meets the door-latch post.

• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h). need to be overridden. is towed in a forward direction. regardless of the powertrain/transmission configuration) under the following conditions: E143886 • The vehicle is facing forward so that it If you need to have your vehicle towed. Do not tow with a slingbelt. The front wheels (drive wheels) must be on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the rear using wheel lift equipment. designed to tow. or vehicle. See Automatic Transmission (page 153). contact a professional towing service or. 182 C-MAX (CCG) . • Maximum distance is 50 miles (80 kilometers). If the transmission gearshift lever assistance program. your roadside cannot be moved to position N. Towing TOWING A TRAILER We recommend the use of a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your vehicle. We recommend placing the rear wheels on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle from the front using wheel lift equipment. car-hauling trailer. This powertrain is not by any other means. Vehicle damage may occur if towed incorrectly. Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook-up and towing procedures for your vehicle. This prevents damage to the transmission. it can be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground. • The transmission is placed in position if you are a member of a roadside N. Ford WARNING Motor Company has not approved a Never tow a trailer with your slingbelt towing procedure. or flatbed transport vehicle). it may assistance service provider. This prevents damage to the rear fascia. Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE operators. TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR WHEELS Emergency Towing In the event your vehicle becomes disabled (without access to wheel dollies.

After allowing the vehicle to run. 183 C-MAX (CCG) . Towing Recreational Towing Note: Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle. start the vehicle and allow it to run for one minute at the beginning of each day (you may need to press the accelerator pedal in order to start the vehicle). You can tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly. If you are using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider. place the transmission back into position N and the ignition in the accessory position. See Climate Control (page 105). Follow these guidelines if you have a need for recreational (RV) towing. An example of recreational towing would be towing your vehicle behind a motorhome. • Place the transmission in position P. • Place the transmission in position N. • Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h). • Release the parking brake. We designed these guidelines to prevent damage to your transmission. If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground: • Tow only in the forward direction. See Starting and Stopping the Engine (page 124). • Place the ignition in the off position.

When you have the heater on. Control (page 171). • For the C-Max Energi. go to the furthest it. avoid setting necessary to be comfortable. You may improve your fuel economy by • Turn off the defroster when you no keeping these things in mind: longer need it for visibility. See High Voltage • How you maintain your vehicle Battery (page 146). turning it off • Avoid constant accelerating in order to will help you improve your fuel change lanes and get around other economy. • Keep the tires properly inflated and use • Combine errands and minimize only the recommended size. When you have the air break in. your vehicle cabin. 184 C-MAX (CCG) . • Drive at steady speeds without • Use low gear L shift position when stopping. If possible. • Anticipate stops. • For the C-Max Energi. vehicles. See Cruise hour). especially in 15 percent less fuel than traveling at 75 hilly terrain. stop-and-go driving. For information on miles per hour (121 kilometers per enabling eco-cruise. Avoid hard accelerations and conditioning on. keep it at the lowest driving too fast for the first 1000 miles blower and highest temperature (1600 kilometers). During this time. temperature setting necessary to be comfortable. Traveling at 65 miles per hour whenever possible. The engine also needs to not need it. enhanced engine braking is needed. • The conditions you drive your vehicle • Turn off the heated seats if you are not in using them. parking during the break-in period. keep destination first and then work your it at the lowest blower and way back home. This may save fuel by approximately 300 miles (480 reducing the energy needed to heat the kilometers). use drive gear D shift vehicle may eliminate the need to stop. Driving Hints BREAKING-IN • When it is cold outside. carrying heavy loads up steep grades • When it is hot or sunny outside. • Close the windows for high-speed driving. Slowing down your Otherwise. When • Turn off the heater if you do not need running errands. (105 kilometers per hour) uses about • Use ECO Cruise Control. may exhibit some unusual driving • Turn off the air conditioning if you do characteristics. plug in and • Drive your vehicle at reasonable recharge the high voltage battery speeds. position. For more information on preconditioning. in a shaded or climate-controlled environment will save fuel by reducing ECONOMICAL DRIVING the energy needed to cool the cabin. use Several things affect your fuel economy: preconditioning to improve your fuel • How you drive your vehicle economy. A warmed up engine works more efficiently. park in a sunny location or climate-controlled You need to break in new tires for environment.

E142667 Approximately 1 mile per gallon (0. Driving Hints • Use the recommended engine oil. is unavoidable. drive style. water may enter your engine’s air intake and severely damage your engine or your • Avoid adding particular accessories to vehicle may stall. carried. DRIVING THROUGH WATER • Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance. Using fuel below the recommended rating will lower your fuel economy. • Avoid sudden accelerations or hard accelerations. • Avoid revving the engine before turning off your vehicle. moderate fashion. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as Things to keep in mind when you refuel quickly as dry brakes. ski or bike racks). car top carriers. applying light pressure on the brake pedal. • Avoid long idle periods. • Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving. your vehicle: • Fuel generates fewer vapors when it is cool and dark outside. always dry the • Avoid driving with the wheels out of brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while alignment.4 kilometers per liter) is lost for every When driving through water. Accelerate and slow down in a smooth. • Avoid carrying unnecessary weight. 185 C-MAX (CCG) . Once through the water. proceed very slowly. Never Avoid these actions. Also. • Use the recommended octane-rated fuel. See If driving through deep or standing water Information Displays (page 88). Note: Driving through deep water above • Use the coach and brake coach display the recommended levels can cause vehicle to get feedback on your economical damage. traction or 400 pounds (180 kilograms) of weight brake capability may be limited. • Do not warm up your vehicle on cold mornings. Fill your vehicle up in the early morning or late evening. your vehicle (bug deflectors. For more information. they reduce your fuel drive through water that is higher than the economy: bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of the hubs (for trucks).

position the floor mat eyelet over the retention post and press down to lock in position. 186 C-MAX (CCG) . Incorrectly fitted floor mats can cause the accelerator pedal to become stuck in the open position. Do not place additional floor mats or any other covering on top of the original floor mats. This can cause loss of vehicle control. Driving Hints FLOOR MATS To install the floor mats. E142666 WARNINGS Always use floor mats that are designed to fit the foot well of your vehicle. leaving the pedal area unobstructed. Do not place unsecured floor mats or any other covering in the foot well. Do not allow objects to fall or become trapped under the pedals of your vehicle. Remove in reverse order. This will reduce the pedal clearance and interfere with the pedal operation. and which can be firmly secured to retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways. Always correctly install the floor mats to the retention posts so that they cannot slip out of position or obstruct pedal operation. This can cause loss of vehicle control. Carry out regular inspections to make sure the floor mats are secure.

To obtain reimbursement information. excess of 35 miles (56. no recoveries. Contractors. U. The service is available: Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your • 24 hours.3 the coverage section of your warranty kilometers) from the disablement guide. wallet for quick reference.0 gallons (18. if If you need to arrange roadside assistance provided with the vehicle (except for yourself. vehicle concern. Ford • lock-out assistance (key replacement vehicle customers call 1-800-241-3673. shall deliver up Vehicles Sold In Canada : Getting to 2. the trailer does not qualify for To fully assist you should you have a any roadside services. Vehicles Sold In Canada : Using • winch out — available within 100 feet Roadside Assistance (30. please refer to dealer more than 35 miles (56.: Getting the nearest authorized dealer. : Using assistance program. (56.9 liters) of diesel fuel Canadian customers who require roadside to a disabled vehicle. call us in Canada at location.3 kilometers).0 gallons (7. the member shall be 1-800-665-2006. to the nearest dealership within 35 miles • battery jump start. cost is the customer's responsibility). but the towing vehicle is operational.S. This program is Roadside Assistance separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.S. coverage. If a member may differ from the U. If the trailer Roadside Assistance is disabled. your Owner's Manual portfolio. Customers will be asked to submit their • fuel delivery — Independent Service original receipts. within 35 miles (56. or visit our website at responsible for any mileage costs in www.S.ford. Ford vehicle customers who require Roadside assistance will cover: Roadside Assistance. Fuel delivery assistance. call 1-800-241-3673.S.3 kilometers). U. Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Trailers shall be covered up to $200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at Vehicles Sold In The U.S. local or municipal law. call 1-800-665-2006. If you requests to be towed to an authorized require more information. • a flat tire change with a good spare. if not prohibited by state. you may complete the roadside assistance identification card • towing — Ford and Lincoln eligible found in the centerfold of your warranty vehicles towed to an authorized dealer guide and retain for future reference.3 kilometers) of the disablement location or to the nearest Canadian roadside coverage and benefits authorized dealer. Ford Motor Company will vehicles that have been supplied with reimburse a reasonable amount for towing a tire inflation kit).5 liters) of gasoline or Roadside Assistance 5.ca. service is limited to two no-charge occurrences within a 12-month period. For your convenience.5 meters) of a paved or county maintained road. This card is • for the coverage period listed on the found in the owner's information portfolio Roadside Assistance Card included in in the glove compartment. Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside Vehicles Sold In The U. 187 C-MAX (CCG) . seven days a week.

Not every impact Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your will cause a shut-off. vehicle. Note: If used when the vehicle is not 2. vehicle. hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch. There START/STOP button (crank may be insufficient power to restart your attempt). and the front and rear direction indicators will flash. sparks or lit cigarettes. Turn the ignition to crank. Ford Motor Company recommends automatic transmission vehicle. this vehicle is equipped with a Preparing Your Vehicle fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine. Automatic that the fuel system be inspected by an transmissions do not have push-start authorized dealer after any collision. Failure to inspect and. Press the START/STOP button to turn the ignition off. Use it when your vehicle is 4. Press the START/STOP button again creating a safety hazard for other to re-enable the fuel system. capability. Turn the ignition on again to re-enable stay clear of the engine cooling fan and the fuel pump. Remove your foot from the brake pedal The hazard warning button is and press the START/STOP button located on the instrument panel. For vehicles equipped with a push button start system: 188 C-MAX (CCG) . Roadside Emergencies HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS 1. repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious Do not attempt to push-start your injury. if necessary. the battery will lose charge. 3. • Press the button to turn on the hazard JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE warning function. (ignition off). the parking brake on both vehicles and 4. 1. Batteries contain sulfuric acid which WARNING can burn skin. you may restart your vehicle by disabled vehicle as this could damage the doing the following: vehicle's electrical system. eyes and clothing. explode if exposed to flames. Turn the ignition off. Turn the ignition off. Park the booster vehicle close to the 2. An explosion could FUEL SHUTOFF result in injury or vehicle damage. Attempting to push-start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage. Set 3. motorists. Press the brake pedal and press the running. 1. if contacted. other moving parts. Should your vehicle shut off after a Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the collision. WARNINGS • Press the button again to turn them The gases around the battery can off. In the event of a moderate to severe collision.

shows the two connector prongs used for jump-starting your vehicle. Negative prong (-) Note: In the illustration. Roadside Emergencies 2. Positive prong (+) B. Your vehicle can be jumped the 3. Note: Remove the red cap from the positive prong (A) on your vehicle before connecting the cables. 189 C-MAX (CCG) . Ensure that Your vehicle has a 12-volt battery that has vent caps are tight and level. two prongs accessible from under the hood. Check all battery terminals and remove Connecting the Jumper Cables any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables. using these prongs. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles same way conventional vehicles can by to protect from any electrical surges. The illustration below Turn all other accessories off. A B E163911 A. the vehicle on the bottom is used to designate the assisting (boosting) battery.

Once you start the disabled vehicle. belts. 2. engine rocker covers. Make sure that the cables are clear of fan blades. Roadside Emergencies WARNING Never connect the negative end of the cable to the negative (-) terminal of the discharged battery. 4. Note: In the illustration. the vehicle on the 3. 190 C-MAX (CCG) . to the positive (+) prong (A) of the discharged battery. Make the final connection of the negative (-) cable to the negative (-) prong (B) of your vehicle. Removing the Jumper Cables 2. or any fuel delivery system parts. the intake manifold or electrical components. Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable to fuel lines. Connect the other end of the positive Remove the jumper cables in the reverse (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal order that they were connected. Jump Starting 1. Always use the negative prong as a grounding point. but the electric motor may be running. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable jumper cables. Connect the negative (-) cable to the bottom is used to designate the assisting negative (-) terminal of the assisting (boosting) battery. run E148861 both vehicles for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the 1. battery. the moving parts of both engines. Start the booster vehicle and press the accelerator pedal moderately. Check the instrument cluster for the Ready to Drive light as the gasoline engine may not start. 3. of the assisting battery. A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery. These items should not be considered grounding points. Start the disabled vehicle.

representative for service. let become familiar with your vehicle’s the disabled vehicle sit in Ready to Drive safety information and recommended mode for several minutes to charge the safety practices. The 12V battery will yourself. The disabled vehicle can • Do not attempt to repair damaged charge the 12V battery even if the gasoline electric and hybrid-electric vehicles engine may be off. wires and high-voltage batteries present potential high-voltage shock hazards. Roadside Emergencies COLLISION. flammable gases and fire. negative prong. E148862 • Venting/off-gassing high-voltage battery vapors are potentially toxic and 1. • Exposed electrical components. 3. vehicle's battery. Safety Practices 4. 191 C-MAX (CCG) . Remove the jumper cable on the high-voltage battery may result in negative (-) terminal of the booster immediate or delayed release of toxic. • Review the owner’s manual and After disconnecting the jumper cables. Contact an authorized Ford receive power from the high-voltage Dealer or vehicle manufacturer battery instead. Remove the jumper cable from the flammable. vehicle's battery. • Physical damage to the vehicle or 2. Remove the jumper cable from the • Know the make and model of your positive (+) prong of the disabled vehicle. 12V battery. Remove the jumper cable from the positive (+) terminal of the booster Vehicle Information and General vehicle's battery. DAMAGE OR FIRE EVENT Guidance for Ford Motor Company Electric and Hybrid-Electric Vehicles Equipped With High Voltage Batteries (Vehicle Owner/Operator/General Public) Electric and Hybrid-Electric Vehicle Considerations In the event of damage or fire involving an electric vehicle (EV) or hybrid-electric vehicle (HEV): • Always assume the high-voltage battery and associated components are energized and fully charged.

an authorized Ford responders arrive. response menu). possible as there may be other steps tell them that the vehicle involved is an to secure and discharge the electric vehicle or hybrid vehicle. location and remain on the scene. notify • Call 911 if assistance is needed and Ford Motor Company 1-800-392-3673 advise that an electric or hybrid-electric (then follow the prompts on the voice vehicle is involved. door. sparks. Fires • Call 911 if you observe leaking fluids. hybrid-electric vehicle. • Exit the vehicle immediately. • Stay out of the roadway and stay out of the way of any oncoming traffic If possible while awaiting the arrival of emergency • Move your car to a safe. Post-Incident • Roll down the windows before shutting your vehicle off. 192 C-MAX (CCG) . set the a structure or within 50 feet (15 parking brake. dealer or service center as soon as • When emergency responders arrive. and remain out of the way of (then follow the prompts on the voice oncoming traffic until emergency response menu). meters) of any structure or vehicle. from the vehicle. • Advise 911 that an electric or hybrid-electric vehicle is involved. A crash or impact significant enough to as they may be hazardous. Always • For vehicles in the United States. require an emergency response for conventional vehicles would also require • Remain a safe distance upwind and the same response for an electric or uphill from the vehicle fire. an authorized Ford dealer or service center as soon as • Do not touch exposed electrical possible as there may be other steps components or the engine to secure and discharge the compartment. high-voltage battery. or hear As with any vehicle.. open window. or trunk). notify Ford • Avoid contact with leaking fluids and Motor Company 1-800-565-3673 gases. • Do not store a severely damaged vehicle with a lithium-ion battery inside • Place your vehicle in Park. smoke or flames. nearby responders. and move your key(s) at least 16 feet (5 meters) • Make sure that passenger and cargo away from the vehicle. • For vehicles in Canada. exist.e. smoke or flames coming high-voltage battery. vapors or gas from the vehicle. compartments remain ventilated (i. do not inhale smoke. as a shock hazard may high-voltage battery. call 911 immediately if gurgling or bubbling from the you see sparks. Roadside Emergencies Crashes • As with any vehicle fire. activate the hazard lights. turn off the vehicle.

side curtain or Safety Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners. Roadside Emergencies POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM The system flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag (front. side. The horn and lamps will turn off when: • The hazard control button is pressed • The panic button (if equipped) is pressed on the remote entry transmitter • Your vehicle runs out of power 193 C-MAX (CCG) .

1. P. Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be City/State. we recommend you return to your selling • Recalls authorized dealer who wants to ensure • Ford Extended Service Plans your continued satisfaction. MI 48121 3. you may have to take your vehicle Ford Motor Company of Canada.O. require special training and equipment. 1-800-392-3673 (FORD) please contact the Ford Customer (TDD for the hearing impaired: Relationship Center. • Ford Genuine Accessories Please note that certain warranty repairs • Service specials and promotions. Box 6248 Manager. Contact your Sales Representative or In the United States: Service Advisor at your selling/servicing authorized dealer. If you require assistance or clarification Telephone on Ford Motor Company policies. 1-800-232-5952) Online Additional information and resources are available online at www. dealer locator by Dealer Name. Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU These are some of the items that can be found online: NEED • U. so not all authorized dealers are authorized In Canada: to perform all warranty repairs. contact the Sales Manager.O. or are Customer Relationship Center or use the unsatisfied with the service you are online resources listed below to find the receiving. Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts. While • Owner Manuals any authorized dealer handling your vehicle • Maintenance Schedules line will provide warranty service. Ontario L6K 0C8 perform a repair after taking your vehicle Telephone to the authorized dealer.ford. follow these steps: nearest authorized dealer. Limited to another authorized dealer. depending on the warranty repair Customer Relationship Centre needed. Dearborn.S. Box 2000 A reasonable time must be allowed to Oakville. or 1-800-565-3673 (FORD) remanufactured or other parts that are Online authorized by Ford. Customer Relationship Center Service Manager or Customer Relations P.com 194 C-MAX (CCG) . www. contact the Ford If you have questions or concerns. This means Mailing address that.ca Away From Home Additional Assistance If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service. or Zip Code performed by an authorized dealer. If your inquiry or concern remains Ford Motor Company unresolved. Mailing address 2.fordowner.

2301 et seq. within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or • Your telephone number (home and the first 18000 miles (29 000 km). Ford is or condition that substantially impairs also allowed a final repair attempt in some the use. value or safety of the vehicle) states. the consumer pursuing replacement or repurchase must also notify the manufacturer of the remedies provided by certain state laws. Four or more repair attempts are made Ford in writing before pursuing remedies on the same nonconformity (a defect under your state’s warranty laws. California Civil Code Section 1793. 195 C-MAX (CCG) .S. if a manufacturer or its by California Civil Code Section 1793. express warranties if.C. Customer Assistance In order to help you serve you better. The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle. before In the case of 1 or 2 above. resort to BBB AUTO LINE is consumer (less a reasonable allowance not required by those statutes. whichever occurs first: • The name of the authorized dealer and 1.2(d) in court any rights or remedies conferred requires that. cause death or serious bodily injury OR In some states.22(b) please have the following information presumes that the manufacturer has had available when contacting a Customer a reasonable number of attempts to Relationship Center: conform the vehicle to its applicable • Vehicle Identification Number. you must directly notify 2. the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act.S. Two or more repair attempts are made city where located. on the same non-conformity likely to • The vehicle’s current odometer reading. business). ONLY) You are required to submit your warranty dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting California Civil Code Section 1793. 15 U. a warranty dispute 3. for consumer use). representative is unable to repair a motor You are also required to use BBB AUTO vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s LINE before exercising rights or seeking applicable express warranty after a remedies created by the Federal reasonable number of attempts. OR In the United States. Mail Drop 3NE-B Dearborn. If you choose to seek replace the vehicle with one substantially redress by pursuing rights and remedies identical or repurchase the vehicle and not created by California Civil Code Section reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to 1793. The vehicle is out of service for repair must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE of nonconformities for a total of more before taking action under the than 30 calendar days (not necessarily Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss the actual price paid or payable by the Warranty Act. or to the all at one time).22(b). manufacturer shall be required to either sec. MI 48126 IN CALIFORNIA (U. need for the repair of the nonconformity This dispute handling procedure is not at the following address: required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent Ford Motor Company of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or 16800 Executive Plaza Drive state replacement or repurchase laws. extent allowed by state law.

or to discontinue this process is eligible. warranty concerns. information about your and expensive legal proceedings. Should you choose to Canada participates in an impartial third accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision. produce a settlement have failed. a representative of the requested by calling the Ford Motor BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center Company to explore options for settlement at 1-800-392-3673. Virginia 22203-1833 The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts – mediation and arbitration. are admissible concern have been unsatisfactory. of the claim. Ford party mediation/arbitration program is then bound by the decision. signed and PROGRAM (U. and any steps you have 196 C-MAX (CCG) . and must administered by the Canadian Motor comply with the decision within 30 days Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). please call or a disagreement when all other efforts to write to request a program application. The arbitrator will UTILIZING THE consider the testimony provided and make MEDIATION/ARBITRATION a decision after the hearing. If a Program Summary Guidelines. modify participate in mediation. 4200 Wilson Boulevard. This You will be asked for your name and procedure is without cost to you and is address. If an agreement is not reached Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the during mediation or you do not want to right to change eligibility limitations. warranty concern has not been resolved You can get more information by using the three-step procedure outlined calling BBB AUTO LINE at earlier in this chapter in the Getting the 1-800-955-5100. or writing to: Services you need section. and if your claim procedures. ONLY) returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership. will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person. you may participate in the at any time without notice and without arbitration process. The CAMVAP program is a straight forward BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the and relatively speedy alternative to resolve information provided below. the BBB will Your satisfaction is important to Ford review the claim for eligibility under the Motor Company and to your dealer. and you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford may reject the decision and proceed to of Canada and the authorized dealer to court where all findings of the BBB Auto resolve a factory-related vehicle service Line dispute. PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY) Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty For vehicles delivered to authorized days after you file your claim with the BBB. A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE will need to be completed. Suite 800 Arlington. of receipt of your acceptance letter. An arbitration hearing obligation. and decision. Upon receipt. general information about your designed to eliminate the need for lengthy new vehicle.S. Customer Assistance THE BETTER BUSINESS already taken to try to resolve them. In those cases where You are not bound by the decision. you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO BBB AUTO LINE LINE program. BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be During mediation. Canadian dealers. Ford of in the court action.

For 1555 Fairlane Drive more information. the Caribbean. and Israel. render awards to resolve contact: disputes. Company or Ford of Canada is not Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673) responsible for any damage caused by use FAX: (313) 390-0804 of improper fuel.ford. or visit www. contact the appropriate foreign (3673). appropriate. If parties.com GETTING ASSISTANCE For customers in Guam. fuel. please feel free to call Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD country. If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in the Middle East. Telephone: (313) 594-4857 Fax: (313) 390-0804 Email: expcac@ford. call your CAMVAP Provincial Allen Park. arbitrators review the positions of the contact the nearest authorized dealer. Michigan 48101 Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685 U. Using leaded fuel may Email: prcac@ford. fair. contact: 197 C-MAX (CCG) . contact the nearest authorized dealer. and the U. an informal environment.S.S. AND Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana CANADA Islands (CNMI). Customer Assistance In the CAMVAP program. without charge or Fairlane Business Park #3 obligation. embassy or consulate.A.com. Virgin Islands.A.S.camvap. Virgin Islands. mutually convenient times and places in Sub-Saharan Africa. Michigan 48101 serious engine damage.com also result in difficulty importing your www. If the authorized dealer cannot help you. make decisions and. Ford Motor U.S. If the authorized dealer cannot help you.ca. impartial If your vehicle must be serviced while you third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region. If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only contact: get fuel with an anti-knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle. These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration If your vehicle must be serviced while you regulations and where to find unleaded are traveling or living in Puerto Rico. FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL INITIATIVES The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle Customer Relationship Center without proper conversion may damage 1555 Fairlane Drive the effectiveness of your emission control Fairlane Business Park #3 system and may cause engine knocking or Allen Park. U. FORD MOTOR COMPANY and final as the arbitrator’s award is FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL binding on both you and Ford of Canada. America Samoa. the OUTSIDE THE U. contact the nearest authorized dealer.S. INITIATIVES CAMVAP services are available in all Customer Relationship Center Canadian territories and provinces. These impartial Central America. FORD MOTOR COMPANY contact our Customer Relationship Center. when the authorized dealer cannot help you.pr vehicle back into the United States. CAMVAP decisions are fast.

it may open an investigation.6:00 p. ONLY) emailing expcac@ford.com contacting Helm. Incorporated using the If you buy your vehicle in North America contact information listed previously in this and then relocate to any of the above section. communicate your concern with the E142557 dealership’s Sales Manager. In the event your inquiry is unresolved. contact the nearest authorized dealer. If you are in another foreign country.S. it may order a recall and HELM.com from your authorized dealer or by www.S. your dealer. Incorporated can also be reached Customer Relationship Center by their website: P. check or money order. EST 198 C-MAX (CCG) . please contact the respective crash or could cause injury or Customer Relationship Center as death. Michigan 48170 in individual problems between Attention: Customer Service you. safety defect exists in a group of contact Helm. Box 21470 www. and if it finds that a To order the publications in this portfolio.me. Customer Assistance Ford Middle East Helm. United Arab Emirates Telephone: +971 4 3326084 (Items in this catalog may be purchased Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi by credit card. INCORPORATED remedy campaign. (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company. register your vehicle identification number (VIN) and new address with Ford Motor Company Export REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by (U. Incorporated at: vehicles. or Ford Motor Or to order a free publication catalog.com Dubai.O. If you believe that your vehicle has If you require additional assistance or a defect which could cause a clarification. inform the National Highway Customers in the U. should call Traffic Safety Administration 1-800-392-3673. Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager. .com. 47911 Halyard Drive NHTSA cannot become involved Plymouth.m. locations.) Arabia: 800 8971409 Local Telephone Number of Kuwait: Obtaining a French Owner’s 24810575 Manual FAX: +971 4 3327299 French Owner’s Manual can be obtained Email: menacac@ford. you should immediately previously listed. toll free: 1-800-782-4356 Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m.helminc. call Company. ORDERING ADDITIONAL If NHTSA receives similar OWNER'S LITERATURE complaints. However.ford.

Transport Canada Contact Information Website http://www. you should immediately inform Transport Canada.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu. you may call You can also obtain other the Vehicle Safety Hotline information about motor vehicle toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: safety from 1-800-424-9153).gc. If you believe that your vehicle has Southeast a defect which could cause a Washington. go to http://www.safercar.safercar. http://www.htm Phone 1–800–333–0510 199 C-MAX (CCG) . or write to: REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS Administrator (CANADA ONLY) 1200 New Jersey Avenue. 20590 crash or could cause injury or death. D.tc.gov. Customer Assistance To contact NHTSA.C.gov.

the engine compartment. The power distribution box is located in If you need to replace one of these fuses. you will need to reset some Always disconnect the battery before features. There is a reservoirs. high-current fuses that protect your vehicle's main electrical systems from Power Distribution Box overloads. See Changing the 12V Battery servicing high current fuses. Lift the release lever at the rear of the cover to remove it. Pre-Fuse Box always replace the cover to the power distribution box before Your vehicle has a pre-fuse box attached reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid to the power distribution box. (page 218). second pre-fuse box attached to the 12-volt battery terminal in the rear of your vehicle. E162196 200 C-MAX (CCG) . Fuses FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART WARNINGS To reduce risk of electrical shock. If you disconnect and reconnect the WARNINGS battery. They contain high-current fuses. It has see an authorized dealer.

Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F1 50A Midi Cooling fan module F2 50A Midi Electric water pump F3 50A Midi Body control module supply 1 F4 50A Midi Body control module supply 2 F5 — Not used F6 — Not used F7 40A** Anti-lock brake system pump F8 30A** Anti-lock brake system valve F9 40A** Vacuum pump F10 40A** Heater blower motor F11 30A** Engine management F12 — Not used F13 25A** Powertrain control module relay F14 20A** Rear wiper F15 30A** Body control module KL30 supply F16 20A** Body control module 15 feed F17 20A** Transmission oil pump (C-MAX Energi) F18 20A** Front wiper motor F19 5A* Anti-lock brake system and electronic stability program module F20 15A* Horn F21 5A* Stop light switch F22 5A* Vacuum pump monitoring F23 5A* Engine control module 15 / Powertrain control module 15 / Transmission oil pump 15 F24 5A* Relay coils. Light switch module F25 10A* Motor electronic cooling pump 201 C-MAX (CCG) .

Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F26 5A* Electronic power assist steering module 15 F27 5A* Mass air flow sensor F28 15A* Powertrain control module F29 10A* Electronic air conditioning compressor / Positive temperature coefficient heater F30 10A* Engine control module. Powertrain control module F31 5A* Charge port light ring (C-MAX Energi) F32 20A* Vehicle power 2 F33 15A* Vehicle power 4 F34 10A* Injectors F35 10A* Vehicle power 3 F36 20A* Vehicle power 1 R1 — Not used R2 Micro relay Horn R3 Micro relay Hybrid powertrain control R4 Micro relay Front wiper R5 — Not used R6 Micro relay Front and rear wiper high/low R7 Power relay Vacuum pump R8 Power relay Ignition feed R9 — Not used R10 Mini relay Vacuum pump sensor R11 — Not used R12 Power relay Cooling fan R13 Mini relay Heater blower R14 Mini relay Engine control relay *Mini fuses **Cartridge fuses 202 C-MAX (CCG) .

Fuses Passenger Compartment Fuse The fuse panel is located on the right-hand Panel side below the glove box. E129926 Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F56 20A Fuel pump supply F57 — Not used F58 5A Not used (spare) F59 5A Passive anti-theft system 203 C-MAX (CCG) . You may need to remove a trim panel to access it.

Driver door switch pack. Start button F79 15A Radio.5A Steering wheel module F73 7. Multi- function display. Auto-dimming rear view mirror F63 10A Not used (spare) F64 — Not used F65 10A Liftgate release F66 20A Driver door unlock supply F67 7. Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F60 10A Interior light. GPS module. Remote receiver antenna F82 20A Washer pump ground F83 20A Central locking ground 204 C-MAX (CCG) . Climate control module F72 7. Hazard light switch F80 20A Not used (spare) F81 5A Power sun shade. Glove box illumination.5A Data link connector. Overhead console switch bank F61 20A Cigar lighter. OBD II supply F74 15A Headlamp supply F75 15A Fog lamp supply F76 10A Reversing lamp supply F77 20A Washer pump F78 5A Ignition switch.5A Cell phone passport (C-MAX Energi). Second row power point F62 5A Autowipers module. SYNC F68 15A Not used (spare) F69 5A Instrument cluster F70 20A Central lock and unlock supply F71 10A Heating control head (manual air condi- tioner).

5A Electronic 15 feed F86 10A Restraints control module. Remove the fuse panel cover to gain access to the fuses. E129927 Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F1 5A Hands-free liftgate entry module F2 10A Keyless vehicle module F3 5A Keyless vehicle door handles F4 25A Door control unit front left F5 25A Door control unit front right F6 25A Door control unit rear left 205 C-MAX (CCG) . Passenger air bag deactivation indicator F87 — Not used F88 25A Not used (spare) F89 — Not used Luggage Compartment Fuse Panel The fuse panel is located in the luggage compartment behind the left side wheel well. Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F84 20A Drive door unlock ground F85 7.

Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F7 25A Door control unit rear right F8 — Not used F9 25A Driver seat motor F10 25A Heated rear window F11 — Not used F12 15A Battery electronics control module F13 — Not used F14 10A Charger (C-MAX Energi) F15 — Not used F16 — Not used F17 10A Battery electronics control module F18 15A Battery electronics control module — fan F19 15A Charger fan (C-MAX Energi) F20 — Not used F21 15A Smart datalink connector F22 10A Active noise cancellation F23 — Not used F24 30A DC/AC power converter F25 25A Power liftgate F26 40A AC/DC charger (C-MAX Energi) F27 20A Luggage compartment outlet F28 — Not used F29 — Not used F30 5A Parking aid module F31 5A Rear view camera F32 5A DC/AC power converter F33 — Not used 206 C-MAX (CCG) .

207 C-MAX (CCG) . Blown Using a fuse with a higher amperage fuses are identified by a broken wire within rating can cause severe wire damage and the fuse. a fuse may have blown. not working. Fuses Fuse or relay number Fuse amp rating Protected components F34 20A Driver seat heater F35 20A Passenger seat heater F36 — Not used F37 20A Power sun shade F38 — Not used F39 — Not used F40 — Not used F41 — Not used F42 — Not used F43 — Not used F44 — Not used F45 5A Humidity sensor F46 10A Fuel system R1 Power relay Rear 15 relay R2 Mini relay Heated rear window R3 Micro relay Fuel door (C-MAX Energi) R4 — Not used R5 — Not used R6 Micro relay Rear wiper CHANGING A FUSE Fuses E142430 WARNING Always replace a fuse with one that If electrical components in the vehicle are has the specified amperage rating. Check the appropriate fuses could start a fire. before replacing any electrical components.

Natural Black Black 208 C-MAX (CCG) . . . - 7.5A Brown Brown . - 4A Pink Pink . Brown 80A . - 5A Tan Tan . Tan . - 10A Red Red . . - 3A Violet Violet . Natural Natural 30A Green Green Green Pink Pink 40A . . . . Orange Green Green 50A . Blue Yellow Yellow 70A . . . . . . . - 20A Yellow Yellow Yellow Blue Blue 25A Natural Natural . - 15A Blue Blue . Fuses Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color Color Fuse rating Mini fuses Standard Maxi fuses Cartridge Fuse link fuses maxi fuses cartridge 2A Grey Grey . Red Red Red 60A .

do not To help you service your vehicle. and/or personal burn injuries. Set the parking brake and shift to P If your vehicle requires professional service. lubricants. we start your engine with the air cleaner provide scheduled maintenance removed and do not remove it while the information which makes tracking routine engine is running. We believe that their specially trained technicians are best qualified to Working with the Engine On service your vehicle properly and expertly. E142457 unless you are sure you have enough ventilation. Turn off the engine and remove the key authorized dealers that are there to help (if equipped). OPENING AND CLOSING THE Use only recommended fuels. your authorized dealer can provide the 2. Motorcraft® parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle. parts. 209 C-MAX (CCG) . maintain its roadworthiness and resale value. you with their professional servicing 3. • Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts. Block the wheels necessary parts and service. Set the parking brake and shift to P Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help (Park). HOOD fluids and service parts conforming to specifications. 1. go inside the vehicle • Keep all open flames and other burning and pull the hood release handle material (such as cigarettes) away located under the left hand side of the from the battery and all fuel related instrument panel. Block the wheels. • Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space. They are supported by a wide range of WARNING highly specialized tools developed To reduce the risk of vehicle damage specifically for servicing your vehicle. (Park). expertise. Maintenance GENERAL INFORMATION Working with the Engine Off 1. Check your warranty information to find out which parts and services are covered. To open the hood. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 417). service easy. Precautions • Do not work on a hot engine. There is a large network of Ford 2. 1.

Raise the hood and support it with the easier identification. or tampered with. near the centimeters). left. toward the center of the vehicle. Go to the front of the vehicle and 5. which is located under the front of the 6. insulation is color coated orange. headlight. lower and secure locate the secondary release lever. Note: Make sure that the hood is closed 3. 210 C-MAX (CCG) . Release the hood latch by pushing the properly and fully latched on both sides of yellow secondary release lever to your the hood. UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2. E87786 Note: Do not attempt to service any of the high-voltage components or wiring. Maintenance 2. For 4.0L HYBRID WARNING The inverter system controller contains various high-voltage components that can cause serious bodily harm or death. To close the hood. Lower the hood and allow it to drop the hood. to your right of the center of the last 10-12 inches (25 to 30 vehicle (driver's side). the high-voltage wiring prop rod. the prop rod in the clip. The inverter system controller is not serviceable and should never be touched. probed.

See Washer Fluid Check (page 217). See Brake Fluid Check (page 217). I Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap. 211 C-MAX (CCG) . Maintenance A B C D E F G I H E162485 A Engine coolant reservoir cap. See Engine Oil Check (page 212). F Brake fluid reservoir cap. E Inverter system controller. See Engine Coolant Check (page 213). C Engine oil dipstick. B Engine oil filler cap. See Fuses (page 200). G Power distribution box. See Engine Oil Dipstick (page 212). H Inverter system controller coolant reservoir cap. See Changing the Engine Air Filter (page 229). D Engine air filter cover.

1. engine. See Capacities and 1. 212 C-MAX (CCG) . Oil levels above the MAX mark may 3. 3. For vehicles with push-button start. Keep both pedals fully pressed. press and hold Adding Engine Oil the start button for two seconds without pressing the brake pedal. Turn the ignition key to the on position. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with System a clean. Replace the filler cap. Turn the engine off and wait 10 minutes feel a strong resistance. cause engine damage. Remove the filler cap. Do Note: Do not remove the filler cap when not attempt to start the engine. add oil 1. the engine is running. Do not start the engine. Turn it until you 2. specifications. Resetting the Oil Life Monitoring 3. an oil change. If the level is at the MIN mark. ground. Press both the accelerator and brake Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX pedals at the same time. Make sure that your vehicle is on level Specifications (page 265). for the oil to drain into the oil pan. mark. Note: Make sure that the level is between 2.S. lint-free cloth. immediately. and Japanese automobile Note: Check the level before starting the manufacturers. 2. comprised of U. Add engine oil that meets the Ford the MIN and the MAX marks. Replace the dipstick and remove it again to check Note: Reset the oil life monitoring only after the oil level. Maintenance ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK A B E142732 Only use oils certified for gasoline engines E169062 by the American Petroleum Institute (API). An oil with this trademark symbol A MIN conforms to the current engine and B MAX emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricants Specification ENGINE OIL CHECK Advisory Council (ILSAC).

the Service: Oil reset (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C). or empty. equates to a freeze point between -30°F 5. Engine Coolant and Inverter Checking the Inverter System System Controller Coolant Controller Coolant Your vehicle is equipped with two separate When the engine is cold. controller cooling system generally Note: Make sure that the level is between operating at a lower temperature and the MIN and MAX marks on the inverter pressure. check the cooling systems. Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. Rotate the key to the off position. The Service: Oil reset complete Ford does not recommend the use of message will no longer be displayed. below the MIN mark. system controller coolant reservoir. See Adding Engine Coolant in this chapter. Note: If the level is at the MIN mark. which displayed. equates to a freeze point between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C). hydrometers or coolant test strips for 8. For measuring coolant concentrations. When the engine is cold. interchangeable. below coolant at the intervals listed in the the MIN mark. complete message will be displayed. Do not use engine coolant or antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle ENGINE COOLANT CHECK location. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark. Maintenance 4. the Service: Oil The coolant concentration should be reset in prog. See coolant immediately. One is for cooling the concentration and level of the inverter engine and one is for cooling the inverter system controller coolant at the intervals system controller that is specific to the listed in the scheduled maintenance hybrid operating system. After 25 seconds. See Adding Inverter Scheduled Maintenance (page 417). The two systems information. Note: Make sure that the level is between The coolant concentration should be the MIN and MAX marks on the engine maintained within 48% to 50%. 213 C-MAX (CCG) . check the concentration and level of the engine Note: If the level is at the MIN mark. add prediluted coolant immediately. 7. After three seconds. or empty. add prediluted scheduled maintenance information. refractometer such as Rotunda tool 300-ROB75240 available from your dealer. press the start button to turn the vehicle off Note: Automotive fluids are not completely. The level may extend beyond the MAX mark. Release both the accelerator and brake concentration should be tested with a pedals. Note: For best results. with the inverter system Maintenance (page 417). which coolant reservoir. See Scheduled operate similarly. message will be maintained within 48% to 50%. vehicles with push-button start. Checking the Engine Coolant Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. System Controller Coolant in this chapter. coolant 6.

measuring coolant concentrations. Maintenance Note: For best results. See Capacities and Specifications (page 265). Note: Automotive fluids are not interchangeable. clear and uncontaminated. Make sure the engine is hot. this color change Ford does not recommend the use of does not indicate the coolant has degraded hydrometers or coolant test strips for nor does it require the coolant to be drained. as soon as possible. MAX mark. The inverter system sealants. 214 C-MAX (CCG) . DO NOT use this method for the inverter system Note: Do not use stop leak pellets. Also. inverter system parts. The cooling system is under chemically cleaned with Motorcraft pressure. the concentration should be tested with a coolant may change color from orange to refractometer such as Rotunda tool pink or light red. controller. In this instance. Steam and scalding correct coolant is used. or additives as they can system controller cooling system cause damage to the cooling or heating operates close to ambient systems. the engine unscrewing the coolant pressure cooling system must be drained. freezing in any subfreezing environment in the absence of coolant. Water alone (without engine coolant) can cause Do not add coolant further than the engine damage from corrosion. If warranty. engine • In case of emergency. be added to the engine cooling system To reduce the risk of personal injury. As long as the coolant is 300-ROB75240 available from your dealer. overheating. only in order to reach a vehicle service make sure the engine is cool before location. sprayed on the windshield. coolant Note: During normal vehicle operation. This damage would not be covered temperature. Use of concentrated coolant and water may cause coolant passageway Adding Coolant plugging and void the warranty. WARNINGS • Do not mix different colors or types of Do not add engine coolant when the coolant in your vehicle. or the coolant to be replaced. a large amount coolant could make it difficult to see of water without engine coolant may through the windshield. and cooling system Do not put engine coolant in the components and may void the windshield washer fluid container. and is susceptible to under your vehicle’s warranty. Mixing of liquids released from a hot cooling coolants may harm your cooling system can burn you badly. you can system. or freezing. The use of an improper coolant be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine may harm the engine. cooling controller cooling system. Do not use engine coolant Note: It is very important to use prediluted or antifreeze or windshield washer fluid coolant meeting the Ford specification in outside of its specified function and vehicle order to avoid plugging the small coolant location. the system to be flushed. passageways. steam and hot liquid can come Premium Cooling System Flush. relief cap. and out forcefully when the cap is loosened refilled with prediluted engine coolant slightly.

times you drive the vehicle. methanol. protection of the engine coolant. brine or 3. protection. Follow your Make sure that the level is between the community’s regulations and standards MIN and MAX marks on the engine for recycling and disposing of automotive coolant reservoir. • Do not add extra inhibitors or additives add enough prediluted coolant to bring the to the coolant. If you drive in extremely cold climates: 3. add enough prediluted engine • A coolant concentration of 60% will coolant to bring the engine coolant level provide improved freeze point to the proper level. See Capacities and Specifications Severe Climates (page 265). check the authorized Ford dealer increase the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir coolant concentration above 50%. Use prediluted Engine coolant concentrations below coolant meeting the Ford specification. of in an appropriate manner. If necessary. Whenever you add coolant. check the Alcohol and other liquids can cause coolant level in the inverter system engine damage from overheating or controller coolant reservoir the next few freezing. coolant reservoir. 215 C-MAX (CCG) . Use prediluted engine fluids. coolant meeting the Ford specification. 2. 40% will decrease the corrosion/freeze See Capacities and Specifications protection characteristics of the engine (page 265). or methanol antifreeze (coolant). Close the inverter system controller any engine coolants mixed with alcohol coolant reservoir cap. If necessary. • It may be necessary to have an Whenever you add coolant. 1. Engine coolant concentrations above 60% will Adding Inverter System Controller decrease the overheat protection Coolant characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage. Unscrew the engine coolant reservoir the use of recycled engine coolant since a cap slowly. Recycled Engine Coolant Adding Engine Coolant Ford Motor Company does not recommend 1. • It may be necessary to have an 2. Maintenance • Do not use alcohol. the next few times you drive the vehicle. These can be harmful inverter system controller coolant level to and compromise the corrosion the proper level. coolant reservoir. Use a funnel to add prediluted engine Used engine coolant should be disposed coolant to the engine coolant reservoir. Make sure that the level is between the MIN and MAX • A coolant concentration of 40% will marks on the inverter system controller provide improved overheat protection. Open the inverter system controller If you drive in extremely hot climates: coolant reservoir cap. coolant and may cause engine damage. Close the engine coolant reservoir cap. available. Any pressure will escape Ford-approved recycling process is not yet as you unscrew the cap. Use a funnel to add prediluted coolant authorized Ford dealer decrease the to the inverter system controller coolant concentration to 40%.

216 C-MAX (CCG) . Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine. will not be able to this feature allows the vehicle to be driven maintain high-speed operation. engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down. Operate the vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long What You Should Know About Fail. Each disabled cylinder engine is capable of completely shutting acts as an air pump and cools the engine. to an authorized dealer as soon as possible to minimize engine damage. Take your vehicle vehicle to an authorized dealer. and may temporarily before incremental component completely shut down without warning. You have limited engine power when in the fail-safe mode. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to disabled. • The engine power will be limited. which may increase the possibility of a How Fail-Safe Cooling Works crash resulting in serious injury. Re-start the engine and take your engine can be re-started. have limited power. The “fail-safe” potentially losing engine power. an authorized dealer. so drive the vehicle with If the engine reaches a preset caution. Remember that the cylinder operation. emergencies only. power distance depends on ambient steering assist. the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage. if low. Check the coolant level and replenish and braking effort to increase. wait a short Continued operation will increase the period for the engine to cool. coolant temperature gauge will move to the red (hot) area and: The coolant temperature Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing warning light will illuminate. damage is incurred. When in fail-safe mode. Maintenance Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated climates should use prediluted coolant meeting the Ford specification for WARNINGS optimum cooling system and engine Fail-safe mode is for use during protection. the vehicle will If the engine coolant supply is depleted. therefore: When this occurs the vehicle will still operate. The vehicle will not be able to over-temperature condition. causing steering 4. However: 1. the 5. temperatures. and power brake assist. Once the engine temperature cools. 3. • The air conditioning system will be 2. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If this is not possible. down automatically to prevent engine damage. the engine maintain high-speed operation and the will automatically switch to alternating engine will run rough. Never remove the coolant reservoir If the engine begins to overheat. the engine cap while the engine is running or hot. as necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in Safe Cooling a safe location and seek immediate repairs. vehicle load and terrain. The service engine soon indicator will illuminate.

Regular maintenance or replacement could be compromised. change the transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 417). seek service from is not needed. Your Note: The front and rear washer systems transmission does not consume fluid. there is no need to add fluid. There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill. the fluid level should be checked: Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is • if the transmission is not working low. washer fluid with antifreeze The automatic transmission does not have protection. POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK Your vehicle is equipped with an electric power steering (EPS) system. wiper blades or BRAKE FLUID CHECK washer system. cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish. treatments or cleaning of methanol. However. • if you notice some sign of fluid leakage. State or local regulations on volatile Do not use supplemental transmission organic compounds may restrict the use fluid additives. your authorized dealer immediately. Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX FUEL FILTER lines are within the normal operating range. Washer fluids affect transmission operation and result containing non-methanol antifreeze in damage to internal transmission agents should be used only if they provide components. the performance of the system tank. Only use a washer fluid that meets properly. If the fluid Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime levels are outside of the normal operating fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel range. The use of these materials may antifreeze additive. use should be added by an authorized dealer. a common windshield washer agents. antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and Have an authorized dealer check and increase the risk of injury or accident. Failure to use washer fluid with a transmission fluid dipstick. See Capacities and Specifications (page 265). fluid temperatures below 40°F (5°C). 217 C-MAX (CCG) . Ford specifications. If required. Maintenance AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION WASHER FLUID CHECK FLUID CHECK WARNING Note: Transmission fluid should be checked If you operate your vehicle in by an authorized dealer. are supplied from the same reservoir.

which normally does not require additional the battery should only be replaced with water during its life of service. has been cleaned or replaced. Lift the Note: If a person adds electrical or battery with a battery carrier or with your electronic accessories or components to the hands on opposite corners. Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery When a battery replacement is required. do not allow flames. like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy. that matches the electrical requirements make sure it is reinstalled after the battery of the vehicle. Some engine computer settings. 15 minutes and get prompt medical If you see any corrosion on the battery or attention. vehicle. If acid is swallowed. contact with skin or eyes. call a terminals. do not allow the battery. resulting in personal injury and damage to the vehicle or battery. maintained by power from the low voltage battery. flush make certain the battery cables are always immediately with water for a minimum of tightly fastened to the battery terminals. Batteries contain sulfuric affect the performance of other electrical acid. like the clock and radio station 218 C-MAX (CCG) . Therefore. Maintenance CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY When a low voltage battery replacement is necessary. When working near management system (BMS). negative post can cause inaccurate excessive pressure on the end walls measurements of the battery condition could cause acid to flow through the and potential incorrect system operation. or some engine control settings are replacement. remove the cables from the physician immediately. eyes or systems in the vehicle. Avoid contact with skin. You can neutralize the acid with a solution of Your vehicle is equipped with a baking soda and water. clothing. voltage battery access. sparks or lighted substances to To ensure proper operation of the battery come near the battery. a Ford recommended replacement battery Note: If your battery has a cover/shield. vent caps. Some other computer settings. terminals and clean with a wire brush. see an authorized dealer to WARNINGS replace the low voltage battery with a Ford recommended replacement low voltage Batteries normally produce explosive battery that matches the electrical gases which can cause personal requirements of the vehicle injury. Because your vehicle’s engine is Note: See an authorized dealer for low electronically-controlled by a computer. low voltage battery negative post. A connection at the low voltage battery When lifting a plastic-cased battery. trouble-free operation. keep the splashing of acid solution. In case of acid top of the battery clean and dry. always shield your face and a technician to connect any electrical protect your eyes. optimize the driveability and performance of the engine. Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible For longer. testing. Also. Always provide proper device ground connection directly to the ventilation. the accessories or components may adversely affect the low voltage battery Keep batteries out of reach of performance and durability and may also children.

See Audio System (page 272). 1. Note: It is recommended that the negative set the parking brake. or water applied with a soft sponge or cloth. then switch off the front wipers to bring the front wipers back to the park position. With the vehicle at a complete stop. Follow a technician disconnects and connects the your local authorized standards for disposal. step on Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of the accelerator to start the engine. CHECKING THE WIPER 5. If the engine turns off. CHANGING THE WIPER 9. battery cable terminal be disconnected from 2. Step on the brake pedal and start the vehicle. idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely The front wipers will not return to their affected until the engine computer normal position as soon as you switch on the ignition. step on the brake pedal and shift the transmission Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid to N. The front wipers will stay in the eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel service position when you switch the ignition trim strategy. While the engine is warming up. the blade to check for roughness. Maintenance presets. Run the engine until it reaches normal BLADES operating temperature. 4. Allow the engine to run for at least one minute by pressing on the accelerator pedal. Complete the following procedure to find out more about recycling automotive in order to restore the settings: batteries. Note: Use the service position in winter to Note: If you do not allow the engine to provide easier access to the front wiper relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. 8. When batteries in a responsible manner. Reset the radio station presets. on or start the engine. 7. complete the following: Reset the clock. low voltage battery. Shift the transmission into P. the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time. these settings are Call your local authorized recycling center erased. See Windows and Mirrors (page 76). 3. See Audio System (page 272). Switch on the front wipers to any mode. 6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one E142463 minute. 219 C-MAX (CCG) . Turn off all accessories. are also maintained in memory by Note: Always dispose of automotive power from the low voltage battery. While the engine is running. Drive the vehicle at least 10 miles (16 BLADES kilometers) to completely relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy. the blades for freeing them from snow and ice. Reset the power windows bounce-back feature.

Press the locking buttons together. E162733 4. Changing the Rear Window Wiper Blade 1. Hold the lever in until wipers have moved to the service position. Switch off the ignition and within three Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks seconds. Pull the wiper blade and arm away Service Position from the glass. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. 3. Rotate and remove the wiper blade. If you install wiper blades of the wrong length. 3. Note: Replace wiper blades at least once E162532 per year for optimum performance. the rain sensor may not work correctly. Lower the wiper arm and blade back to the windshield. 4. Lift the wiper arm. the wipers may not work correctly. 1 2. 1. Maintenance Note: The windshield wiper blades are different in length. 1 E129990 2 2. Install in the reverse order. 220 C-MAX (CCG) . Make sure that the outside of the windshield is free from snow and ice. Switch on the ignition. The wiper arms will automatically return to their normal position when the ignition is turned on. pull the wiper lever to toward into place. by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield Changing the Front Wiper Blades Setting the Front Wipers in the 1. If equipped with autowipers. Release the lever when the wipers have Note: Poor wiper quality can be improved moved to the service position. you.

4 meter) horizontal properly aimed at the assembly plant. Turn on the low beam headlamps to checked by your authorized dealer. Measure the height of the headlamp Vertical Aim Adjustment bulb center from the ground and mark The headlamps on your vehicle are an 8 foot (2. If reference line on the vertical wall or your vehicle has been in an accident. wall or screen on a level surface. Remove the wiper blade. Park the vehicle directly in front of a 4. Maintenance 3 E142592 A 8 feet (2. 221 C-MAX (CCG) .6 meters) wiper arm D Horizontal reference line 3. Slightly rotate the wiper blade from the C 25 feet (7. alignment of your headlamps should be 3. Disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm. approximately 25 feet (7. 1. Install in the reverse order. 5. the screen at this height. Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks into place. Note: To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting.4 meters) E130060 2 B Center height of lamp to ground 2. illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood.6 meters) away. you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS other. 2.

Maintenance REMOVING A HEADLAMP 2 2 E142465 4. Carefully lift the outer side of the headlamp and remove it. Horizontal Aim Adjustment The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation. Disconnect the electrical connector. when the temperature is cold. there is edge of the brighter light should touch a possibility that condensation can occur the horizontal reference line. Locate the vertical adjuster on each Exterior lamps are vented to headlamp. the 2. 3. The horizontal lamp assembly through the vents. turn the adjuster either Condensation can be a natural by-product clockwise or counterclockwise in order of this design. Close the hood and turn off the lamps. headlamp assembly. Make sure the headlamp control is in portion of the beam pattern. edge of the high intensity light zone is not at the horizontal reference line. Horizontal aim is not required for this Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours vehicle and is non-adjustable. On the wall or screen you will observe a flat zone of high intensity light E142468 located at the top of the right hand 1. Remove the two screws from the headlamp will need to be adjusted. Using a Phillips #2 accommodate normal changes in pressure. CHANGING A BULB E142467 Lamp Assembly Condensation 5. 4. When moist air enters the to aim the headlamp. When 6. 5. a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens. If the top the off position and open the hood. Carefully pull the headlamp assembly as far as possible towards the front of the vehicle to disengage it from the lower fixing point. normal condensation occurs. under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are: 222 C-MAX (CCG) . screwdriver.

• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the lens. Disconnect the electrical connector. drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens. then pull it straight out. Note: If the bulb is accidentally touched. E162550 1. Maintenance • Presence of thin mist (no streaks. Take your vehicle to a dealer for service if E162549 any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present. The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated. Examples of unacceptable moisture (usually caused by a lamp water leak) are: • Water puddle inside the lamp. A Turn lamp Replacing Headlamp Bulbs B Low beam headlamp C High beam headlamp WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb Replacing the High Beam Headlamp carefully and keep out of children’s Bulb: reach. drip Locating the headlamp bulbs: marks or droplets). Grasp the bulb by only its plastic base and do not touch the glass. it should be cleaned with rubbing alcohol before being used. • Large water droplets. 4. Replacing the Low Beam Headlamp Bulb: 223 C-MAX (CCG) . Remove bulb from the headlamp assembly by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Remove the headlamp assembly. Remove service cap. 2.

Remove bulb from the headlamp 4 assembly. Remove bulb from the headlamp bulb from the bulb holder. Maintenance Replacing Fog. then pull it straight 2. Remove the lamp. Note: You cannot separate the fog lamp 4. Install the new bulbs in reverse order. 2. Remove service cap. Remove the 2 screws. 2. 4. Replacing Side Marker Bulbs: 5 E162552 1. Remove the headlamp assembly. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove service cap. Remove the bulb holder. Remove the fog lamp cover counterclockwise. E162553 3. E162554 4. assembly by turning it 1. 3. Remove the headlamp assembly. Park and Turn Signal Bulbs E162551 1. 3. Install the new bulb in reverse order. Disconnect the electrical connector 224 C-MAX (CCG) . out.

Make sure the headlamp control is in 1. Remove the bulb from the bulb holder from the vehicle. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise Replacing Tail. E162555 E162553 1. by pulling it straight out. Disconnect the electrical connector counterclockwise. 5. Signal Bulbs 6. E142799 E162556 2. 3. shield at the wheel well to gain access 2. 225 C-MAX (CCG) . Remove the bulb holder from the lamp assembly by turning it 4. Remove the screws from the splash the off position. to the lamp assembly. 3. 6. Gently pull the lamp assembly away 4. Install the new bulb in reverse order. Remove the wing nut. Disconnect the electrical connector. Remove the trim panel cover. Open the liftgate. Brake and Turn and remove it. Install the new bulbs in reverse order from the steps above. Maintenance 5.

Remove the wing nut. A. 8. and remove the bulb. Replacing Reverse Lamp and Tail Lamp Bulbs: E162560 6. Taillamp and brake lamp. Disconnect the electrical connector 7. 4. 2. Gently pull the lamp assembly away holder. 1. 8. Remove the trim panel cover. 9. Turn lamp. Make sure the lighting control is in the off position. Open the liftgate 3. Gently press the bulb into the bulb 5. B. counterclockwise and remove the bulb. A. E162558 B. Tail lamp. Install the new bulb in reverse order. Reverse lamp. 226 C-MAX (CCG) . Remove the bulb holder. Install the new bulb in reverse order. Gently press the bulb into the bulb holder. turn the bulb counterclockwise. Maintenance E162557 E162559 7. then turn the bulb from the vehicle. Remove the bulb holder.

Carefully release the spring clip. Carefully pull the lamp towards the 2. 6. Remove the bulb. Replacing the Center High Mounted Brake Lamp Bulbs E162564 5. Open the liftgate. Maintenance Replacing License Plate Lamp Bulb 2 3 1 E162563 E72789 3. Insert a suitable tool into the holes. Remove the lamp. Reverse steps to reinstall bulb. Remove the bulb. Detach the clips above the inboard side BULB SPECIFICATION CHART of the rear window.” for North America to ensure lamp performance. Remove the bulb holder. light brightness and pattern and safe visibility. E162562 7. Gently pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle.O.T. the spring clips. 227 C-MAX (CCG) . Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized “D. 1. 1. front of the vehicle in order to release 3. Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart below. 2. 4. The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time.

front 194 Turn lamp .see your authorized dealer.rear T20 Backup lamp 921 License plate lamp W5W * High-mount brake lamp W5W * Interior lamps LED * To replace these lamps .see your authorized dealer 228 C-MAX (CCG) . Maintenance Function Trade number Headlamps high beam (Halogen) 9005LL Headlamp low beam (Halogen) H11LL Sidemarker .front 168 Park lamp . To replace all instrument panel lights .front W21W Fog lamps H10 (9145) Tail/brake lamp 3157K Turn lamp .

Note: Change the air filter element at the proper interval. Identifying Air Filter Element Components A B C D E E162533 229 C-MAX (CCG) . use only the air filter element listed. Therefore we start your engine with the air cleaner recommend that the air filter be serviced at removed and do not remove it while the a Ford dealer. engine is running. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used. Note: Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. Maintenance CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR Note: Failure to re-install the air cleaner assembly properly by fully seating on the FILTER mounting studs in (5) places and securing with the (2) bolts may result in air cleaner WARNING assembly dislodgement from engine and To reduce the risk of vehicle damage damage to the air cleaner assembly and and/or personal burn injuries do not other engine components. Note: When changing the air filter element. See Capacities and Specifications (page 265).

Remove the bolts from each side of the air cleaner assembly (A) as shown with arrows 230 C-MAX (CCG) . Loosen the hose clamps for air cleaner outlet tube ©). Air cleaner cover C. then rotate and pull it towards the front of the vehicle. 6. Air cleaner intake tube Removing the Engine Air Filter Element E162536 5. Air cleaner assembly B. Disconnect the tube from the air cleaner assembly (A). Maintenance A. Lift the air cleaner assembly (A) from the mounting studs. 3. 2. Release the tabs and disconnect the E162537 PCV tube (D) from the air cleaner outlet tube ©) and remove the tube. Loosen the 5 bolts from the air cleaner cover (B). 7. Remove the air cleaner cover (B) from the air cleaner assembly (A). Disconnect the air cleaner intake tube (E) from the air cleaner assembly (A). Air cleaner outlet tube D. Installing the Engine Air Filter Element Note: Clean the inside of the air filter assembly before installing a new air filter E162535 4. E162534 1. Positive crankcase ventilation (PCV) tube E.

Install and tighten the bolts to each side of the air cleaner assembly (A) as shown with arrows. Install the air cleaner cover (B) and tighten the 5 bolts. Position the air cleaner assembly (A) onto the engine and make sure the assembly is aligned with the studs. E162540 231 C-MAX (CCG) . Connect the air cleaner intake tube (E) to the air cleaner assembly (A). 5. E162539 3. Connect the PCV tube (D) to the air cleaner outlet tube ©). E162538 1. Install the new engine air filter into the engine air cleaner assembly. Maintenance 4. 7. Install and tighten the bolts to each side of the air cleaner assembly (A) as shown with arrows. 6. E162541 2.

peel away from the vehicle surface. such as dish washing or laundry liquid. metal cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel covers 232 C-MAX (CCG) . Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24) • Immediately remove items such as gasoline. or products of equivalent quality: • Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42) touch” or during exposure to strong. if these Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield substances come in contact with your Washer Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A. vehicle. • Never use strong household detergents CLEANING PRODUCTS or soap. B. bird droppings and Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and insect deposits because they can cause Degreaser (U. (ZC-37-A) Note: Do not use chrome cleaner. direct sunlight. wash off as soon as possible. D or F)] Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash Stripes or Graphics (if equipped) Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. before entering a car wash.S. only) (ZC-20) damage to your vehicle’s paintwork Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada and trim over time. Use Motorcraft Bug only) (CXC-66-A) and Tar Remover. only) (ZC-14) Exterior Chrome Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner (ZC-23) Note: Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner scratch the chrome surface. shampoo. such as Motorcraft Detail Wash. such only) (CXC-101) as antennas. only) (ZC-32-B1) Do not use a commercial or high-pressure sprayer on the surface or edge of stripes Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet and graphics. These products can For best results. Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner (Canada only) (CXC-100) Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface.S. use the following products discolor and spot painted surfaces. This can cause damage to & Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54) the film and cause the edge of the film to Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U. Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada • Remove any exterior accessories. diesel fuel. Vehicle Care GENERAL INFORMATION CLEANING THE EXTERIOR Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or many quality products available to clean lukewarm water and a neutral pH your vehicle and protect its finishes. Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner (ZC-15) • Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A) water spotting.

your car's paint should vehicle frequently. Underbody • Do not apply wax to glass areas. cleaners can result in severe and • Mirror housings. • Do not apply cleaning product to hot • Roof racks. 233 C-MAX (CCG) . applying wax. dry rag. The wax will discolor or stain the parts over time. smudges. shampoo. Detail Wash. • Grained door handles. • Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine. • Never wash or rinse the engine while it is hot or running. • Windshield cowl area. would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts. Keep body and door feel smooth. use Motorcraft Engine sunlight. Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts CLEANING THE ENGINE Use only approved products to clean plastic parts Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep • For routine cleaning. and be free of streaks and drain holes free from packed dirt. In vehicle in a shaded area out of direct Canada. The high-pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts WAXING and cause damage. Flush the complete underside of your • After waxing. then wipe off with any non-body (low-gloss black) the haze with a clean. such as Motorcraft Detail • Follow the manufacturer’s instructions Wash. • If tar or grease spots are present. not in circles. colored trim. to apply and remove the wax. We water to avoid cracking the engine recommend that you wash and wax the block or other engine components. Vehicle Care • Wash your vehicle first. • Using other non-recommended • Side moldings. water in the running engine may cause internal damage. allow the cleaner • Do not allow wax to come in contact to dry for a few minutes. Regular waxing is necessary to protect your • Do not spray a hot engine with cold car's paint from the elements. • Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser on all parts that require When washing and waxing. • Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal • Apply a small amount of wax in a Cleaner. using cool or • Use a quality wax that does not contain lukewarm water and a neutral pH abrasives. Always wash your vehicle before Shampoo. use When washing: Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. use Motorcraft the engine warmer than normal. park your cleaning and pressure rinse clean. than the time recommended. surfaces and do not leave cleaning product on chrome surfaces longer • Bumpers. permanent cosmetic damage. Apply the product as you back-and-forth motion. painted surface once or twice a year.

Vehicle Care • Never wash or rinse any ignition coil. chemicals. In • Clean the windshield with a Canada. cloth seats. Such products could water damage when cleaning the contaminate the side airbag system and engine. power distribution chemical solvents or strong box. wax or bugs. • Do not use household cleaning • Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl products or glass cleaners. seat-mounted airbags. Cleaner. CLUSTER LENS WARNING CLEANING THE INTERIOR Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the WARNINGS steering wheel or instrument panel Do not use cleaning solvents. Note: Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean or remove decals from the inside of the heated rear window. do not use • Cover the battery. CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT The vehicle warranty does not cover PANEL AND INSTRUMENT damage caused to the heated rear window grid lines. safety belts WIPER BLADES and seats equipped with side airbags: Car wash chemicals and environmental • Remove dust and loose dirt with a fallout can result in windshield and wiper vacuum cleaner. Dirty windshield and • Remove light stains and soil with wipers will result in poor windshield wiper Motorcraft Professional Strength operation. blades clean to maintain windshield wiper performance. CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND For fabric. blade contamination. Keep the windshield and wiper Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner. the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials. affect performance of the side airbag in a collision. spot-clean the area first with To clean the windshield and wiper blades: Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. • For windshields contaminated with • If a ring forms on the fabric after spot tree sap. and air filter assembly to prevent detergents. 234 C-MAX (CCG) . system. circular motion and rinse with water. as these actions may weaken the belt webbing. WARNINGS spark plug wire or spark plug well. use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose non-abrasive glass cleaner. clean the entire area the entire windshield using steel wool immediately (but do not oversaturate) (no greater than 0000 grade) in a or the ring will set. bleach to avoid contamination of the airbag or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts. clean cleaning. which can rubbing alcohol or windshield washer stain and discolor the fabric and affect fluid. • If grease or tar is present on the material. or On vehicles equipped with the area in and around these locations. carpets.

cotton cloth and press • solvents or cleaners intended the cloth onto the soiled area. damp cloth. white cotton soiled badly. If necessary. If a spill occurs. apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to • alcohol solutions a clean. Dry the area with a soft cloth. Allow specifically for rubber. Following this. If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method. Do not use the following products as these the area may be cleaned using a may damage the leather: commercially available cleaning • oil/petroleum-based leather product designed for automotive conditioners interiors. minutes. damp. wipe the surface with repellent and suntan lotion in order to a soft. • Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the If you cannot completely clean the leather instrument panel. inconspicuous part of the leather. • Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase 5. vinyl and this to set at room temperature for 30 plastics. If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has You should: been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces. • household cleaners 3. use this cloth to clean the cloth. Note: To check for compatibility. wipe area dry with a the gloss of the upper portion of the clean. you cluster lens. white. For more thorough avoid possible damage to the interior cleaning. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean. clean. then use a clean and dry white area by using a rubbing motion for 60 cotton cloth to dry these areas. 235 C-MAX (CCG) . CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF • Be certain to wash or wipe your hands EQUIPPED) clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect For routine cleaning. can try a commercially available leather • Do not allow air fresheners and hand cleaning product designed for automotive sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces. • clean spills and stains as quickly as white. cotton cloth. cotton cloth. Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not lens with a clean. first test Damage may not be covered by your any cleaner or stain remover on an warranty. white. and water solution. The dull finish in this area helps protect you from undesirable windshield reflection. interior trim and using a mild soap and water solution. clean as follows: • remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner 1. interiors. Vehicle Care Clean the instrument panel and cluster 4. solution. instrument panel. seconds. use a mild soap and water inconspicuous part of the leather. wipe off immediately. Wipe the surface with a damp. possible 2. For more thorough any cleaner or stain remover on an cleaning. wipe the surface with a mild soap painted surfaces. • check for compatibility by first testing white cotton cloth.

To maintain remove dirt. Note: If you intend parking your vehicle for • Protect from sunlight. WHEELS (IF EQUIPPED) read the following maintenance recommendations to make sure your Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical to vehicle stays in good operating condition. oil. DAMAGE Apply using manufacturer's instructions. Long term storage under rims and covers. cause damage to the finish on your wheel regular driving. 236 C-MAX (CCG) . General Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based or high caustic-based wheel cleaners. tar cleaning process. • Periodically wash your vehicle stored in exposed locations. road salt and industrial fallout • To remove tar and grease. • Always read the instructions before using the products. if possible. fuels or strong household detergents. Take your • Use a sponge to remove heavy color code (printed on a sticker in the deposits of dirt and brake dust driver’s door jamb) to your authorized accumulation. against rust and damage. • Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream • Remove particles such as bird of water when you have completed the droppings. an extended period after cleaning the • If vehicles are stored outside. various conditions may lead to component Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty degradation or failure unless specific cleaners in combination with brush agitation precautions are taken to preserve the to remove brake dust and dirt. warm or hot wheel rims and covers. tree sap. steel • Store all vehicles in a dry. dealer to ensure you get the correct color. grease. rear-wheel housing and underside of front fenders. All motor vehicles and their components Note: Some automatic car washes may were engineered and tested for reliable. away the clear coat finish over a period time. tar or mud from their condition we recommend that you: exterior surfaces. Vehicle Care REPAIRING MINOR PAINT • Clean the wheels weekly using Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner. Body Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated • Wash your vehicle thoroughly to with a clear coat paint finish. Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover. ventilated wool. VEHICLE STORAGE CLEANING THE ALLOY If you plan on storing your vehicle for an extended period of time (30 days or more). place. insect deposits. This will reduce the risk of increased corrosion of the brake discs. Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint to match your vehicle’s color. could wear components. drive your require regular maintenance to protect vehicle for a few minutes before doing so. spots. they wheels with a wheel cleaner. use before repairing paint chips.

• Check and recharge as necessary. Note: If battery cables are disconnected. • The engine oil and filter should be changed prior to storage. it will be necessary to reset memory features. When your vehicle is ready to come out of storage. as used Tires engine oil contain contaminates that may cause engine damage. • Check windshield wipers for any Confirm there are no cooling system deterioration. leaks. • Check tire pressures and set tire inflation per the Tire Label. Brakes Engine • Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully released. it may be advisable to disconnect the • Lubricate all hood. • Check the exhaust for any foreign material that may have collected during storage. • Maintain recommended air pressure. Re-wax as necessary • If storing your vehicle for more than 30 when your vehicle is washed. check coolant fluid level. and fluid is at the recommended • Check under the hood for any foreign level. 237 C-MAX (CCG) . • Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel Removing Vehicle From Storage until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel pump nozzle. and latches with a light grade is maintained for quick starting. • Keep all rubber parts free from oil and solvents. or grease film build-up on window surfaces. door and trunk lid battery cables to ensure battery charge hinges. cables. with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent discoloration. material that may have collected during storage (mice/squirrel nests). Keep • Cover chrome and stainless steel parts connections clean. • Cover interior trim to prevent fading. Vehicle Care • Touch-up exposed or primed metal to Battery prevent rust. shift and pins under your vehicle are covered through all the gears while the engine with grease to prevent rust. • Start the engine every 15 days. • Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 meters) every 15 days to lubricate Fuel system working parts and prevent corrosion. is running. oil. • When removing your vehicle from storage. levers • With your foot on the brake. Run at Miscellaneous fast idle until it reaches normal operating temperature • Make sure all linkages. do the following: Cooling system • Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt • Protect against freezing temperatures. days without recharging the battery.

clean the battery cable ends and inspect. oil and gas) to make sure there are no leaks. Vehicle Care • Check brake pedal operation. • Check fluid levels (including coolant. 238 C-MAX (CCG) . Drive your vehicle 15 feet (4. Contact your authorized dealer if you have any concerns or issues.5 meters) back and forth to remove rust build-up. and fluids are at recommended levels. • If the battery was removed.

Wheels and Tires

TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT
Note: You should use the temporary
mobility kit sealant compound in the
canister for one tire only. See your Ford
authorized dealer for additional
replacement sealant canisters.

E144618

A Air compressor (inside)
B Diverter knob
C On and off button
D Air pressure gauge
E164703
E Sealant bottle and canister
The kit is located under the front-row F Sealant filling clear tube
passenger seat. Loosen the Velcro strap
G Sealant tube - tire valve
to access the kit.
connector
The kit consists of an air compressor to H Yellow cap tool
reinflate the tire and a sealing compound
in a canister that will effectively seal most I Air compressor hose
punctures caused by nails or similar J Air hose-tire valve connector
objects. This kit will provide a temporary
seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up K Accessory power plug
to 120 miles (200 kilometers) at a L Casing and housing
maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).

239

C-MAX (CCG)

Wheels and Tires

General Information • Before operating the kit, make sure
your vehicle is safely off the road and
WARNING away from moving traffic. Turn on the
Failure to follow these guidelines hazard lights.
could result in an increased risk of • Always set the parking brake to make
loss of vehicle control, injury or death. sure the vehicle does not move
unexpectedly.
Note: Do not use the kit to repair a severely • Do not remove any foreign objects,
damaged tire, damaged from driving the such as nails or screws, from the tire.
vehicle with a tire that has insufficient air • When using the kit, leave the engine
pressure. You can only use the kit to seal running (only if the vehicle is outdoors
punctured areas located within the tire or in a well-ventilated area) so the
tread. compressor does not drain the
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger vehicle's battery.
than 1.4 inch (6.4 millimeters) or damage • Do not allow the compressor to
to the tire's sidewall. The tire may not operate continuously for more than 15
completely seal. minutes; this will help prevent the
Loss of air pressure may adversely affect compressor from overheating.
tire performance. For this reason: • Never leave the kit unattended when
it is operating.
Note: Do not drive the vehicle above 50
mph (80 km/h). • Sealant compound contains latex.
Make sure that you use the non-latex
Note: Do not drive further than 120 miles gloves provided to avoid an allergic
(200 kilometers). Drive only to the closest reaction.
Ford Motor Company authorized dealer or
tire repair shop to have your tire inspected. • Keep the kit away from children.
• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt • Only use the kit when the ambient
steering maneuvers. temperature is between -22°F (–30°C)
and 158°F (70°C).
• Periodically monitor tire inflation
pressure in the affected tire; if the tire • Only use the sealing compound before
is losing pressure, have the vehicle the use by date. The use by date is on
towed. the lower right hand corner of the label
located on the sealant canister
• Read the information in the Tips for (bottle). Check the use by date
Use of the Kit section to make sure of regularly and replace the canister after
safe operation of the kit and your four years.
vehicle.
• Do not store the kit unsecured inside
Tips for Use of the Kit the passenger compartment of the
vehicle as it may cause injury during a
Read the following list of tips to make sure sudden stop or crash. Always store the
of safe operation of the kit: kit in its original location.
• After sealant use, you must replace the
tire pressure monitoring system sensor
and valve stem on the wheel by an
authorized Ford dealer.

240

C-MAX (CCG)

Wheels and Tires

• When inflating a tire or other objects, Do not remove any foreign object that has
use the black air hose only. Do not use pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in
the transparent hose, which is designed the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside
for sealant application only. assistance.
• Operating the kit could cause an 1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
electrical disturbance in radio, CD, and valve.
DVD player operation.
2. Unwrap the clear tube from the
What to Do When a Tire Is compressor housing.
Punctured 3. Remove the tube cap and fasten the
metal connector of the tube to the tire
Repair a tire puncture within the tread area valve, turning clockwise. Make sure you
of the tire in two stages with the kit. fasten the connection tightly.
• In the first stage, you will re-inflate the
tire with a sealing compound and air.
After the tire has been re-inflated, drive
the vehicle a short distance (about 4
miles [6 kilometers]) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
• In the second stage, check the tire
pressure and adjust, if necessary, to the
vehicle's tire inflation pressure.

First Stage: Reinflating the Tire
with Sealing Compound and Air E144619

WARNINGS 4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt
power point in the vehicle.
Do not stand directly over the kit
while inflating the tire. If you notice 5. Remove the warning sticker found on
any unusual bulges or deformations the canister, and place it on the top of
in the tire's sidewall during inflation, stop the instrument panel or the center of
and call roadside assistance. the dash.
If the tire does not inflate to the 6. Start the vehicle only if the vehicle is
recommended tire pressure within outdoors or in a well-ventilated area.
15 minutes, stop and call roadside
assistance.

Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, level
and secure area, away from moving traffic.
Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking
brake and turn the engine off. Inspect the
flat tire for visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. To
avoid any allergic reactions, use the
non-latex gloves located in the accessory E144924
box on the underside of the kit housing.

241

C-MAX (CCG)

Wheels and Tires

7. Push and turn dial (A) Note: If you experience any unusual
counterclockwise to the sealant vibration, ride disturbance or noise while
position. Turn on the kit by pressing the driving, reduce your speed until you can
on and off button (B). safely pull off to the side of the road to call
for roadside assistance.
Note: Do not proceed to the second stage
of this operation.

Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure
WARNINGS
If you are proceeding from the First
stage: Re–inflating the tire with
sealing compound and air section
E144621 and have injected sealant in the tire and
the pressure is below 20 psi (1.4 bar), stop
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on and call roadside assistance. If tire
the tire label located on the driver's pressure is above 20 psi (1.4 bar), continue
door or the door jamb area. When you to the next step.
first add the sealing compound into the
tire, the air pressure gauge reading on The power plug may get hot after use
the compressor unit may indicate a and you should handle it carefully
higher value; this is normal and should while unplugging.
be no reason for concern. The pressure
will drop after about 30 seconds of Check the air pressure of your tires as
operation. You have to check the tire follows:
pressure with the compressor in the
OFF position to get the correct tire 1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
pressure reading. valve.
9. When you reach the recommended tire 2. Unhook the black hose from the side
pressure, turn off the kit by pressing the of the compressor and fasten firmly on
on button; disconnect the kit from the the valve stem by turning clockwise.
tire valve and the power point. 3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the
Re-install the valve cap on the tire air position. Turn on the kit by pressing
valve, place the tube cap on the metal the on button.
connector, and return the kit to the
stowage area
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the
vehicle 4 miles (6 kilometers) to
distribute the sealant evenly inside
the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80
km/h).
11. After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop and
check the tire pressure. See Second
stage: Checking tire pressure.

242

C-MAX (CCG)

Wheels and Tires

Note: After you use the sealant, an
authorized Ford dealer must replace the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor and the
valve stem on the wheel.
Check the tire pressure any time within the
120 miles (200 kilometers) by performing
the procedure from Second stage:
Checking tire pressure listed previously.

Removal of the Sealant Canister from
the Kit
E144622

4. Adjust the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure from the tire label
located on the driver's door or door
jamb area. You have to check the tire
pressure with the compressor in the
OFF position to get the correct tire
pressure reading.
5. Turn the compressor off by pressing
the off button.
6. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve
E144623
cap on the tire and return the kit to the
stowage area. 1. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.
What to Do after the Tire has Been
Sealed
After using the kit to seal your tire, replace
the sealant canister and clear tube (hose).
Obtain and replace the sealing compound
and spare parts at an authorized Ford
Motor Company dealership or tire dealer.
You can dispose empty sealant bottles at
home. However, liquid residue from the E144624
sealing compound should be disposed by
2. Locate the yellow cap at the end of the
your local Ford Motor Company dealership
clear tube.
or tire dealer, or in accordance with local
waste disposal regulations.
Note: After you use the sealing compound,
the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph (80
km/h) and the maximum driving distance
is 120 miles (200 kilometers). Inspect the
sealed tire immediately.

243

C-MAX (CCG)

Wheels and Tires

2. Once aligned, seat the sealant canister
by lightly pushing down until you hear
an audible click.

E144625

3. Using the yellow cap tool, press the tab
located on the kit compressor housing
while pulling up on the sealant canister. E144628

3. Wrap the clear tube around the
Installation of the Sealant Canister to
compressor housing.
the Kit
Note: If you experience any difficulties with
the removal or installation of the sealant
canister, consult your Ford Motor Company
authorized dealer for assistance.

E144626
E144629

1. Align the sealant canister with the kit Be sure to check the sealant compound's
housing. use by date regularly. The use by date is
on the lower right hand corner of the label
located on the sealant canister (bottle).
You should replace the sealant canister
after four years.

E161567

244

C-MAX (CCG)

Wheels and Tires

TIRE CARE U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
Information About Uniform grades: The U.S. Department of
Tire Quality Grading Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
E142542 specified government test course.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new For example, a tire graded 150
pneumatic passenger car tires. would wear 1 ½ times as well on
The Tire Quality Grades can be the government course as a tire
found where applicable on the tire graded 100. The relative
sidewall between tread shoulder performance of tires depends
and maximum section width. For upon the actual conditions of their
example: Treadwear 200 use, however, and may depart
Traction AA Temperature A. significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
These Tire Quality Grades are practices, and differences in road
determined by standards that the characteristics and climate.
United States Department of
Transportation has set. Traction AA A B C
Tire Quality Grades apply to new WARNING
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread, The traction grade assigned
winter-type snow tires, to this tire is based on
space-saver or temporary use straight-ahead braking traction
spare tires, light truck or LT type tests, and does not include
tires, tires with nominal rim acceleration, cornering,
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or hydroplaning or peak traction
limited production tires as defined characteristics.
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).

245

C-MAX (CCG)

Wheels and Tires

The traction grades, from highest Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
grades represent the tire’s ability represent higher levels of
to stop on wet pavement as performance on the laboratory
measured under controlled test wheel than the minimum
conditions on specified required by law.
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire Glossary of Tire Terminology
marked C may have poor traction *Tire label: A label showing the
performance. original equipment tire sizes,
Temperature A B C recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
WARNING vehicle can carry.
The temperature grade for *Tire Identification Number
this tire is established for a (TIN): A number on the sidewall
tire that is properly inflated and of each tire providing information
not overloaded. Excessive speed, about the tire brand and
underinflation, or excessive manufacturing plant, tire size and
loading, either separately or in date of manufacture. Also referred
combination, can cause heat to as DOT code.
buildup and possible tire failure. *Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C, *Standard load: A class of
representing the tire’s resistance P-metric or Metric tires designed
to the generation of heat and its to carry a maximum load at 35 psi
ability to dissipate heat when [37 psi (2.5 bar) for Metric tires].
tested under controlled conditions Increasing the inflation pressure
on a specified indoor laboratory beyond this pressure will not
test wheel. Sustained high increase the tire’s load-carrying
temperature can cause the capability.
material of the tire to degenerate *Extra load: A class of P-metric
and reduce tire life, and excessive or Metric tires designed to carry a
temperature can lead to sudden heavier maximum load at 41 psi
tire failure. The grade C [43 psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
corresponds to a level of Increasing the inflation pressure
performance which all passenger beyond this pressure will not
car tires must meet under the increase the tire’s load-carrying
capability.

246

C-MAX (CCG)

6 kilometers). Tire Sidewall *PSI: Pounds per square inch. Wheels and Tires *kPa: Kilopascal. M J * Sidewall of the tire: Area between the bead area and the tread. a metric unit of Information Contained on the air pressure. Compliance Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge Information on P Type Tires pillar. (Note that for a tire or a tire and tube the tire size. The definitions of these *Rim: The metal support (wheel) items are listed below. characteristics of the tire and also provides a U. door-latch post. DOT Tire *Recommended inflation Identification Number for safety pressure: The cold inflation standard certification and in case pressure found on the Safety of a recall.S. A I * B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door *Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire next to the rim. different from this example. L K *Tread area of the tire: Area of E142543 the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted P215/65R15 95H is an example of on the vehicle. a Both United States and Canada standard unit of air pressure. next to the driver's seating C D F position) or Tire Label located on G B the B-Pillar or the edge of the H driver’s door. Federal regulations require tire *Cold tire pressure: The tire manufacturers to place pressure when the vehicle has standardized information on the been stationary and out of direct sidewall of all tires. This sunlight for an hour or more and information identifies and prior to the vehicle being driven for describes the fundamental 1 mile (1.) 247 C-MAX (CCG) . a tire size. load index and speed assembly upon which the tire rating for your vehicle may be beads are seated. load index and speed rating. or the door edge that meets the door-latch E post.

number. The speed rating denotes that may be used for service on the speed at which a tire is cars. Note: You may not find this C. rating. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio information on all tires because it which gives the tire's ratio of is not required by federal law. sport utility vehicles. S 112 mph (180 km/h) You may find this information in your owner’s manual. P: Indicates a tire. The B. you will have to purchase new tires to match the N 87 mph (140 km/h) new wheel diameter. R: Indicates a radial type tire. Q 99 mph (159 km/h) F. If you change M 81 mph (130 km/h) your wheel size. need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions. the wider the tire. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim rating diameter in inches. from sidewall edge to sidewall These ratings are listed in the edge. designated G. If not. U 124 mph (200 km/h) Note: You may not find this information on all tires because it H 130 mph (210 km/h) is not required by federal law. the larger the following chart. height to width. It is an index that relates to R 106 mph (171 km/h) how much weight a tire can carry. In general. The tires on your vehicle designated by either the European may operate at different Tire and Rim Technical conditions for load and inflation Organization or the Japan Tire pressure. V 149 mph (240 km/h) 248 C-MAX (CCG) . Letter mph ( km/h) E. Note: If periods of time under a standard your tire size does not begin with condition of load and inflation a letter this may mean it is pressure. D. Wheels and Tires A. designed to be driven for extended minivans and light trucks. These speed ratings may Manufacturing Association. H: Indicates the tire's speed by the Tire and Rim Association. 215: Indicates the nominal ratings range from 81 mph (130 width of the tire in millimeters km/h) to 186 mph (299 km/h). 95: Indicates the tire's load index. T 118 mph (190 km/h) contact a local tire dealer.

tire manufacturers always tire. Wheels and Tires Letter mph ( km/h) J. which include steel.S. tire manufacturers nylon. the next two are the tire size code and the last four *Treadwear The treadwear grade numbers represent the week and is a comparative rating based on year the tire was built. Maximum Load: Indicates the those with a maximum speed maximum load in kilograms and capability over 186 mph (299 pounds that can be carried by the km/h). or letters are the plant code L. U. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow. Traction and designating where it was Temperature Grades: manufactured. For K. I. or AS: All Season. (240 km/h). Certification Label (affixed to either the door hinge pillar. DOT Tire Identification door-latch post. Tire Ply Composition and rating Material Used: Indicates the number of plies or the number of W 168 mph (270 km/h) layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. After 2000 on a specified government test the numbers go to four digits. For example. For course. Treadwear. For the wear rate of the tire when example. the letters DOT and indicates that next to the driver's seating the tire meets all federal position). or AT: All Terrain. the numbers 317 mean tested under controlled conditions the 31st week of 1997. sometimes use the letters ZR. 249 C-MAX (CCG) . See the Safety Compliance use the letters ZR. polyester. a tire graded example. The numbers in times as well on the government between are identification codes course as a tire graded 100. for the correct tire standards. 2501 means the 25th 150 would wear one and one-half week of 2001. H. The next two numbers pressure for your vehicle. or the door edge Number (TIN): This begins with that meets the door-latch post. Tire Y 186 mph (299 km/h) manufacturers also must indicate Note: For tires with a maximum the ply materials in the tire and the speed capability over 149 mph sidewall. and others. used for traceability. This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall.

250 C-MAX (CCG) . and C. or Tire Label which is that is intended for service on light located on the B-Pillar or the edge trucks. or the door edge that meets the door-latch post. Load Range and Load inflation pressure should never be Inflation Limits: Indicates the set lower than the recommended tire's load-carrying capabilities pressure on the vehicle label. apply to this type of tire. These differences are either the door hinge pillar. M. and its inflation limits. The grades represent the warnings such as standard load tire's ability to stop on wet or radial tubeless. pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified Additional Information government test surfaces of Contained on the Tire Sidewall asphalt and concrete. designated next to the driver's seating by the Tire and Rim Association. or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire. B and B C. of the driver’s door. representing the tire's C resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate A heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. notes or B. The tire suppliers may have from highest to lowest are AA. Wheels and Tires *Traction: The traction grades. The cold B. door-latch post. This pressure is normally higher than D the vehicle manufacturer's E142544 B recommended cold inflation pressure. A. described below. additional markings. *Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest). A tire for LT Type Tires marked C may have poor traction Note: Tire Quality Grades do not performance. Maximum Inflation Pressure: Indicates the tire manufacturer's maximum permissible pressure. which can be found on LT type tires have some additional the Safety Compliance information beyond those of P Certification Label (affixed to type tires. A. LT: Indicates a tire. position).

T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires. In general. 145: Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. A. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual. B. defined as two tires (total) on the rear axle. the larger the number. 251 C-MAX (CCG) . sport-utility vehicles. These differences are described below. T: Indicates a type of tire. D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single. designated by the Tire and Rim Association. B C D defined as four tires on the rear A E axle (a total of six or more tires on the vehicle). Wheels and Tires C. Tire Quality Grades E142545 do not apply to this type of tire. Note: The temporary tire size for your vehicle may be different from this example. Information on T Type Tires T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size. that is intended for temporary service on cars. minivans and light trucks. the wider the tire.

E. or dial-type tire pressure gauge R: Indicates a radial type tire. use a tire gauge to accidents. If one looks lower than wear. It also may result in Every day before you drive. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire. and may result in severe tire cracking. If you change Use the recommended cold your wheel size. You are strongly urged to buy a which gives the tire's ratio of reliable tire pressure gauge. Wheels and Tires C. loss of vehicle control and the others. you will have to inflation pressure for optimum tire purchase new tires to match the performance and wear. the tire. Under-inflation increases requires that your tires are sidewall flexing and rolling properly inflated. with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk Safe operation of your vehicle of injury. if pressure even if it is less than the equipped). Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label 252 C-MAX (CCG) . Inflate all tires to the maximum inflation pressure inflation pressure recommended information found on the tire. The by Ford Motor Company. inspect each tire and Always inflate your tires to the check the tire pressure with a tire Ford recommended inflation gauge (including spare. Under-inflation or over-inflation may cause uneven treadwear Location of the Tire Label patterns You will find a Tire Label WARNING containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important Under-inflation is the most information located on the B-Pillar common cause of tire failures or the edge of the driver’s door. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio. resulting in heat a tire can lose up to half of its air buildup and internal damage to pressure without appearing flat. appear to be flat! At least once a month and before long trips. as height to width. A tire can lose up to check pressure of all tires and half of its air pressure and not adjust if required. tread separation or Inflating Your Tires blowout. Ford recommends the use of a digital D. may be inaccurate. check unnecessary tire stress. rather than a stick-type tire pressure gauge. Remember that resistance. new wheel diameter. irregular your tires. Numbers of 70 or automatic service station gauges lower indicate a short sidewall. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches.

or the door pressures to increase above edge that meets the door-latch recommended cold pressures. pump. It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive. (for cold inflation pressure. vehicle handles To check the pressure in your Maximum Inflation Pressure is tire(s): the tire manufacturer's maximum 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire. tire inflation edge that meets the door-latch pressures also change. Wheels and Tires (affixed to either the door hinge When weather temperature pillar. Make sure the tires are cool. 2. load can be carried by the tire. door-latch post. set lower than the recommended check and record the tire pressure pressure on the Safety first and add the appropriate air Compliance Certification Label or pressure when you get to the Tire Label. which can example. The cold Note: If you have to drive a inflation pressure should never be distance to get air for your tire(s). or Tire Label which is cause a corresponding drop of 1 located on the B-Pillar or the edge psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. next to the driver's seating (6°C) temperature drop can position).6 kilometers]). Failure to Check your tire pressures follow the tire pressure frequently and adjust them to the recommendations can cause proper pressure which can be uneven treadwear patterns and found on the Safety Compliance adversely affect the way your Certification Label or Tire Label. permissible pressure and the meaning they are not hot from pressure at which the maximum driving even a mile. This pressure is normally higher than Note: If you are checking tire the manufacturer’s recommended pressure when the tire is hot. of the driver’s door. or Tire Label which is cold inflation pressure could be located on the B-Pillar or the edge significantly under-inflated. A post. The tires are (affixed to either the door hinge hot from driving and it is normal for pillar. never bleed or Compliance Certification Label reduce air pressure. 253 C-MAX (CCG) . then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure. door-latch post. driven more than 1 mile be found on the Safety [1. or the door changes occur. next to the driver's seating hot tire at or below recommended position). of the driver’s door. A 10°F post.

Note: Some spare tires operate at Inspect the tire sidewalls for a higher inflation pressure than the cracking. Wheel Valve Stems Note: If you overfill the tire. cuts or bulges. bruises and other other tires. is suspected.15 demounted and inspected in case bar). in the tread grooves. Improper or inadequate vehicle 6. have the tire Store and maintain at 60 psi (4. recheck the pressure with your tire nails or glass that may be wedged gauge. spare tires. could poke a hole in the tire and frequently. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges. see the Dissimilar Spare wear. Replace the valve cap. including the spare. cracks. cuts. shown on the Tire Label. release Periodically inspect the tire treads air by pressing on the metal stem for uneven or excessive wear and in the center of the valve. Then remove objects such as stones. Repeat this procedure for each leakage and repair or replace the tire. and valve stems for holes. and replace them if cause an air leak. For full-size and dissimilar it needs to be repaired or replaced. see the Dissimilar Spare For your safety. tire and replace the valve stem. or cuts that may permit air 5. including the spare. Wheels and Tires 3. one or more of the following conditions exist: 7. If internal damage to the tire Wheel and Tire Assembly section. For T type mini-spare signs of damage or excessive tires. Store and excessive wear should not be used maintain at the higher of the front because they are more likely to and rear inflation pressure as blow out or fail. 254 C-MAX (CCG) . Inspect all your other objects embedded that tires. Visually inspect the tires to maintenance can cause tires to make sure there are no nails or wear abnormally. Add enough air to reach the Inspecting Your Tires and recommended air pressure. Check the tire 4. tires that are Wheel and Tire Assembly damaged or show signs of Information section.

cracks in the tread groove and Both United States and Canada separation in the tread or Federal regulations require tire sidewall). and conditions of use one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm). Built-in treadwear indicators. (such as load. Age WARNING Tires degrade over time E142546 depending on many factors such as weather. However. so inspection after off-road use is also recommended. tires should be which look like narrow strips of replaced after six years regardless smooth rubber across the tread of tread wear. and hydroplaning. the tire is worn out and must You should replace your spare tire be replaced. This information identifies and 255 C-MAX (CCG) . Tires can be damaged during off-road use. DOT Tire Identification and sidewalls for damage (such Number as bulges in the tread or sidewalls. storage When the tread is worn down to conditions. when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if Damage it has not been used. Wheels and Tires Tire Wear or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional. inflation tires must be replaced to help pressure) the tires experience prevent your vehicle from skidding throughout their lives. Periodically inspect the tire treads U. to the same height as these wear bars. If damage is observed manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. heat will appear on the tire when the caused by hot climates or tread is worn down to one frequent high loading conditions sixteenth of an inch (2 can accelerate the aging process millimeters) and may require tires to be When the tire tread wears down replaced more frequently. In general.S. speed. or wear bars.

If the beads do not seat at LT-metric or all-season versus the maximum pressure indicated. Wheels and Tires describes the fundamental WARNINGS characteristics of the tire and also may be found on either the Safety provides a U. injury. speed rating and additional precautions listed type (such as P-metric versus below. the next two labels then you should contact are the tire size code and the last your authorized dealer as soon as four numbers represent the week possible. For in an increased risk of loss of example. Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride To reduce the risk of serious and handling capability. next to the driver's seating and indicates that the tire meets position). week of 2001. Use of any tire or wheel and year the tire was built. load index. customers if a tire defect requires suspension. The numbers in personal injury and death. This non-recommended tires and information is used to contact wheels could cause steering. The next is located on the B-Pillar or edge two numbers or letters are the of the driver’s door. all-terrain) as those originally re-lubricate and try again provided by Ford. when mounting replacement tires and wheels.S. which could result the numbers go to four digits. The recommended tire and wheel size 256 C-MAX (CCG) . After 2000 of your vehicle. If you have questions regarding tire Tire Replacement replacement. you WARNINGS should not exceed the maximum Only use replacement tires pressure indicated on the sidewall and wheels that are the same of the tire to set the beads without size. axle. DOT Tire Compliance Certification Label Identification Number for safety (affixed to either the door hinge standard certification and in case pillar. vehicle rollover. transfer case or a recall. power transfer unit failure. the numbers 317 mean affect the safety and performance the 31st week of 1997. door-latch post. or the door of a recall. edge that meets the door-latch This begins with the letters DOT post. or the Tire Label which all federal standards. contact your Requirements authorized dealer as soon as possible. If this plant code designating where it information is not found on these was manufactured. between are identification codes Additionally the use of used for traceability. For not recommended by Ford can example. 2501 means the 25th vehicle control.

Use both eye and ear may be damaged. Lubricate the tire bead and If the tire pressure monitoring wheel bead seat area again. Safety Practices For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi (1. Spinning the mounting. do not professional should do the rapidly spin the tires. pressure monitoring system. mud or sand.66 meters) away from the incompatible with your tire wheel and tire assembly. 2.38 bar) greater than WARNINGS the maximum pressure. with a remote air fill with the Do not spin the wheels at person inflating standing at a over 35 mph (56 km/h).38 bar) greater than the The tire pressure sensors mounted maximum pressure on the tire in the wheels (originally installed sidewall. a Ford If your vehicle is stuck in dealer or other tire service snow. The minimum of 12 feet (3. system indicator is flashing. operation of your tire pressure monitoring system. A tire can explode in Always inflate steel carcass tires as little as three to five seconds. the following on your vehicle) are not designed precautions must be taken to to be used in aftermarket wheels. Make sure that you have the Company may affect the correct tire and wheel size.66 meters) tires may fail and injure a away from the wheel and tire passenger or bystander. protect the person mounting the tire: The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor 1. Your 3. Wheels and Tires WARNINGS The two front tires or two rear tires When inflating the tire for should generally be replaced as a mounting pressures up to 20 psi pair. assembly Important: Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle 257 C-MAX (CCG) . protection. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet replacement tire might be (3. tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion. the system is malfunctioning. or some component of the system 4. (1.

stops and turns your tires. Drive slowly to the authorized dealer. drive vehicles and those with an This may further damage the flat independent rear suspension may tire. Have an authorized *Do not run over curbs or hit the dealer check the wheel alignment tire against a curb when parking periodically. A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end *Observe posted speed limits of your vehicle to become misaligned or cause damage to *Avoid fast starts. wheels. immediately irregular tire wear. 258 C-MAX (CCG) . tire imbalance or or tire dealer to have the vehicle mechanical problem involved inspected. but your safety is more require alignment of all four important. before tire rotation. or periodically. Drive with Tire Rotation caution until you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the Note: If your tires show uneven tires for damage. If your vehicle seems to *Avoid potholes and objects on pull to one side when you’re the road driving. Front-wheel closest safe area out of traffic. Wheels and Tires Driving habits have a great deal Tire and Wheel Alignment to do with your tire mileage and safety. If you feel a sudden vibration or The tires should also be balanced ride disturbance while driving. have the vehicle check for and correct any wheel towed to the nearest repair facility misalignment. An unbalanced tire you suspect your tire or vehicle and wheel assembly may result in has been damaged. If you cannot wear ask an authorized dealer to detect a cause. Highway Hazards Wheel misalignment in the front No matter how carefully you drive or the rear can cause uneven and there’s always the possibility that rapid treadwear of your tires and you may eventually have a flat tire should be corrected by an on the highway. the wheels may be out of alignment. reduce your speed.

A WARNING dissimilar spare wheel and tire Snow tires must be the same size. SYSTEM Front-wheel drive vehicles (front tires on the left side of the WARNING diagram) The tire pressure monitoring system is not a substitute for manually checking tire pressure. Additionally. If you have a dissimilar performance of your vehicle. speed rating as those wheel and tire assembly that is originally provided by Ford. personal injury and intended for temporary use only death. help your tires wear more evenly. inflation pressure must be The tires on your vehicle have all-weather checked and adjusted to the treads to provide traction in rain and snow. Wheels and Tires Note: Your vehicle may be USING SNOW CHAINS equipped with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly. assembly is defined as a spare load index. vehicle rollover and personal injury. The tire pressure should be checked periodically (at least monthly) using a tire gauge. suspension. E142547 Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires. which could spare wheel and tire assembly it is result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control. loss of control. the use of and should not be used in a tire non-recommended tires and wheels could rotation. cause steering. Snow chains have not been approved for Rotating your tires at the use on your vehicle. providing better tire performance TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING and longer tire life. transfer case or power transfer unit failure. size or any tire or wheel not recommended by appearance from the road tires and Ford can affect the safety and wheels. Use of different in brand. vehicle requirements. see Inflating your tires in this chapter. Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure. 259 C-MAX (CCG) . recommended interval (as Consult your authorized dealer for indicated in the scheduled information on other Ford Motor Company maintenance information) will approved methods of traction control. vehicle rollover. axle. Note: After having your tires rotated.

This sequence sensor is attached to the valve stem. The TPMS malfunction indicator is E142549 combined with the low tire pressure telltale. including the spare (if When the malfunction indicator is provided). Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency Changing Tires With a Tire and tire tread life. even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire malfunction. and (2) This device them to the proper pressure. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance. The will continue upon subsequent vehicle pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. the telltale will flash for pressure sensor located inside the wheel approximately one minute and then remain and tire assembly cavity. including the on the vehicle placard or tire inflation installation of replacement or alternate pressure label. and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure. you should stop and check conditions: (1) This device may not cause your tires as soon as possible. you should determine the proper tire telltale after replacing one or more tires or inflation pressure for those tires. The pressure continuously illuminated. Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale The tire pressure monitoring system when one or more of your tires is complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and significantly under-inflated. should be checked illuminated. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure Always check the TPMS malfunction label. not visible unless the tire is removed. and may affect the Pressure Monitoring System vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. Accordingly. TPMS malfunctions may occur recommended by the vehicle manufacturer for a variety of reasons. when the low tire pressure telltale Operation is subject to the following two illuminates. Driving on a must accept any interference received. undesired operation. your vehicle allow the TPMS to continue to function has been equipped with a Tire Pressure properly. with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. and inflate harmful interference. Wheels and Tires Each tire. the system may not be able monthly when cold and inflated to detect or signal low tire pressure as to the inflation pressure intended.) wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels As an added safety feature. (If your vehicle has tires of tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent a different size than the size indicated on the TPMS from functioning properly. significantly under-inflated tire causes the including interference that may cause tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Take care when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor 260 C-MAX (CCG) .

remind you that the damaged road wheel and tire assembly needs to be repaired and Understanding Your Tire Pressure put back on your vehicle. It can also warn you in pressure. The low tire pressure warning light will turn on if the tire pressure is When You Believe Your System is Not significantly low. your tire pressure of functioning as intended. Wheels and Tires You should always have your tires serviced When Your Temporary Spare Tire is by an authorized dealer. your tires are under-inflated The main function of the tire pressure and need to be inflated to the monitoring system is to warn you when manufacturer’s recommended tire your tires need air. Installed Check the tire pressure periodically (at When one of your road tires needs to be least monthly) using an accurate tire replaced with the temporary spare. See the still needs to be checked. following chart for information concerning your tire pressure monitoring system: 261 C-MAX (CCG) . your vehicle. Once the light is Operating Properly illuminated. See Inflating Your Tires in this system will continue to identify an issue to chapter. the gauge. Monitoring System To restore the full function of the tire The tire pressure monitoring system pressure monitoring system. have the measures pressure in your four road tires damaged road wheel and tire assembly and sends the tire pressure readings to repaired and remounted on your vehicle. Even if the light turns on and a the event the system is no longer capable short time later turns off.

For a description on how the system functions. For a description on how the system functions. It may take up to two minutes of driving When Inflating Your Tires over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after you have filled your tires to the When putting air into your tires (such as at recommended inflation pressure a gas station or in your garage). see When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section. contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on. Wheels and Tires Low tire pressure Possible cause Customer action required warning light Solid warning light Tire(s) under-inflated Make sure tires are at the proper pres- sure. See Inflating your tires in this chapter. see When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section. Flashing warning Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire light assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. Spare tire in use Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system function. the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light turns off. 262 C-MAX (CCG) . After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar). TPMS malfunction If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but the light remains on. the tire pressure monitoring system may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires.

resulting in loss of control. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion. Inflate all the pressure may decrease about 3 psi (21 tires to the recommended inflation kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in ambient pressure. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners. Wheels and Tires How Temperature Affects Your Tire may be detected by the tire pressure Pressure monitoring system as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation The tire pressure monitoring system pressure and activate the system warning monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic light for low tire pressure. This lower pressure value TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications WARNING When a wheel is installed. While driving in a normal manner. carefully drive outside temperature significantly lower the vehicle to the nearest location where than the daytime temperature. If the low tire tire. repair as necessary. Bolt size Ib-ft (Nm) * M12 x 1. If the Check the air pressure in the road tires. If vehicle is stationary overnight with the any tire is under-inflated.5 100 (135) * Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. always remove any corrosion. Make sure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. wheel removal). Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation. the tire air can be added to the tires. brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. temperature. 263 C-MAX (CCG) . changing a flat tire. visually check typical passenger tire inflation pressure each tire to verify that no tire is flat. kPa) from a cold start situation. a pressure warning light is on. If one may increase about 2 to 4 psi (14 to 28 or more tires are flat. dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub.

Wheels and Tires E145950 A Wheel pilot bore Inspect the wheel pilot bore and mounting surface prior to installation. Remove any visible corrosion or loose particles. 264 C-MAX (CCG) .

3 mm ± 0.3:1 Spark plug gap 0.0L ATK iVCT Engine Cubic inches 98 Required fuel Minimum 87 octane Firing order 1-3-4-2 Ignition system Coil on plug (COP) Compression ratio 12. (1.05 mm) 265 C-MAX (CCG) . Capacities and Specifications ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS Engine 2.002 in. ± 0.051 in.

3 For spark plug replacement. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used. 266 C-MAX (CCG) . Capacities and Specifications MOTORCRAFT PARTS Component 2. see your authorized dealer. such as Motorcraft® or equivalent replacement parts.Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle. 2 Only use the specified replacement oil filter. The use of a non-specified oil filter can result in engine damage. The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used.0L ATK iVCT engine Air filter element 1 FA-1911 Oil filter 2 FL-910-S Low-Voltage Battery BXT-96R-500 BXT-96R-590 Spark plugs 3 CYFS12YPC5/SP531 Cabin air filter FP70 Windshield wiper blade WW-29 (driver side) WW-25 (passenger side) Rear wiper blade WW-12 1 Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. Refer to Scheduled Maintenance for the replacement intervals. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals.

The Vehicle Identification Number contains the following information: E167469 E142477 A World manufacturer identifier B Brake system. F Model year G Assembly plant H Production sequence number VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL E142476 Please note that in the graphic. vehicle line. series. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. Restraint Devices and their locations 267 C-MAX (CCG) . body NUMBER type D Engine type The vehicle identification number is located on the left-hand side of the E Check digit instrument panel. XXXX is representative of your vehicle identification number. Capacities and Specifications VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION C Make.

Description Code Electronic continuously variable transmis. The Safety Compliance Certification Label shall be affixed to either the door hinge pillar. E142806 The transmission code is on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. J sion (HF35 eCVT) 268 C-MAX (CCG) . The following table shows the transmission code along with the transmission description. Capacities and Specifications The National Highway Traffic Safety TRANSMISSION CODE Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be DESIGNATION affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification Label may be located. the door latch post. next to the driver's seating position. or the edge of the door near the door latch.

seat CRCSL3151ESB / tracks.7 quarts (5. Ford part number / valent Ford specification Brake fluid 1 Between MIN and Motorcraft™ DOT 4 LV PM-20 / MAX on reservoir High Performance WSS-M6C65-A2 Hinges.S. 6.) mission fluid 2.S. Motorcraft CXC-51-A (Canada) Penetrating Fluid / -- (Canada) Automatic trans.S.5 quarts (4. fuel filler ESB-M1C93-B door hinge and spring Lock cylinder Not applicable Motorcraft Penetrating XL-1 (U. Not applicable Motorcraft Multi.3L) / WSS-M97B44-D2 8 engine Coolant 269 C-MAX (CCG) . Capacities and Specifications TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Item Capacity Ford part name or equi.4L) Motorcraft MERCON™ XT-10-QLVC (U.) coolant 8 Antifreeze / Coolant CVC-3DIL-B Prediluted (Canada) C-MAX Energi 8.8 quarts (8. latches.2 quarts (7.3L) Motorcraft SAE 0W-20 XO-0W20-QSP Motor Oil (U.) / WSS-M2C947-A with API certification mark CXO-0W20-LSP12 (Canada) CXO-0W20-LFS12 (Canada) / WSS-M2C947-A with API certification mark C-MAX engine 8. Motorcraft XL-5 striker plates and Purpose Grease Spray (aerosol) and/or rotors. 4 LV ATF / MERCON LV CXT-10-LV12 (Canada) / MERCON LV Engine oil 5.8L) Motorcraft Orange VC-3DIL-B (U.) / -- and Lock Lubricant (US).S. 7 4. 3. 5.S.) XO-0W20-QFS (U.

63 lb (0.5 gallons (51. Ford part number / valent Ford specification Inverter system 1.8ml) Refrigerant Compressor Oil 270 C-MAX (CCG) .2 fluid ounces Motorcraft Electric A/C YN-32 /-- compressor oil 9 (153. / WSS-M14P19-A only) C-MAX fuel tank 13.1 quarts (1L) controller 8 coolant Windshield Fill as required Motorcraft Premium ZC-32-A1 or ZC-32-B1 washer fluid Windshield Wash (U.) / WSH- Refrigerant M17B19-A CYN-16-R (Canada) / WSH-M17B19-A A/C refrigerant 5.74 kg) Motorcraft R-134a YN-19 (U.S.) Concentrates (U.S. Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Ford part name or equi.1L) — — C-MAX Energi 14 gallons (53L) fuel tank A/C refrigerant 9 1.S.

6 Do not use supplemental engine oil additives in your engine. Capacities and Specifications Item Capacity Ford part name or equi. They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage not covered by your Ford warranty. 3 Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid should only use Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid. Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause brake system damage. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes. See the Scheduled Maintenance chapter for service intervals. It is also acceptable to use an engine oil of recommended viscosity grade that meets API SN requirements and displays the API certification mark for gasoline engines. Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage. 4 See your authorized dealer for fluid level checking or filling. 2 Approximate dry fill capacity. 7 You can use 5W-20 oil if 0W-20 oil is not available. WARNING The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high pressure. 8 Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle. 5 The design of your engine allows for the use of Motorcraft engine oils or equivalent oils that meet Ford specifications. 271 C-MAX (CCG) . Ford part number / valent Ford specification WSS-M2C231-B2 1 Use only Motorcraft DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A1. 9 See the warning below. Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval.

Audio systems capable of recognizing and certain recordable and re-recordable playing MP3 individual tracks and folder compact discs may not function correctly structures work as follows: when used in Ford CD players. dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with the reception. of radio present. a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in the audio system muting. mountains. Please (noted by the . Audio System GENERAL INFORMATION AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequencies and Reception (FCC) and the Canadian Radio and Factors Telecommunications Commission (CRTC). the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception. parking garages. Note: CD units play commercially pressed MP3 Track and Folder Structure 4. 1710 kHz • FM: 87. 272 C-MAX (CCG) . Wipe it from the center of the disc toward the edge. tunnels. freeway overpasses. The player adhesive labels on your homemade CDs. bridges. numbers each MP3 track on the disc Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Always handle discs by their edges only.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact discs only. Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner only. 107. tall buildings. The information.9 MHz Radio Reception Factors Distance and strength The further you travel from an FM station. Those frequencies are: • AM: 530.9-107.7. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower. maximum number of playable MP3 Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped files may be less depending on the discs or discs with a scratch protection film structure of the CD and exact model attached. Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or CD and CD Player Information heat sources for extended periods. become jammed. Do not clean in a circular motion. You should use a • MP3 track mode ignores any folder permanent felt tip marker rather than structure on the MP3 disc. Terrain Hills.mp3 file extension) from contact an authorized dealer for further T001 to a maximum of T255. 540-1700. • There are two different modes for MP3 Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade disc playback: MP3 track mode paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player (system default) and MP3 folder as the label may peel and cause the CD to mode. Due to technical incompatibility.

mode. The CD player numbers all MP3 AM/FM/CD/SYNC tracks on the disc (noted by the . regardless off. Note: You can operate your audio system for up to one hour after you switch off the In track mode. The system automatically turns off after of being in a specific folder). only files with Make sure you are aware of all applicable the . Audio System • MP3 folder mode represents a folder AUDIO UNIT . loss of vehicle control.mp3 file extension) and all folders WARNING containing MP3 files. While while driving and encourage the use of various files may be present. We strongly recommend that folders helps with navigation through you use extreme caution when using any the disc files.VEHICLES WITH: structure consisting of one level of folders.mp3 extension are played. extensions other than mp3). In folder one hour. (files with voice-operated systems when possible. from F001 Driving while distracted can result in (folder) T001 (track) to F253 T255. other files local laws that may affect the use of are ignored by the system. 273 C-MAX (CCG) . This enables electronic devices while driving. the system only plays the . We recommend important to understand how the system against the use of any hand-held device reads the structures you create. device that may take your focus off the road. Your primary responsibility is the safe If you are burning your own MP3 discs.mp3 files in the current folder. the system displays and ignition. Press the ON/OFF control to plays the structure as if it were only one operate the system with the ignition turned level deep (all . it is operation of your vehicle.mp3 files play. crash and • Creating discs with only one level of injury. home computer and your in-vehicle system. you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety of tasks on your work computer.

enter a phone number. You can also set the clock by pressing the MENU button and scrolling to Clock Settings. 274 C-MAX (CCG) . B Cursor arrows: Press these buttons to scroll through on-screen audio system choices. E TUNE . select a track. D INFO: Press this button to access any available radio or CD information. F Number block: In radio mode. In phone mode. memory preset or through the current disc track. then press and hold a preset button until sound returns. In CD mode. store your favorite radio stations. tune to the station. Press and hold these buttons to fast forward to the previous or next strong radio station. To store a radio station. C OK: Press this button to confirm menu selections. G Clock: Push to access clock settings. Audio System A B C D E O N M F L K G H H E162867 J I A Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.and TUNE +: Press these buttons to manually search the frequency band. I Seek: Press and release these buttons to go to the previous or next preset radio station or disc track. H Function buttons: Select different functions of the audio system depending on which mode you are in (such as Radio mode or CD mode).

See SYNC™ (page 287). See MyFord Touch™ (page 322). WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control. Press OK to set or press MENU to exit. L SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble. K MENU: Press this button to access different audio system features. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. M PHONE: Press this button to access the phone features of the SYNC system. O RADIO: Press this button to listen to the radio or change radio frequencies. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. AUDIO UNIT . 275 C-MAX (CCG) . Middle. When you make your selection.VEHICLES WITH: Note: The MyFord Touch system controls PREMIUM AM/FM/CD most of the audio features. Press the function buttons below the radio screen to select different radio functions. Fade and Balance. Use the up and down arrow buttons to select the various settings. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. Sound settings can be set for each audio source independently. press the left and right arrow buttons to change the settings. N MEDIA: Press this button to switch between listening to a CD and the SYNC-Media menu. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. press MENU and scroll to Select Source. Audio System J ON/OFF: Press this button to switch the system off and on. Turn to adjust the volume. Note: The CD slot is directly above the touchscreen. Bass. See Menu Structure later in this section. To change the SYNC-Media device (such as switching from a device plugged into the USB port to a Bluetooth audio device). crash and injury.

Balance and Fade. B ON/OFF and VOL: Press this button to switch the audio system off and on.TUNE +: Press this button to manually search through the radio frequency band. Treble. E SOUND: Press this button to adjust the sound settings for Bass. F SOURCE: Press this button to access different audio modes. such as AM. Turn to adjust the volume. 276 C-MAX (CCG) . D SEEK: Press this button to go to the next station up or down the radio frequency band or the next or previous track on a CD. C Eject: Press this button to eject a CD. FM and A/V Input. Audio System E143843 A .

See MyFord Touch™ (page 322). 277 C-MAX (CCG) . such as AM. Rock or News). C Seek. In CD mode. Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. select a frequency band and press these buttons. B SOURCE: Press this button to access different audio modes. press these buttons to select the previous or next track. crash and injury. SONY AM/FM/CD Note: The MyFord Touch system controls WARNING most of the audio features. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. press these buttons to select the previous or next channel. E143844 A Power: Press this button to switch the system off and on. FM and A/V Input. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. Audio System AUDIO UNIT . The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. If a specific category is selected (such as Jazz. Reverse and Fast Forward: In radio mode. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control. use these buttons to find the previous or next channel in the selected category. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road. In SIRIUS mode.VEHICLES WITH: Note: The CD slot is directly above the touchscreen.

Audio System D . modify or track your account. You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS® to activate. Press the up and down arrow buttons to Menu Structure scroll through the options. RBDS must be on for you to set a category. Press OK to open a list of the following options for this channel: Tune Channel. In SIRIUS mode. Press OK to confirm a selection. SIRIUS Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels. if available. press these buttons to manually search through the radio frequency band. Show ESN Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number (ESN). This feature defaults to off. Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN. AST Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AM- AST and FM-AST frequency bands. Press the left arrow to exit a menu. options may appear slightly different. Radio Manual tune Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the frequency band. E Volume: Turn this control to adjust the volume. you can only access it by pressing Direct and entering the channel number.TUNE +: In radio mode. Skip Channel or Lock Channel. RBDS/RDS Select to view additional broadcast data. Bass. Once you skip or lock a channel. PTY/Set Category Select to have the system search by certain music categories (such as Rock. Note: Depending on your system. Pop or Country). F SOUND: Press this button to access settings for Treble. press these buttons to find the next or previous available satellite radio station. some Press the right arrow to enter a menu. Scan Select for a brief sampling of all available channels. Channel Guide Select to view available satellite radio channels. 278 C-MAX (CCG) . Middle. Balance and Fade. Press MENU. G Eject: Press this button to eject a CD.

Vol. CD Settings Scan All Select to scan all disc selections. The system alerts you when the selection is playing on another channel. If you select a category. Audio Settings Spd. Fade and Balance. CD Compression Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more consistent listening level. Your initial PIN is 1234. Comp. Audio System SIRIUS Set Category Select to view channel categories (such as Pop. artists or teams. seek and scan functions only stop on channels in that category. Rock or News). You can set the system between 0 and +7. Automatically adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind noise. Middle. Occupancy Mode Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating position. RBDS/RDS Text Select to view additional broadcast data. 279 C-MAX (CCG) . RBDS must be on for you to set a category. Alerts Select to turn off or turn on alerts for songs. Skip No stations Use to restore any channels you previously skipped. Parental Lock (PIN) Select to create a PIN. if available. Unlock All Stations Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations. Sound Select to adjust settings for Treble. Save up to 20 alerts. This feature defaults to off. DSP Choose between STEREO SURROUND mode and STEREO mode. Scan Folder Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder. Bass. which allows you to lock or unlock channels.

Your analog and digital broadcasts. Temp.hdradio. available) in addition to the analog When HD Radio broadcasts are active. Set Date Select to set the calendar date. When HD Radio is on and you tune to a station broadcasting HD Radio technology. 24h Mode Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour mode.com. content is available. you may notice the HD Radio logo on your screen. you broadcasts. please visit www. and a guide to available stations and programming. Language Select to display the language in English. The highlighted numbers signify available Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not digital channels where new or different available in all markets. HD1 signifies the main HD Radio technology is the digital programming status and is available in evolution of analog AM/FM radio. crystal-clear audio and no static or distortion. setting Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit or Celsius. Other system has a special receiver that allows multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are it to receive digital broadcasts (where only available digitally. it already receives. French or Spanish. Digital can access the following functions: broadcasts provide a better sound quality than analog broadcasts with free. you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen. Audio System Clock Settings Set Time Select to set the time. 280 C-MAX (CCG) . For more information. Display Settings Dimming Select to change display brightness. When this logo is available. The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is DIGITAL RADIO broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.

Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station. Note: As with any saved radio station. 281 C-MAX (CCG) . you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2- HD7 multicast stations). the sound mutes before the has a digital broadcast. you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. Independent entities own and operate each station. although it does not Sound returns when finished. However. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate. the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. In order to provide the best possible experience. This until the sound returns. it shifts to the digital version. the station may mute due to weak signal strength. digital audio plays. Audio System When HD Radio broadcasts are active. if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels. If you are listening to HD1. Depending on the station quality. the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. reception is on. When scan for HD2-HD7 channels. you • Memory presets allow you to save an can access the following functions: active channel as a memory preset. You may switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory see the HD logo appear if the station preset. because the system has to reacquire the digital signal. it first plays the station in the analog version. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound. • Scan allows you to hear a brief Touch and hold a memory preset slot sampling of all available stations. There is a brief feature still works when HD Radio mute while the radio saves the station. HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area.

The and out.ca in Canada. This is delay when selecting HD2 or available until the HD Radio normal behavior. weather. normal behavior. Cannot access HD2 or HD3 The previously stored No action required. analog and digital audio. Text information does not Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue match currently playing radio broadcaster. Content may be SIRIUS satellite radio channels. multicast preset or broadcast is decoded. skip or repeat This is poor time alignment No action required. Ford Motor news. reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive. form at website listed frequency. direct tune. by the radio broadcaster. * HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables No action required. the audio is avail- able.sirius.siriusxm. * There is no text information Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue shown for currently selected radio broadcaster.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corp. For responsible for the content sent using HD more information and a complete list of Radio technology. Increase or decrease in audio volume. sports. below. Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. form at website listed audio. This is a in audio. There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. The multicast channel when multicast preset or direct station is not available in recalling a preset or from a tune is not available in your your current location. of iBiquity Digital Corp.com in the United States. or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474. and SATELLITE RADIO (IF EQUIPPED) foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks SIRIUS® broadcasts a variety of music. * http://www. 282 C-MAX (CCG) . decoded. HD2-HD7 channel search. broadcast issue. This is when Scan is pressed. are not entertainment satellite radio channels. Direct Tune. Wait until HD3. U. Once the audio is available.S. traffic and Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. current reception area. www. visit changed. the station owner's discretion. Audio System Potential station issues Issues Cause Action Echo. added or deleted at any time at www. stutter. below.ibiquity.

at any time. See an authorized dealer responsible for any such programming for availability. eCos is published under the eCos License. . 283 C-MAX (CCG) . SIRIUS satellite radio is a SIRIUS® Satellite Radio Service subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music. add or delete programming. Terrain Hills.Your display may show ACQUIRING . E142593 www. Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right news. When in satellite radio mode. Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower. Audio System Note: This receiver includes the eCos real-time operating system. parking garages. press Options. rearrange. sports. . please visit www.siriusxm. mountains. to indicate the ence interference and the audio system may mute.com in the United States. Your factory-installed programming including canceling. the online media player and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels. and its prices. tall buildings. Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number (ESN) You need your ESN to activate. hardware and a limited subscription term.ca in Canada. a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute. traffic and entertainment to change.sirius. weather. modify or track your satellite radio account. freeway overpasses. keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible. with or without notice to you. and other features. For more information on extended subscription terms (a service fee is required). tunnels. Satellite radio signal interfer. dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. changes. which begins on the date of sale or lease Ford Motor Company shall not be of your vehicle. or call SIRIUS at 1-888-539-7474. bridges. Satellite Radio Reception Factors Potential satellite radio reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance. moving SIRIUS satellite radio system includes or adding particular channels.

284 C-MAX (CCG) . Updating Update of channel No action required. Audio System Troubleshooting Radio display Condition Possible action Acquiring Radio requires more than No action required. tower to your vehicle the signal should return. your receiver may have a fault. channel. 539-7474 to subscribe to the channel. antenna. function on that station. When SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS you move into an open area. This two seconds to produce message should disappear audio for the selected shortly. or tune to another channel. 539-7474 to resolve subscription issues. Subscription Updated SIRIUS has updated the No action required. or with an igni- tion key cycle. Invalid Channel The channel is no longer Tune to another channel or available. channels available for your vehicle. choose another preset. The programming in progress. See an authorized dealer for service. process may take up to three minutes. Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not Contact SIRIUS at 1-888- include this channel. No Signal The signal is lost from the The signal is blocked. None found. selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip skipped or locked. clear shortly. Check Channel All the channels in the Use the channel guide to Guide. Sat Fault/SIRIUS system There is an internal module If this message does not failure or system failure present. Call SIRIUS 1-888-539-7474 Your satellite service is no Contact SIRIUS at 1-888- longer available.

You should hear become projectiles in a collision or sudden music from your device even if it is low. device that may take your focus off the road. The audio extension cable must be music player until it reaches the volume long enough to allow the portable music level of the FM station or CD. USB PORT (IF EQUIPPED) E149149 E142604 285 C-MAX (CCG) . 5. Adjust the volume as desired. Switch your portable music player on and adjust its volume to half its Store the portable music player in a maximum level. Switch the radio on. crash and audio extension cable must have male injury. Audio System AUDIO INPUT JACK The auxiliary input jack allows you to connect and play music from your portable WARNINGS music player through your vehicle speakers. Do this player to be safely stored while your by switching back and forth between vehicle is moving. Your loss of vehicle control. secure location. 2. do not connect tuned FM station or a CD. Set the parking against the use of any hand-held device brake and put the transmission in while driving and encourage the use of position P. the AUX and FM or CD controls. Adjust the volume on your portable injury. such as the center console or the glove box. 3.5 millimeter) connectors at you use extreme caution when using any each end. which may increase the risk of serious 7. portable music player while your vehicle is moving. voice-operated systems when possible. when your 6. Select either a For safety reasons. Press AUX until LINE or LINE IN vehicle is moving. radio and operation of your vehicle. stop. Your primary responsibility is the safe 1. or adjust the settings on your 4. We strongly recommend that 1/8th-inch (3. Plug the extension cable from the Make sure you are aware of all applicable portable music player into the auxiliary local laws that may affect the use of input jack. Switch off the engine. electronic devices while driving. We recommend portable music player. You can use any portable music player Driving while distracted can result in designed for use with headphones. Hard objects may appears in the display.

MEDIA HUB (IF EQUIPPED) The media hub is located in the center console and has the following features: C A B E142605 A A/V inputs B SD card slot C USB ports See MyFord Touch™ (page 322). Audio System The USB port allows you to plug in media playing devices. 286 C-MAX (CCG) . memory sticks and charge devices (if supported). See SYNC™ (page 287).

via SYNC AppLink. phone. In the United States. answer on your own. Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services (Traffic. Directions Support * & Information). * These features require activation. call 1-800-392-3673. • Use 911 Assist. The SYNC support team is available to • Use applications. In Canada. • Make and receive calls. SYNC™ GENERAL INFORMATION E142598 SYNC is an in-vehicle communications • Use the advanced voice recognition system that works with your system Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and • Charge your USB device (if your device portable media player. • Stream music from your connected Sunday. 287 C-MAX (CCG) . call 1-800-565-3673. Make sure that you review your device's manual before using it with SYNC. • Access phonebook contacts and music Monday-Saturday. 10:30am-7:30pm EST. such as Pandora and help you with any questions you cannot Stitcher. using voice commands. • Text message. 8:30am-9:00pm EST. This allows you to: supports this). • Access and play music from your portable music player.

voice-operated systems when possible. See an authorized dealer. Report and to view the reports online. the system creates a profile within Driving Restrictions your vehicle that is linked to that cellular phone. We recommend system data may be used to improve the against the use of any hand-held device system and help diagnose any problems while driving and encourage the use of that may occur. loss of vehicle control. The system also you use extreme caution when using any records a short development log of device that may take your focus off the approximately 10 minutes of all recent road. seats. The log profile and other operation of your vehicle. software downloads available for SYNC. Privacy Information • Access to customer support for any questions you may have. Place cords and cables Why do I need a SYNC owner account? out of the way. certain features are offer you more cellular features and to speed-dependent and restricted when your operate more efficiently. split SYNC Owner Account or damaged. things. if you connect a media device. If you no longer plan to use the system or the vehicle. 288 C-MAX (CCG) . • Do not leave playing devices in your • Required to activate the vehicle during extreme conditions as it subscription-based SYNC Services and could cause them damage. we recommend you perform a Master Reset to erase all stored information. SYNC™ Times are subject to change due to When using SYNC: holidays. Driving while distracted can result in In addition. See your to personalize your Saved Points and device's manual for further information. so they do not interfere with the operation of pedals. • Do not operate playing devices if the power cords or cables are broken. including history of calls when your cellular WARNING phone was not connected to the system. Your primary responsibility is the safe system activity. Favorites. and call history. Make sure you are aware of all applicable and development log will remain in the local laws that may affect the use of vehicle unless you delete them and are electronic devices while driving. When a cellular phone is connected to SYNC. • Do not attempt to service or repair the • Essential for keeping up with the latest system. text messages Safety Information (read and unread). We strongly recommend that supported media content. Among other vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h). The cellular profile. crash and the system creates and retains an index of injury. This profile is created in order to For your safety. • Required to activate Vehicle Health compartments or safe driving abilities. media device index. generally accessible only in the vehicle when the cellular phone or media player is connected. this profile may contain data about your cellular phone book.

* This is an optional feature and available in the United States only. Ford Motor This system helps you control many Company and Ford of Canada will not features using voice commands. "SYNC" Return to the main menu. "Services" * Access the SYNC Services portal. "Line in" Access the device connected to the auxiliary input jack. SYNC™ System data cannot be accessed without USING VOICE RECOGNITION special equipment and access to the vehicle's SYNC module. court order. Say If You Want To "Bluetooth audio" Stream audio from your phone. A tone seek to access the information sounds and Listening appears in E142599 independently of Ford Motor Company and the display. For further privacy following: information. "Voice settings" Adjust the level of voice interaction and feedback. 289 C-MAX (CCG) . "Phone" Make calls. Vehicle Health Report. or other third parties acting with lawful authority. and Traffic. Directions and Information. see the sections on 911 Assist. "USB" Access the device connected to your USB port. "Mobile apps" * Access mobile applications. Say any of the Ford of Canada. Other parties may Push the voice icon. This access the system data for any purpose allows you to keep your hands on the other than as described absent consent. "Cancel" Cancel the requested action. a wheel and focus on what is in front of you. "Vehicle health report" * Run a vehicle health report. "Help" Hear a list of voice commands available in the current mode. other government Initiating a Voice Session authorities. or where required by law enforcement.

it may prompt you with could also say "Say 1 after the tone to play as many as four possibilities for John Doe. "Interaction mode advanced" Provides less audible interaction and more tone prompts. is that correct?". questions and at any time. If turned off. the tone to call Jane Doe at home. prompts. Say "Voice provide more or less instruction and settings" when prompted. Say 2 after the tone to play clarification. For example. the system simply makes a best guess as to what you requested and may ask you to confirm settings. spoken confirmations depending on the situation and the chosen level of Adjusting the Interaction Level interaction (voice settings). When you say: The system: "Confirmation prompts off" Makes a best guess from the command. Say 3 after options based on your voice command. then E142599 feedback. The system defaults to the standard interaction mode. You can customize the voice recognition system to Push the voice icon. Confirmation prompts are short questions the system asks when it is not sure of your request or when there are multiple possible responses to your request. SYNC™ System Interaction and Feedback The default setting is to a higher level of interaction in order to help you learn to use The system provides feedback through the system. any of the following: When you say: The system: "Interaction mode standard" Provides more detailed interaction and guidance. "Confirmation prompts on" Clarifies your voice command with a short question. say "Say 1 after the tone to The system creates candidate lists when call John Doe at home. the system may ask "Phone. You can change these settings audible tones. Johnny Doe. you may still occasionally be asked to confirm settings. Say 2 after the tone it has the same confidence level of several to call Johnny Doe on mobile." You When turned on." 290 C-MAX (CCG) . For example.

• Using privacy mode. • At any time.ca. between words. • Speak naturally. without long pauses • Ending a call.ca or www. "Phone candidate lists off" Makes a best guess from the phone candidate list. system while it is speaking by pressing the voice icon. are phone-dependent features. Any phones with Bluetooth wireless technology command spoken before this does not support the following functions: register with the system. • Answering an incoming call. While the system recognizing spoken commands. "Media candidate lists on" Clarifies your voice command for media candidates. www. most cellular appears before saying a command.syncmaroute. You may still occasionally be asked questions. • Call waiting notification. You may still occasionally be asked questions. • Redialing. Other features. At a minimum. SYNC™ When you say: The system: "Media candidate lists off" Makes a best guess from the media candidate list.com. 291 C-MAX (CCG) .SYNCMyRide. To check your phone's compatibility.SYNCMyRide. many are • After pressing the voice icon. "Phone candidate lists on" Clarifies your voice command for phone candidates Helpful Hints USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR • Make sure the interior of your vehicle is PHONE as quiet as possible. • Caller ID. Wind noise from open windows and road vibrations may Hands-free calling is one of the main prevent the system from correctly features of SYNC. such as text messaging using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook download. supports a variety of features. wait until dependent on your cellular phone's after the tone sounds and Listening functionality. see your phone's manual and visit www. you can interrupt the • Dialing a number.

When prompted on your phone's display. Scroll to Bluetooth Devices. The display indicates when the pairing is 1.2 position P. Press OK. The any of the following: display indicates when the pairing is successful. such as if you would like to set the current 2. "PHONE" Depending on your phone's capability and 1. 1.2 SYNC automatically tries to connect with first upon vehicle start-up) and "Call <name> at work" 1. the system may prompt you "Call <name>" with questions. Press OK. When prompted on your phone's allows you to make and receive hands-free display. When the successful. Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC 6. Press OK. Press the phone button. See your device's your phone book. When Find SYNC appears in the position P. 2 "Call history missed" 292 C-MAX (CCG) .2 "Call <name> in office" Pairing Subsequent Phones 1. "Call <name> on other" Note: To scroll through the menus. press OK. Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone. press OK. enter the six-digit PIN provided calls. Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition and the radio. press OK. SYNC™ Pairing a Phone for the First Time 1. Say by SYNC in the radio display. Put your phone into Bluetooth first upon vehicle start-up) and download discovery mode.2 downloading your phonebook. display. manual if necessary. such as setting the current phone as the primary phone (the phone "Call <name> at home" 1. The system then prompts with questions. SYNC automatically tries to connect with 3. enter the six-digit PIN provided Press the voice icon and say "Phone". by SYNC in the radio display. Press the phone button. 3.2 Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition "Call <name> on mobile OR cell" and the radio. Note: To scroll through the menus. manual if necessary. Phone Voice Commands 4. press 2 "Call history incoming" the up and down arrows on your audio system. Put the transmission in 1. Scroll to Add Bluetooth Device. display indicates there is no phone paired. When Find SYNC appears in the phone as the primary phone (the phone display. See your phone's system.2 your market. Put the transmission in 4. Note: SYNC can support downloading up to approximately 1000 entries per 2. and then scroll to System Settings. Put your phone into Bluetooth the up and down arrows on your audio discovery mode. press 5.

"(Phone) settings (message) notification 3 on" See Dial table below. the requested information appears in the "(Phone) settings (set) ringer 3" display to view. 4 See Menu table below. press and hold the 2 phone button or press MENU to go to the cell" phone menu. SYNC™ "PHONE" "DIAL" 2 "Call history outgoing" "411 (four-one-one)". "911" (nine-one- 2 one) "Connections" 1.4 "Menu" "Asterisk" (*) 2 "Phone book <name>" "Clear" (deletes all entered digits) "Phone book <name> at home" 2 "Delete" (deletes one digit) 2 "Plus" "Phone book <name> at office" "Star" 2 "Phone book <name> at work" "Phone book <name> on mobile OR Note: To exit dial mode. "(Phone) settings (set) phone ringer" "(Phone) settings (set) ringer 1" Phone book commands: When you ask SYNC to access things such as a "(Phone) settings (set) ringer 2" phonebook name or number. Press the phone button "(Phone) settings (set) ringer off" and say. 2 "Phone book <name> on other" "MENU" 1 This command does not require you to "(Phone) connections" say "Phone" first. "Call" to call the contact. "Battery" "Phone name" 293 C-MAX (CCG) .3 "700" (seven hundred) "Dial" "800" (eight hundred) "Go to privacy" "900" (nine hundred) "Hold" "Pound" (#) "Join" "Number <0-9>" 2. 2 "(Phone) settings (message) notification This command is not available until off" phone information is completely downloaded using Bluetooth.

Press the phone button. 294 C-MAX (CCG) . press and hold the phone button. then the features that become available. "Dial" again to initiate the call. Repeat as necessary. 1. (The display indicates In Privacy and the system transfers your call. you have more menu 1. the left arrow button. say.) Call Hold Put an active call on hold. • Ignore the call by doing nothing. Press OK when Privacy on/off appears. putting a call on hold or joining calls. Press MENU during an active call. SYNC™ "MENU" Receiving Calls "Signal" When receiving a call. Scroll to cycle through the following options: To end the call. a tone sounds as confirmation. To erase all 2. Privacy Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to your cellular phone for a more private conversation. press spoken digits. say "Clear" or press and hold OK. 3. such as desired number. When you select: You can: Mute Call? Mute the call. press the phone button. such as numbers for passwords. Scroll until the desired number appears in the display. menu options. Join Calls Join two separate calls. Making Calls Phone Options during an Active Call Press the voice icon and when prompted say: During an active call. then press OK. you can: • Answer the call by pressing the phone "Text message inbox" button. After selecting Active Call Menu. Say "Call <name>" or "Dial". "Delete" or press the left arrow button. To answer another call at this time.) 1. Press OK when Hold on/off appears. Words in ( ) are optional and do not have • Reject the call by pressing and holding to be spoken for the system to understand the phone button. To erase the last spoken digit. (SYNC supports a maximum of three callers on a multiparty call or conference call. say. Use the arrow buttons to scroll through the 2. When the system confirms the number. the command. Enter Tones Enter "tones".

received or missed calls after you connect your Bluetooth-enabled phone to SYNC. 1. outgoing or missed). access your call history and phonebook and sends text messages as well as access phone and system settings. 2. 1. Phone Menu 2. Once actively in the second call. Press OK again when the desired selection appears in the display. Call History Outgoing or Call History Missed. Press OK or the phone button to call the desired selec- tion. Scroll to cycle through: SYNC's phone menu allows you to redial a number. press MENU. then scroll through your call history options (incoming. Call History 1 Access any previously dialed. Scroll to select from Call History Incoming. Press OK again when Join Calls? appears. 1. 3. Access the desired contact through SYNC or use voice commands to place the second call. Vehicle Health Report and SYNC Services. 3. 2. Return Exit the current menu. Press the phone button. SYNC™ When you select: You can: 2. 295 C-MAX (CCG) . Call History Access your call history log. Press the phone button to call the selection. Press OK to select. 2. 1. such as 911 Assist. Press the phone button to enter the Accessing Features through the phone menu. and then scroll through your phone- book contacts. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. When you select: You can: Phone Redial Redial the last number called (if available). and press OK. and then press OK again to confirm. Press OK to make your selection. Press OK to select. Press OK to select. Press OK to select. 3. 3. Scroll to Join Calls. Phonebook Access your phonebook contacts. You can also access advanced features.

Connect.2 Access and call any contacts in your previously down- loaded phonebook. change phone book entries and automatically download your cellular phone among other features. the system organizes them into alphabetical categories. then press OK. Mobile Apps 3 Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your smartphone. Exit Phone Menu Exit the phone menu by pressing OK. If there are more than 255 entries. select your message notification. If your phonebook has fewer than 255 listings. System Settings Access Bluetooth Devices menu listings (Add. install application and system information). 2 This is a phone-dependent and speed-dependent feature. Vehicle Health Report 3 Create and receive a diagnostic report card on your vehicle. SYNC™ When you select: You can: Note: The system attempts to automatically re-download your phonebook and call history each time your phone connects to SYNC (if the auto download feature is on and your Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone supports this feature). 296 C-MAX (CCG) . 1 This is a phone-dependent feature. Scroll until the desired contact appears. when used properly. defaults. Phone Settings 1 View your phone's status. Phonebook 1. download and delete text messages. languages. SYNC Services 3 Access the SYNC Services portal where you can request various types of information. Set as Primary. 4 911 Assist Place an emergency call to a 911 operator for you after an accident. 4 This is an optional feature and available in the United States and Canada only. Text Message 1 Send. 3. On and Off. Delete) as well as Advanced menu listings (prompts. traffic reports and directions. 2. 3 This is an optional feature and available in the United States only. Press OK or the phone button. they appear alphabetically in flat file mode. master reset. set ring tones. 1. Press OK to confirm and enter.

297 C-MAX (CCG) . speed-dependent feature and is only download and delete text messages. incoming text messages. Note: You can only have one recipient per text message. send. Downloading and Deleting Your Text Messages Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. download and messages using Bluetooth to receive delete text messages. You can then also your messages. To download the inbox. Scroll to cycle through the message options in the following chart. choose to reply or forward the SYNC takes you to your inbox. Unsupported appears in the display and SYNC returns to the main menu. 2. and then press tone sounds and the display indicates you OK. Receiving a Text Message Text messaging is a phone-dependent Note: This is a phone-dependent feature. pre-defined set of 15 messages. The • Reply to Text Message: Press OK display indicates when it is finished to access and then scroll through deleting all your text messages. If your phone is compatible. Note: Forwarding a text message is a SYNC allows you to receive. Scroll to Text Message. feature. SYNC™ Text Messaging Sending. Press OK to select. Press the phone button. You have these options: Scroll to select from the following options: • Press the voice button. • Return exits the current menu when • Forward Text Message: Press OK you press OK. send. to forward the message to anyone in your Phonebook or Call History. The your message aloud as you are not able display indicates that it is downloading to view the message. SYNC the list of pre-defined messages to returns you to the text message menu. an audible 2. messages to you so that you do not have to take your eyes off the road. wait for the • Send Text Message? allows you to prompt and say "Read message" to send a new text message based on a have SYNC read the message to you. • Delete All Messages? allows you to • Press OK and scroll to choose delete current text messages from between: SYNC (not your phone). have a new message. 1. If you select Send Text Message?: You can also choose Enter Number. When it is complete. press OK to select. 1. If the system detects your phone does not support this feature. The available when your vehicle is traveling at 3 system can also read incoming text mph (5 km/h) or less. SYNC Your phone must support downloading text allows you to receive. message. press OK to select. send. • Press OK to receive and open the text • Download Unread Msgs allows you message or do nothing and the to download your unread messages message goes into your text message (only) to SYNC. When a new message arrives. Press OK again and SYNC reads messages. To delete the messages.

Press OK to select and scroll to hear Ringer 1. Be there in 10 minutes 1. 298 C-MAX (CCG) . Press the phone button. text Call me message notification. 1. 4. Enter the name of the recipient. Press OK when the contact appears and press OK again to confirm when Too funny the system asks if you would like to send the message. Accessing Your Phone Settings Pre-defined text message options These are phone-dependent features. Yes 3. You can also select Enter Number to say the desired Thanks number. Ringer 3 and Phone Ringer. press OK again to return to the phone status menu. Scroll to select from the following options: When you select: You can: Phone Status See the provider. name. I love you 6. Press OK when the desired selection Pre-defined text message options is in the display. Scroll No to cycle through Phonebook or Call Why? History entries. Be there in 20 minutes 2. Where R you? 5. Press OK to select. battery power and roaming status of your connected phone. The system sends Can't wait to see you each text message with the following signature: "This message was sent I'm stuck in traffic from my <Ford or Lincoln>". modify your phonebook and set up automatic Call U later download. Set Ringer Select which ring tone sounds during an incoming call (one of the system's or your phone's). SYNC™ 3. Press OK to enter the desired menu and scroll to select the specific I need more directions contact. Press OK to select and scroll to view the information. signal power. 2. When done. and then press OK. Your Can't talk right now phone settings allow you to access and adjust features such as your ring tone. Scroll to Phone Settings. Ringer 2.

When Auto Download On? appears. Bluetooth Devices System Settings The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you This menu provides access to your to add. Delete Phonebook: Press OK to delete the current phone book and call history. Download Phonebook: Press OK to select. * Downloading times are phone-dependent and quantity-dependent. Press OK to choose between: Add Contacts: Press OK to add more contacts from your phone book. Auto Download Automatically download your phone book each time your * phone connects to SYNC. Select Off if you do not want to download your phonebook every time your phone connects to SYNC. call history and text messages can only be accessed when your specific phone is connected to SYNC. Modify Phonebook Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add. Use the arrow buttons to scroll Bluetooth feature on and off. Press OK to select. Return Exit the current menu. 299 C-MAX (CCG) . Your phonebook. set a Bluetooth Devices and Advanced menu phone as primary as well as turn your features. it automatically deletes any changes. See your phone's manual on how to push contacts. Push the desired contact(s) on your phone. 1. Message Notification Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you when a text message arrives. Press OK to select and scroll between Message Notific- ation On and Message Notification Off. When Delete Phonebook appears. through the menu options. press OK to confirm. 2. press OK to have your phonebook automatically down- ** loaded each time. then and press OK again when Confirm Download? appears. Press OK to select. SYNC takes you back to the Phone Settings menu. additions or deletions saved since your last download. connect and delete devices. delete or download). SYNC™ When you select: You can: If your phone supports in-band ringing. ** When Auto Download is on. your phone's ring tone plays when you choose Phone Ringer.

options: If you select: You can: Add Bluetooth Device * See Using SYNC™ With Your Phone (page 291). Press OK to confirm. Scroll until you find the desired device. ** 1. phone menu 4. Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth features. SYNC attempts to connect with the primary phone at every ignition cycle. Scroll to System Settings. Set Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off. Delete Device Delete a paired phone. Press OK. Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired phones. * This is a speed-dependent feature. Press OK to select. When another phone is connected. and then press OK. Set as Primary Phone Set a previously paired phone as your primary phone. 2. Press OK. 300 C-MAX (CCG) . ** You can only connect one device at a time. the previous one is disconnected. it appears first in the list and the system marks it with an asterisk. Scroll to select from the following 2. Press OK to select and scroll to select the desired phone. SYNC™ 1. Scroll to Bluetooth Devices. Make a selection. Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. and then press OK to connect the phone. Connect Bluetooth Device Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled phone. Return Exit the current menu. When you select a phone as a primary phone. Press the phone button to enter the 3. Press OK to confirm. Press OK and scroll to select the device. Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired phones (and all information originally saved with those phones).

Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired phones (and all information originally saved with those phones). 2. perform a master reset. text messages and paired devices). 2. SYNC™ Advanced 1. Press the phone button to enter the phone menu The Advanced menu allows you to access and set prompts. Scroll to Advanced. Press OK to confirm. This selection does not erase your indexed information (phonebook. defaults. Scroll to System Settings. the display indicates that the system is updating. text messages and paired devices) and return to the factory default settings. Scroll to select from the following options: If you select: You can: Prompts Get help from SYNC by using questions. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. application and view system information. 4. Français and Español. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. System Info Access the Auto Version number as well as the FDN number. call history. Press OK to select. 2. Press OK and scroll to select. 301 C-MAX (CCG) . Press OK. Install Application? Install applications you have downloaded. languages. When complete. Master Reset Completely erase all information stored on SYNC (phonebook. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu. Press OK to select and then press OK again when Restore Defaults? appears in the display. Factory Defaults Return to the factory default settings. all of the radio displays and prompts are in the selected language. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages. helpful hints or asking you for a specific action. Press OK to confirm. 1. The display indicates when complete and SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu. call history. Press OK. If you change the language setting. Press OK to select. 2. Languages Choose between English. To turn these prompts on or off: 1. 1. Press OK to select and scroll to select between On and Off. Once selected. install an 3.

Return Exit the current menu. Dial emergency services In order for the following features to work. If before a crash. stock prices and become a projectile or get damaged more. in a crash. the system or phone may be www. To check your phone's serious injury or death after a crash. directions and information such location in your vehicle so it does not as travel. some may have trouble using this feature. * • SYNC Services : Provides access to Always place your phone in a secure traffic.ca. do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds www. damaged or non-functional. MAP Profile This is a Bluetooth component.SYNCMyRide. * This is an optional feature and available Note: Before setting this feature on. make in the United States only.com. Failure to do so may cause serious injury to someone or damage the • 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of phone which could prevent 911 Assist from an emergency. set on before the incident. is started after a previously paired phone connects. SYNC™ If you select: You can: Press OK to select.SYNCMyRide. Unless the 911 Assist setting is set on that setting applies for all paired phones. WARNINGS Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off. either a voice dial for help which could delay message plays or a display message (or response time. which can further help your phone with the exchange of text messages. the system will not 911 Assist is turned off. visit www. horoscopes. immediately to avoid delayed response your cellular phone must be compatible time which could increase the risk of with SYNC. * working properly.ca or of the crash. If you compatibility. sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy Notice later in this section for important 911 Assist information. While SYNC 911 Assist works with most cellular phones. potentially increasing the icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle risk of serious injury or death after a crash. Note: Every phone operates differently. • Vehicle Health Report : Provides a diagnostic and maintenance report Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be card of your vehicle. 302 C-MAX (CCG) . WARNINGS SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an SERVICES emergency call if you can do it yourself.syncmaroute.

SYNC will 3. If a connected cell 1. your screen or press and hold the • Off without reminder: Provides a phone button on your steering wheel. SYNC confirmation. Scroll to select between On and Off. Press the phone button to enter the phone sustains damage or loses its phone menu. and properly: then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk with the operator.SYNCMyRide. your SYNC-equipped • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone vehicle may be able to contact emergency must have the ability to make and services by dialing 911 through a paired and maintain an outgoing call at the time connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. Set On or (about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. • A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone www." display reminder only without a voice If you do not cancel the call. Canada or (page 34). attempts to dial 911. makes a successful call. SYNC 2.SYNCMyRide. because not all 911 throughout feature activation and use. systems are capable of receiving this • The 911 Assist feature must be set on information electronically. SYNC™ If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding • You must pair and connect a knee airbags and rear inflatable safety Bluetooth-enabled and compatible belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel cell phone to SYNC. 4.syncmaroute. battery power and signal strength. • The vehicle must have battery power See Supplementary Restraints System and be located in the U. emergency number. Off selections include: • SYNC says the following. before the incident. to cancel the call. a pre-recorded To make sure that 911 Assist works message plays for the 911 operator. See Roadside Emergencies (page 187). Press OK when the desired option • SYNC provides a short window of time appears in the radio display. Scroll to select 911 Assist. Before making the call: 5. press Cancel on connection at vehicle start.S.ca or must have adequate network coverage. Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or Setting 911 Assist On activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911 Assist). Be prepared to • SYNC must be powered and working provide your name. Important information about in a territory in which 911 is the airbag deployment is in this chapter.. Important information about the fuel pump In the Event of a Crash shut-off is in this chapter. will search for and try to connect to a previously paired cell phone.com. Press OK to confirm and enter the 911 then attempt to call the emergency Assist menu. Set Off appears in the display as If you fail to cancel the call.ca. can learn more about the 911 Assist feature. services. www. or a similar • Off with reminder: Provides a display message: "SYNC will attempt to call and voice reminder at phone 911. and SYNC reminder at phone connection. pump shut-off. phone number and properly at the time of the incident and location immediately. connection to SYNC during a crash. 303 C-MAX (CCG) . visit www. You of the incident.

You can also choose for SYNC Vehicle Health Report to remind you automatically to run reports at specific mileage intervals. is no fee or subscription associated with • The vehicle's battery or the SYNC Vehicle Health Report. If you do you can request a Vehicle Health Report not want to disclose this information. Failure to perform scheduled servicing. and seek repair report contains valuable information such for any damage or problem you suspect. When you turn on 911 Assist. SYNC™ 911 Assist May Not Work If Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature requires activation before use. There hardware sustains damage in a crash. Return to your not turn the feature on. but cannot replace.com to register. to use this feature. Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges may of electronically or verbally disclosing to apply when making a report. maintenance and regularly inspect your You can run a report (after your vehicle has vehicle may result in vehicle damage and been running a minimum of 60 seconds) serious injury. the fuel pump shut-off.com to view your report. do (inside your vehicle).SYNCMyRide.SYNCMyRide. United States. After registering.com. appropriate emergency services. as: Vehicle Health Report supplements. regularly diagnostic report card. Before running a report. review the Vehicle Health 911 Assist Privacy Notice Report Privacy Notice. it may Note: In order to allow a break-in period for disclose to emergency services that your your vehicle. by pressing the voice button and saying "Vehicle health report". you may not be able to create vehicle has been in a crash involving the a Vehicle Health Report until your vehicle deployment of an airbag or activation of odometer has reached 200 miles. Vehicle Health Report • Scheduled maintenance only monitors certain systems • Open recalls and Field Service Actions electronically monitored by your vehicle and will not monitor or report the status • Items noted during vehicle inspections of any other system. To run a report using the phone button: 304 C-MAX (CCG) . WARNING The system allows you to check your Always follow scheduled vehicle's overall health in the form of a maintenance instructions. but you must register system has no power. account at www. 911 operators your vehicle location or other Register for Vehicle Health Report and set details about your vehicle or crash to assist your report preferences at 911 operators to provide the most www. • The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle Note: This feature may not function are the ones paired and connected to properly if you have enabled caller ID the system. or pressing the Note: This feature is only available in the phone button. (such as brake lining by an authorized dealer that still need wear).SYNCMyRide. blocking on your cellular phone. The vehicle health inspect your vehicle. Visit • Your cellular phone or 911 Assist www. normal maintenance and • Vehicle diagnostic information vehicle inspection.

SYNC™ 1.SYNCMyRide.SYNCMyRide. Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice SYNC Services: Traffic. See Note: This feature does not function www. Scroll to select from the following menu. Make sure Statement) for more information. open recalls and other field service actions and vehicle inspec- tion items that still need servicing from an authorized dealer. Directions & Information (TDI) When you create a Vehicle Health Report. and Privacy blocking on your cellular phone. Scroll to select from: a health report at certain mileage intervals.SYNCMyRide. Run Report? Press OK for SYNC to run a health report of your vehicle's diagnostic systems and send the results to Ford where it combines with scheduled maintenance information. your cellular phone is not blocking caller ID before using SYNC Services. Ford Motor Company may collect your Note: SYNC Services requires activation cellular phone number (to process your before use. Subscription collect more vehicle information. 305 C-MAX (CCG) . information. Visit www. Standard phone updates to Vehicle Health Report may also and message rates may apply. Ford may may be required. * You must first turn this feature on before you can select the desired mileage interval. Vehicle health report options User Preferences: Press OK Automatic Reports: Press OK to and select On or Off. do not run the feature or set SYNC Services.com. options: 2.com to report request) and diagnostic information register and check your eligibility for about your vehicle. www.com (Vehicle Health properly if you have enabled caller ID Report Terms and Conditions. and then press OK. You must also have the use your vehicle information it collects for active SYNC Services Bluetooth-enabled any purpose. 7500 or 10000-mile intervals and press OK to make your selection. Scroll to select Vehicle Health.* Mileage Intervals: Press OK. Scroll to select between 5000. See Using SYNC™ With up your Vehicle Health Report profile at Your Phone (page 291). Certain versions or complimentary services. to select and enter the Select On to have SYNC automatically prompt you to run menu. and use. Press the phone button to enter phone 3. Return: Press OK to exit the menu. If you do not want to disclose cellular phone paired and connected to the your cellular phone number or vehicle system in order to connect to.

traffic phone menu. and initiates an outgoing call to SYNC therefore. do not subscribe or use the Directions. If you need further assistance in finding a location you can say "Operator" at any time within a 306 C-MAX (CCG) . Further. Say. please visit www. Do not follow the route desired service. The display indicates may collect and record call details and voice the system is connecting. Make your driving decisions based on your 3. to provide the services you request. Press the phone button to enter the provide you with the directions. such as Traffic or Conditions. "Services" to return to the Services give you personalized traffic reports. "Help". Connecting to SYNC Services Using To find the closest business or type of Voice Commands business to your current location. see SYNC Services Terms and Conditions at 4. comprehensive map and traffic data. or business searches you request. SYNC™ Note: The driver is ultimately responsible 2. SYNC initiates the call to the www. traffic 4. You can also say. Any connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular navigation features provided are only an aid. my choices?" to receive a list of SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle available services from which to sensors. Ford or its service providers to collect your 5. just say "Business search" and then 1.com. say "Services". place you in an my choices?" to receive a list of unsafe situation. communications. "Search near me". You can also say. travel direction and speed to help 1. This for the safe operation of the vehicle. Maps choose. or if you would be directed available services from which to into an area that you consider unsafe. Press the voice button. reports. Press OK.SYNCMyRide. "Services" to return to the Services conditions or driving conditions. For more information. sports. weather and more. Once you connect to the service. Scroll to Services. more. such as Traffic or suggestions if doing so would result in an Directions. to 6. 3. When prompted. used by this system may be inaccurate because of errors. say. news. "Help". main menu or for help. 2. "What are unsafe or illegal maneuver. say. If you do not want Services portal. say "Directions" or "Business search". Press OK to confirm and enter the for continuous improvement. follow vehicle travel information or other the voice prompts to request the information identified in the Terms and desired service. follow observations of local conditions and existing the voice prompts to request the traffic regulations. the service Services menu. or to learn 1. business search. Say. changes in roads. must evaluate whether it is safe Services using your paired and to follow the suggested directions.SYNCMyRide. main menu or for help. "What are service.com. precise turn-by-turn directions. Once you connect to the service. Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions For a complete list of services. When connected to SYNC Services. integrated GPS technology and choose. Note: When you connect. phone. the service uses Connecting to SYNC Services Using GPS technology and advanced vehicle the Phone Menu sensors to collect your vehicle's current location.

Traffic and Directions features do not function properly but information services and the 411 connect and text message features are available. SYNC automatically asks addresses by street address or by if you want the route updated. destination. the phone call automatically ends. 2. Portable Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth- enabled cellular phone number. You can save address points such as work or home. SYNC™ Directions or Business search to speak 3. The system may or say "Route summary" or "Route prompt you to speak with an operator status" to view the Route Summary when it has difficulty matching your turn list or the Route Status ETA. by name or by category. Press and hold the phone button on destination. You voice request. For more information on Operator Assist.com/support. not your VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). After the route download is complete. Once you select your the steering wheel. SYNC Services quick tips Personalizing You can personalize your Services feature to provide quicker access to your most used or favorite information. Just use the number on your phone's call history. visit Disconnecting from SYNC Services www. "Yes" when prompted and the system Operator Assist is a feature of your sends a new route to your vehicle. Say "Goodbye" from the SYNC current vehicle location.SYNCMyRide. You can learn more about personalization by logging onto www. calculates a Services main menu. name or specific street intersections. Follow the voice prompts to select your 1. You can even access your account outside your vehicle. residential If you miss a turn. route based on current traffic conditions and sends it back to your vehicle. you can select with a live operator. You then receive audible and visual driving instructions as you travel toward your destination. Push to interrupt Press the voice button at any time (while connected to SYNC Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio clip (such as a sports report) and say your voice command. 307 C-MAX (CCG) . SYNC Services subscription.com. You can pair and connect your phone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and continue enjoying your personalized services. Just say. assist you by searching for businesses cancel the route or update the route. While on an active route.SYNCMyRide. The live operator can can also turn voice guidance on or off. the system uploads your 2. You can also save favorite information like sports teams or a news category.

and At any time when a track is playing.2 5. make sure you switch it on prompted. 1. say "USB". Press OK. SYNC also supports can press the voice icon and ask the audio formats. you most USB drives. You can now play music by saying any "Connections" of the appropriate voice commands. "Play all" 3. "Pause" To Connect Using the System Menu "Play" 1. WAV system "What's playing?". "Autoplay on" 3. of the following: To Connect Using Voice Commands "USB" 1. "Autoplay off" 2. See the media voice commands. Press the voice icon and when prompted. When power switch.2 4. then any E142599 before plugging it in. Press AUX and then MENU to enter the media menu. say "USB". • Similar Music Note: The system is capable of indexing up • Return to 30. Depending on how many digital media "Play genre <name>" files are on your connected device. such as MP3. reads the metadata tags (if populated) of the playing track to you. SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any What's Playing? digital media player including: iPod®. SYNC™ USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR Press OK and scroll through selections of: MEDIA PLAYER • Play All • Albums You can access and play music from your • Genres digital music player over your vehicle's speaker system using the system's media • Playlists menu or voice commands. Plug the device into the USB port. Scroll to USB. WMA. Scroll to Select Source. The system and ACC.000 songs. 308 C-MAX (CCG) .2 2. such as artist and album. "Play album <name>" 1. Press OK. When indexing is complete. "Play artist <name>" 1. Zune™. You can also • Tracks sort and play your music by specific • Explore USB categories. the "Play next track" screen returns to the Play menu. Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the USB Port Media Voice Commands Note: If your digital media player has a Press the voice icon. Plays from device players. 3 Indexing may appear in the radio "Play next folder" display. Plug the device into the USB port.

2 "Refine song <name>" 1 <name> is a dynamic listing. 3 1.2 "Play track <name>" "Shuffle off" "Refine album <name>" 1.2 1.2 1. "Repeat off" 2 This voice command is not available until "Repeat on" indexing is complete. Voice command guide "Autoplay" Turn autoplay on to listen to music processed during indexing. if available. meaning that "Refine track <name>" 1. such as a group. "Search genre" or "Play The system searches all the data from your indexed music genre" and. artist or song. You can only play genres of music that are present in the GENRE metadata tags that you have on your digital media player. begins to play the chosen type of music. 309 C-MAX (CCG) .2 "Similar music" "Refine artist <name>" "What's playing?" 1.2 "Shuffle on" 1.2 1. Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing process * to finish before the system plays any of your music. SYNC™ "USB" "USB" 1.2 "Play playlist <name>" "Search artist <name>" 3 1.2 This voice command is only available in "Search album <name>" folder mode.2 "Play song <name>" "Search track <name>" 1.2 "Play previous folder" "Search genre <name>" "Play previous track" "Search song <name>" 1.2 it could be the name of anything. "Similar music" The system compiles a playlist and then plays music similar to what is currently playing from the USB port using indexed metadata information.

The system searches for specific artist. If you then select Play. Press the voice icon. Select Source Select and play music from your USB port. For example. then any of the The media menu allows you to select your following: media source. You can also choose to Explore USB to view the supported digital music files on your playing device. 310 C-MAX (CCG) . if you asked to search and play all music by a certain artist. how to play your music (such as by artist. SYNC™ Voice command guide "Search" or "Play" artist. genre. say. "BLUETOOTH AUDIO" and also to add. album. Media Menu Features "Bluetooth audio". "Refine" This allows you to make your previous command more specific. connect or delete devices. the system 1 indexes any readable media files. Once connected. When prompted. track. the system only plays music from that specific album. * Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs the system needs to process. "Connections" 1. "Refine album" and choose a specific album from the list to view. SYNC USB: Press OK to access music plugged into your USB port. track or album track or album information from the music indexed through the USB port. genre. shuffle or repeat). Press AUX and then MENU to enter the media menu. "Pause" 2. playlist. You can also plug in devices to charge them (if supported by your device). auxiliary input jack (line in) or stream music from your Bluetooth-enabled phone. you could then say. Scroll to cycle through: "Play" "Play next track" "Play previous track" When you select: You can: Play Menu Play your music by artist. similar music or play all music.

you must select Play All in the play menu and then select Shuffle. Shuffle: Press OK to shuffle available media files in the current playlist. you can press SEEK to play the previous or next track. 311 C-MAX (CCG) . Press SEEK to play the 3 previous or next track. Media Settings Choose to shuffle or repeat your music and select your Autoplay settings. they remain on you turn them off. Repeat: Press OK to repeat any song. Mobile Apps Interact with SYNC-capable mobile applications on your smartphone. Once you turn these selections on. SYNC Line In: Press OK to select and play music from your 2 portable music player over your vehicle's speakers. SYNC™ When you select: You can: Bluetooth Audio: This is a phone-dependent feature that allows you to stream music playing on your Bluetooth- enabled phone. Autoplay: Turn autoplay on to listen to music processed during indexing. If supported by your device. Turn autoplay off to allow the indexing process to finish before the system plays any of your 4 music. To shuffle all media tracks.

you have the following Note: If your digital media player has a options: power switch. If there are more than 255. one at a time in numerical order. Artists Sort all indexed media by artist. are media files. Scroll to Play. On and Off. Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music separately. The first track title appears in the display. Press OK to select. Press OK. Delete) as well as Advanced menu listings (prompts. 312 C-MAX (CCG) . 3 Some digital media players require both USB and line in ports to stream data and music separately 4 Indexing times can vary from device to device and with regard to the number of songs the system needs to process. SYNC is capable of indexing thousands of average size media and notifies you if it reaches the maximum indexing file size. languages. Once selected. 1. you cannot listen to music until the system finishes indexing media. If there are fewer than 255 indexed artists. you cannot access the line in feature. your media by artist. Exit Media Menu Press OK to exit the media menu. make sure you switch it on before plugging it in. playlist. the track. you can listen to media processed during indexing. the system lists them alphabetically in flat file mode. If there is on your USB device. defaults. 1 The time required to complete this depends on the size of the media the system needs to index. If autoplay is on. Connect. 2 If you have already connected a device to the USB port. When you select: You can: Play All Play all indexed media (tracks) from your playing device in flat file mode. album. the system categorizes them alphabetically. the system lists and then play all artists and tracks alphabetically. Set as Primary. master reset. This menu allows you to select and play 2. similar music or even to explore what display indicates there is no media. Press AUX and then MENU to enter Accessing Your Play Menu the media menu. SYNC™ When you select: You can: System Settings Access Bluetooth Device menu listings (Add. install application and system information). If autoplay is off. genre. If there are no media files to access.

Press OK. Press OK to enter the album menu and select from playing all albums or from any individual indexed album. the system categorizes them alphabetically. SYNC lists the genres alphabetically in flat file mode. . Scroll to choose the desired artist. the system categorizes them alphabetically. Scroll to select the desired genre. Press OK. the system categorizes them alphabetically. You can select to play All Artists or any indexed artist. Genres Sort indexed music by genre (category) type. Press OK. the system lists them alphabetically in flat file mode. The system uses the metadata information of each song to compile a playlist for you. Similar Music * Play music similar to what is currently playing from the USB port. Scroll to select the desired playlist. . If there are more than 255.ASX. 2. Playlists Access your playlists (from formats. If there are more than 255. 2. 1. Press OK.WPL or . Press OK. Explore USB Explore all supported digital media on your media device connected to the USB port. Press OK to select. Scroll to choose the desired album.M3U. 313 C-MAX (CCG) . If there are fewer than 255 indexed albums. 1. 2. SYNC lists your tracks alphabetically in flat file mode. 2. If there are more than 255. SYNC™ When you select: You can: 1. 1. Press OK to select. The system lists your playlists alphabetic- ally in flat-file mode. Press OK to select. Tracks Search for and play a specific indexed track. Scroll to explore indexed media on your flash drive. Albums Sort all indexed media by albums. Press OK to select. the system categorizes them alphabetic- ally. 2. 2. Scroll to select the desired track. such as . other files saved are not visible. Press OK to select. You can only view media content which is compatible with SYNC. 1.MTP). 1. If there are more than 255.

if your metadata tags are not populated. Scroll until you find the desired device. 1. they are available in voice recognition. 1. The system creates a new list of similar songs and begins playing. Delete All Devices Delete all previously paired devices. 1. Delete Device Delete a paired media device. the tracks are not available in voice recognition. Set Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth feature on and off. Follow the directions in your phone's manual to put your phone into discovery mode. play menu or similar music. However. 2. SYNC™ When you select: You can: Press OK to select. Scroll to Bluetooth Devices. and then press OK to connect the device. Bluetooth Devices 2. When you select: You can: Add Bluetooth Device * Pair more devices to the system. The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you to add. play menu browsing and similar music. 3. connect and delete a device as turn the Bluetooth feature on and off. Scroll to System Settings. Make a selection. 3. 1. When prompted on your phone's six-digit display. * With certain playing devices. Press OK. A six-digit PIN appears in the display. and then press OK. This feature does not include tracks with incomplete metadata information. The system places Unknown items into any unpopulated metadata tag. if you place these tracks onto your playing device in "Mass Storage Device Mode". Press OK and scroll to select the device. Press OK to confirm. Press OK to select and press OK again when Find SYNC appears in the display. Press OK and scroll to toggle between On and Off. Press OK to select and view a list of previously paired devices. 314 C-MAX (CCG) . Press AUX and then MENU to enter System Settings the media menu. Press OK. Connect Bluetooth Device Connect a previously paired Bluetooth-enabled device. 2. ** 1. 2. Return Exit the current menu. enter the PIN. 2.

When you select: You can: Prompts Have SYNC guide you by asking questions. The displays and prompts are in the selected language. 2. the display indicates that the system is updating. and set prompts. text messages and paired devices). Press OK to confirm. 1. call history. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. 3. Press OK. Languages Choose from English. Press OK to select and scroll to select between on or off. Press OK to select and then scroll through the languages. 1. 2. When complete. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu. Return Exit the current menu. perform a master reset. Scroll to Advanced. Press OK to select. Press OK again when Restore Defaults? appears in the display. Press OK. defaults and 3. If you change the language setting. * This is a speed-dependent feature. SYNC takes you back to the Advanced menu. SYNC™ When you select: You can: Press OK to select. Press AUX and then MENU to enter Advanced the media menu. Scroll to System Settings. 1. Press OK when the desired selection appears in the display. 2. languages. Français or Español. 1. helpful hints or ask you for a specific action. ** Setting Bluetooth to off disconnects all Bluetooth devices and turns off all Bluetooth features. 3. The Advanced menu allows you to access 2. 315 C-MAX (CCG) . Factory Defaults Return to the factory default settings. This selection does not erase your indexed information (phonebook.

I can hear the This may be a possible Try turning off the device. call history. feature. SYNC is not able to down. resetting the device. 316 C-MAX (CCG) . below. Return Exit the current menu. register your SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING account and set preferences as well as access a customer representative via an Your SYNC system is easy to use. resetting the device or removing the device's battery. Use the website at any time to check your phone's compatibility. call. online chat (during certain hours). The audio control settings Review your phone's manual ground noise during a phone on your phone may be about audio adjustments. phone malfunction. · Try pushing your phone- book contacts to SYNC by using the Add Contacts feature. Visit should questions arise.SYNCMyRide.syncmaroute.ca or www. · This is a phone-dependent · Go to the website to review load my phonebook. your phone's compatibility. removing the device's battery. Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) There is excessive back. cannot hear me.SYNCMyRide. SYNC™ When you select: You can: Master Reset Completely erase all information stored on SYNC (all phonebook. During a call. See the web site for more information. www. then trying again. However. other person but they phone malfunction. then trying again. Application Download new software applications (if available) and then load the desired applications through your USB port.ca for more information. · Use the SYNCmyphone feature available on the website. · This may be a possible · Try turning off the device.com. text messages and all paired devices) and return to the factory default settings. affecting SYNC perform- ance. see the tables www.

Text messaging is not · This is a phone-dependent · Go to the website to review working on SYNC. feature. 317 C-MAX (CCG) . phone malfunction. · Update your device's firm- ware. feature. · Check the security and auto accept and prompt always settings relative to the SYNC Bluetooth connection on your phone. your phone's compatibility. your phone's compatibility. try moving them to the device memory. · This may be a possible · Try turning off the device. · Try deleting your device from SYNC. then trying again. resetting the device or removing the device's battery. · Turn off the Auto phone- book download setting. resetting the device or removing the device's battery. SYNC. · Remove any pictures or special ring tones associ- ated with the missing contact. then trying again. · This may be a possible · Try turning off the device. book contacts to SYNC by phonebook in SYNC is using the Add Contacts empty or missing contacts. · If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card. phone malfunction. SYNC™ Phone issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) The system says Phonebook This may be a limitation on · Try pushing your phone- Downloaded but the your phone's capability. I am having trouble · This is a phone-dependent · Go to the website to review connecting my phone to feature. deleting SYNC from your device and trying again.

which does not allow it to play. resetting the device. play on your device. song title. feature. Directions and Information) issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) I received a text that I did · You did not activate your · This is a free feature. to change the USB settings · The file may be corrupted. SYNC™ USB and media issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) I am having trouble This may be a possible · Try turning off the device. connecting my device. device malfunction. Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic. album or genre · Some devices require you information. VIN (vehicle identification number) listed. · You may have the wrong to use it. from mass storage to MTP · The song may have copy. details are populated. contain the proper artist. class. · Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable. connect the device to SYNC · The device is not and that you have pressed connected. SYNC does not recognize · Your music files may not · Make sure that all song music that is on my device. · Make sure you insert the USB cable properly into the device and the USB port. Bluetooth audio does not · This is a phone-dependent Make sure you properly stream. but not activate Vehicle Health account on the website. · Make sure that the device does not have an auto- install program or active security settings. 318 C-MAX (CCG) . you must first register online Report. SYNC does not recognize This is a device limitation. then trying again. removing the device's battery. vehicle during very hot or cold temperatures. Make sure you are not my device when I turn on the leaving the device in your car. right protection.

319 C-MAX (CCG) . · Your phone has ID blocker to use it. and retrieve the report. Log back in. I am unable to retrieve the The preferred dealer When you register your report on the website. correctly. try selecting another dealer and logging out. preferred dealer. I heard a commercial when · You did not activate this · This is a free feature. phone's compatibility. signal strength and that your Bluetooth volume level has been turned up. SYNC™ Vehicle Health Report and Services (Traffic. or I information did not load account. If it already lists a dealer. active. Direc. change it back to your preferred dealer. · Try deleting your phone and performing a clean pairing. you must choose a receive a system error. number in your account on · Bad signal strength. Directions and Information) issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) · Make sure that your VIN is correctly listed in your account. you must first register online tions and Information. the website. · Turn off ID blocker on your phone as the system recog- nizes you by your phone number. · Make sure the currently connected phone is the same one that is registered on your SYNCMyRide account. I am unable to submit a · This could be due to your · Update your cellular report. but I tried to use Traffic. · You did not activate your · Make sure you have full phone on the website. phone for this service.

For example. If you say · The system may not be "Play Artist Prince". wrong voice commands. SYNC does not understand · You may be using the · Review the media voice the name of a song or artist. commands at the beginning contact when I want to · You may be saying the of the phone section. SYNC™ Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) SYNC does not understand · You may be using the · Review the phone voice what I am saying. say "Call Joe special characters. are listed. exactly as listed. such as "California remix featuring Jennifer Nettles". · If the song titles are in all CAPS. name differently than the · Make sure you are saying way you saved it. by Prince and the Revolution or Prince and the New Power Generation. SYNC does not understand · You may be using the · Review the Phone voice or is calling the wrong wrong voice commands. · Do not use special charac- ters in the title. 320 C-MAX (CCG) . · Be aware that SYNC's microphone is either in your rear view mirror or in the headliner just above the windshield. make a call. LOLA requires you to say "L-O-L-A". Wilson". if book may be very short and you save a contact as Joe similar. wrong voice commands. · Make sure you are saying the complete title. the reading the name the same system does not play music way you are saying it. commands and the media · You may be speaking too voice commands at the soon or at the wrong time. commands at the beginning · You may be saying the of the media section. or they may contain Wilson. the contacts exactly as they · Contacts in your phone. The system does not recognize them. name differently than the · Say the song or artist way you saved it. beginning of their respective sections. you have to spell them.

as the system does not recog- nize them. JAKE requires you to say "Call J- A-K-E". 321 C-MAX (CCG) . · Do not use special charac- ters. such as 123 or ICE. you list full names. · If a contact is in CAPS. SYNC™ Voice command issues Issue Possible cause(s) Possible solution(s) · Your phonebook contacts · The system works better if may be in CAPS. you have to spell it. such as "Joe Wilson" rather than "Joe".

Your primary responsibility is the safe operation of your vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-held device while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. crash and injury. Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of electronic devices while driving. A B G F E D H C E161890 A Phone B Navigation (or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation) C Climate D Settings E EV Information F Home G Information H Entertainment 322 C-MAX (CCG) . MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) GENERAL INFORMATION WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control. We strongly recommend that you use extreme caution when using any device that may take your focus off the road.

Depending on your vehicle’s option package and software. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) This system uses a four-corner strategy to • Auto provide quick access to several vehicle • Dual features and settings. climate control and • A/C navigation system. The touchscreen provides easy interaction with your cellular • Passenger Settings phone. The corners display any • Defrost active modes within those menus. • Vehicle PHONE • Settings Press to select any of the following: • Help • Phone EV Information • Quick Dial Press to access features • Phonebook specific to your hybrid or plug-in E161716 • History hybrid electric vehicle. such as phone status or the climate temperature. Press to select any of the following: Note: Your system is equipped with a • Clock feature that allows you to access and control audio features for 30 minutes after • Display you switch the ignition off (and no doors • Sound open). • Messaging HOME • Settings Press to access your home E142613 NAVIGATION screen. Press to select any of the following: your screens may vary in appearance from • My Home the descriptions in this section. Check with an authorized • Previous Destinations dealer for availability. • Point of Interest INFORMATION • Emergency • Street Address E142608 • Intersection Press to select any of the following: • City Center • Services • Map • Travel Link • Edit Route Cancel Route • Alerts CLIMATE • Calendar Press to select any of the following: • Apps • Driver Settings ENTERTAINMENT • Recirculated Air 323 C-MAX (CCG) . multimedia. Your • Favorites features may also be limited depending on your market. SETTINGS Note: Some features are not available while E142607 your vehicle is moving.

call: 1-800-392-3673. • A/V In Midrange. Monday-Saturday. soft cloth such as one used • Use your bare finger to touch the center for cleaning glasses. but you see • CD the media change in the lower left • USB status bar. alcohol onto the display. If dirt or fingerprints of a touch-control graphic. Times are subject to change due to • VOL: Control the volume of playing holidays. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Press to select any of the following: • Eject: Eject a CD from the • AM entertainment system. Do not use detergent or any type of solvent to clean • Make sure your hands are clean and the display. features off and on. • Keep metal and other conductive Support material away from the surface of the touchscreen as this may cause The SYNC support team is available to electronic interference (for example. Treble. call: 1-800-565-3673. • Seek and Tune buttons: Use as you normally would in media modes. Use a clean. you may also have these controls In the United States. Occupancy Using the Touch-Sensitive Mode and Speed Compensated Controls on Your System Volume. 324 C-MAX (CCG) . To get the best • Hazard flasher: Switch the hazard performance from the touch-sensitive flashers off and on. than the one you meant to turn on). DSP (Digital Signal Processing). Do not pour or spray operation of a nearby control. (Your vehicle may not have all of these sound options. The • SIRIUS screen does not change. controls: Cleaning the Touchscreen Display • Do not press hard on the controls. just touch the graphic with your finger. 10:30am-7:30pm EST. dry. media. • FM • SOURCE: Touch the word repeatedly to see all available media modes. • Fan: Control the speed of the climate system fan. • BT Stereo • SOUND: Touch the word to access the Sound menu where you can adjust • SD Card settings such as: Bass. Balance and Fade. apply a small amount of off-center of the graphic may affect alcohol to the cloth. Depending on your vehicle and option Sunday. on your bezel: • Power: Switch the media or climate In Canada. help you with any questions you are not inadvertently turning on a feature other able to answer on your own. They are sensitive to light touch.) To turn a feature on and off. 8:30am-9:00pm EST. Touching are still visible. package.

operation of your vehicle. out of the way. • Screens crowded with information. crash and information. movie times or ski conditions. See the following chart for more specific examples. while driving and encourage the use of voice-operated systems when possible. system. We strongly recommend that • For your safety. a navigation destination or editing information. Their use is device that may take your focus off the limited to when your vehicle is traveling road. keyboard is restricted. Restricted features Cellular Phone Pairing a Bluetooth phone Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phonebook contacts (from a USB) List entries are limited for phone contacts and recent phone call entries System Functionality Editing the keypad code Enabling Valet Mode 325 C-MAX (CCG) . • All lists are limited so the user can view fewer entries (such as phone contacts or recent phone call entries). SIRIUS Travel Link sports or damaged. split ratings. some SYNC functions you use extreme caution when using any are speed-dependent. so they do not interfere • Any action that requires you to use a with the operation of pedals. Speed-restricted Features Make sure you are aware of all applicable local laws that may affect the use of Some features of this system may be too electronic devices while driving. such as entering compartments or safe driving abilities. • Do not operate playing devices if the such as Point of Interest reviews and power cords or cables are broken. seats. See your Driving while distracted can result in device's user guide for further loss of vehicle control. Place cords and cables scores. See an authorized dealer. We recommend Make sure that you review your device's against the use of any hand-held device manual before using it with SYNC. Your primary responsibility is the safe at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). injury. difficult to use while your vehicle is moving so they are restricted from use unless your • Do not attempt to service or repair the vehicle is stationary. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Safety Information • Do not leave playing devices in your vehicle during extreme conditions as it WARNING could cause them damage.

For further privacy information. a media content. if you Company and Ford of Canada do not connect a media device. or where required by law short development log of approximately enforcement. If you no longer plan to use phone. other government 10 minutes of all recent system activity. Photos and Graphics Playing video Editing the screen's wallpaper or adding new wallpaper Text Messages Composing text messages Viewing received text messages Editing preset text messages Navigation Using the keyboard to enter a destination Demo navigation route Adding or editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas The cellular profile. or other third parties acting The log profile and other system data may with lawful authority. Ford Motor connected to the system. authorities. In addition. we recommend more cellular features and operating more you perform a Master Reset to erase all efficiently. this profile stored information. 326 C-MAX (CCG) . Vehicle Health Report. Among other things. the system access the system data for any purpose creates and retains an index of supported other than as described absent consent. The system also records a court order. Directions and Information. including history special equipment and access to your of calls when your cell phone was not vehicle's SYNC module. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Restricted features Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active Wi-Fi and Wireless Editing wireless settings Editing the list of wireless networks Videos. text messages (read and System data cannot be accessed without unread). media device index. the system creates a profile within when the cellular phone or media player your vehicle that links to that cellular is connected. independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada. Other parties may be used to improve the system and help seek to access the information diagnose any problems that may occur. and call history. Privacy Information and development log remain in your vehicle unless you delete them and are When you connect a cellular phone to generally accessible only in your vehicle SYNC. and Traffic. This profile helps in offering you the system or your vehicle. may contain data about your cellular phone book. see the sections on 911 Assist.

Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right side of your steering wheel to scroll • In Efficiency Leaves mode. Press OK to exit The selection menu expands and different the menu. • If your vehicle is equipped with E130248 Navigation. select memory presets and make some adjustments. • In Phone mode. • Press the right arrow to enter the mode. you can accept or reject an incoming call. options appear. you can view the current route or activate a route. You can use your steering wheel controls to view and make minor adjustments to active modes without taking your hands off the wheel. you can through the available modes: learn how your vehicle informs you of your driving efficiency. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Accessing and Adjusting Modes Through Your Right Vehicle Information Display E145459 The display is located on the right side of your instrument cluster (A). change the audio source. • Press the up and down arrows to scroll through the modes. you can view what is now playing. 327 C-MAX (CCG) . For example: • In Entertainment mode.

Helpful Hints How to Use Voice Commands with Your System • Make sure the interior of your vehicle is as quiet as possible. press the Help interaction (voice settings). This allows you to keep your hands on the wheel and focus on what is in front of you. Success. recognizing spoken commands. the middle "Main menu" of the compass graphic displays west. Wind noise from Press the voice icon. • After pressing the voice icon. Failed. What Can I Say? The system provides feedback through To access the available voice commands audible tones. words and current voice session. prompts. Any command spoken prior to this does not register with the system. questions and for the current session. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) • Press the left or right arrows to make adjustments within the chosen mode. not true direction (for example. 328 C-MAX (CCG) . bar indicating the status of the voice "Help" to hear a list of possible voice session (such as Listening. (confirmation prompts) when it is not sure • Say. "Previous page" Using Voice Recognition "What can I say?" This system helps you control many "Help" features using voice commands. After the open windows and road vibrations may tone. if the vehicle is traveling west. during a voice session Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with "Cancel" Navigation. speak your command prevent the system from correctly E142599 clearly. you can see the compass graphic. north displays to the left of west though its true "Next page" direction is to the right of west). These commands can be said at any time • Press OK to confirm your selection. icons may appear in the lower left status • Press the voice icon. do one of the spoken confirmations depending on the following: situation and the chosen level of • During a voice session. commands associated with your When using voice commands. say. Paused or Try Again). Compass appears in the display instead of Navigation. The compass "Go back" displays the direction in which the vehicle "List of commands" is traveling. "What can I say?" for an of your request or when there are multiple on-screen listing of the possible voice possible responses to your request. icon (?) in the lower left status bar of The system also asks short questions the screen. After the tone. wait until after the tone sounds and Listening appears before saying a command. commands. If you press the right "Exit" arrow to go into the Compass menu.

* This command is only available when Accessing a List of Available Commands your vehicle is equipped with the • If you use the touchscreen. Voice Settings Available voice commands Voice settings allow you to customize the "Audio list of commands" level of system interaction. without long pauses Available voice commands between words. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) • Speak naturally. ** "Sirius satellite list of commands" • Phone and Media Candidate Lists: Candidate lists are lists of possible * "Travel link list of commands" results from your voice commands. * "Navigation list of commands" • Confirmation Prompts: The system uses these short questions to confirm "Phone list of commands" your voice request. The system "SD card list of commands" may still occasionally ask you to confirm settings. To access these settings using the touchscreen: 1. Command List. you can interrupt the "Voice settings list of commands" system while it is speaking by pressing "Help" the voice icon. After the tone. Select from: 329 C-MAX (CCG) . If turned off. • At any time. subscription. ** This command is only available when • If you use the steering wheel control. press the navigation system. Press the Settings icon > Settings > Voice Control. help and feedback. The system defaults to standard "Bluetooth audio list of commands" interaction that uses candidate lists and confirmation prompts as these provide the "Browse list of commands" highest level of guidance and feedback. speak your command clearly. you have an active SIRIUS satellite radio press the voice icon. The system creates these lists when it has "USB list of commands" the same confidence level of several "Voice instructions list of commands" options based on your voice command. "CD list of commands" • Interaction Mode: Novice mode provides detailed interaction and "Climate control list of commands" guidance while the advanced mode "List of commands" has less audible interaction and more tone prompts. 2. the system simply makes a best guess as "Radio list of commands" to what you requested. and the navigation Settings icon > Help > Voice system SD card is in the card slot.

This is available only when the "Confirmation prompts off" system displays a list of candidates generated during a voice session. Press the voice icon. For "Confirmation prompts on" example. Wait for the "Help" prompt "Please say a command". Say any of the following commands: Your voice system has a dual mode feature which allows you to switch between using Voice settings using voice commands voice commands and making on-screen selections. "Interaction mode novice" SETTINGS A B C D E F E161968 330 C-MAX (CCG) . "Phone candidate lists off" To access these settings using voice "Phone candidate lists on" commands: 1. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) • Interaction Mode Voice settings using voice commands • Confirmation Prompts "Media candidate lists off" • Media Candidate Lists • Phone Candidate Lists "Media candidate lists on" • Voice Control Volume. Another tone sounds to let you know Using Voice Commands with the the system is listening. when entering in a street address "Interaction mode advanced" or trying to call a contact from the phone you paired to the system. Touchscreen Options 2.

Press + and .to adjust the time. Once your vehicle • Brightness allows you to make the acquires the signal. 331 C-MAX (CCG) . "Display settings". touchscreen. to access and make Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you. Clock Press the Settings icon > Note: You cannot manually set the date. The system automatically saves any updates you make to the settings. automatically change based on the 2. next to the time and date. E142607 • Mode allows you to set the screen to a certain brightness or have the system 1. the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature. your vehicle needs to acquire a GPS signal to update the clock. access and adjust the E142607 display. It appears at the top center of the touchscreen. You can also turn the outside air temperature display off and on. Press the Settings icon > Clock. minutes for the update to display the correct • Auto DIM. it may take a few screen display brighter or dimmer. sound and vehicle You can adjust the touchscreen display settings as well as access settings for through the touchscreen or by pressing the specific modes or the help feature. say. and changing the Auto Dim Manual Offset feature. Display. you mode. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) A Clock B Display C Sound D Vehicle E Settings F Help Under this menu. outside light level. E142607 adjustments using the Note: If the battery has been disconnected. lets you use time. When set to Off. voice button on your steering wheel controls and when prompted. adjustments such as 12-hour or 24-hour • If you select AUTO or NIGHT. screen brightness does not change. when set to On. activate GPS time synchronization have the options of turning the and have the system automatically update display's Auto Dim feature on or off new time zones. you can set Display your clock. or turn the display From this screen. you can also make other off.

. and then follow the • Enable Valet Mode system prompts to upload your • Charge Port Light Ring. E142607 Rear View Camera This menu allows you to access settings for your rear view camera. Midrange • Edit Wallpaper Treble • You can have your touchscreen Set Balance and Fade display the default photo or upload your own. photographs. then select from the E142607 Your system allows you to upload and view following: up to 32 photos. Note: Photographs with extremely large Vehicle dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not be compatible and appear as a blank Press the Settings icon > (black) image on the display. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) • Auto Dim Manual Offset allows you to adjust screen dimming as the Sound settings outside lighting conditions change from day to night. press • Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384 Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you want your report. setting. Vehicle. which meets the Turn Automatic Reminders on and off following conditions. Health Report in this chapter. • Each file must be 1.gif. Press ? .bmp for more information on these selections.png. Sound You can find more information on Vehicle Press the Settings icon > Sound. Vehicle Health Report Only the photograph(s). This feature also allows Bass you to adjust screen brightness using the instrument panel dimming control. You must access the photos * either from your USB mass storage device Your vehicle may not have this sound or from an SD card. See then select from the following: Information (page 375). 332 C-MAX (CCG) . . . display: and set the mileage interval at which you • Compatible file formats are as follows: would like to receive the reports. • Vehicle Health Report To access.5 MB or less. press the Settings • Rear View Camera icon > Display > Edit E142607 Wallpaper.jpg. * DSP Uploading Photos for Your Home * Screen Wallpaper Occupancy Mode Note: You cannot load photos directly from Speed Compensated Volume your camera. When done making your selections.

and while charging. E142607 E142607 then select from the following settings: 1. See High Voltage Battery (page 146). Charge Status: Illuminates when opening doors or pressing the unlock button on your remote. You can find more information on the rear view camera in another chapter. When prompted. navigation and wireless settings. voice features. enter a four-digit PIN. and you need to View Camera (page 168). the system locks until you enter the PIN again. 333 C-MAX (CCG) . opening doors. pressing the unlock button on your remote. • Guidelines. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Rear View Camera. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle > Enable Valet Mode. enter 3681 and the system unlocks. After you press Continue. Press the Settings icon > Settings > System. reset the PIN. then select from the lock and unlock the system. following: Charge point light ring On Illuminates when plugging in. Note: Details on the charge port light ring System functions are in another chapter. Limited Cord Acknowledgement: Illuminates when plugging in. Vehicle > Charge Point Light E142607 You can create your own four-digit PIN to Ring. No information is accessible until the Press the Settings icon > system is unlocked with the correct PIN. as well as phone. • Rear Camera Delay • Visual Park Aid Alert 2. Off Does not illuminate. Enable Valet Mode Charge Point Light Ring Valet mode allows you to lock the system. See Rear Note: If the system locks. then select Settings E142607 from the following: Access and adjust system settings.

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) System Language Select to have the touchscreen display in English. Install Applications Install any downloaded applications or view the current software licenses. The system simply makes a best guess at your request with these turned off. Keyboard Layout Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or ABC format. Voice Control Press the Settings icon > Settings > Voice Control. then E142607 select from the following: Voice control Interaction Mode Standard interaction mode provides more detailed inter- action and guidance. 334 C-MAX (CCG) . Touch Screen Button Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touchscreen. System Prompt Volume Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system. Temperature Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit. This erases all personal settings and personal data. Spanish or French. Master Reset Select to restore factory defaults. Media Candidate Lists Candidate lists are possible results from your voice commands. Distance Select to display units in kilometers or miles. Confirmation Prompts Have the system ask you short questions if it has not * clearly heard or understood your request. Advanced mode has less audible interaction and more tone prompts. Touch Panel Button Beep Select to have the system beep to confirm button choices made through the climate or audio system.

Index Bluetooth Audio When this feature is on. * Even with confirmation prompts turned off. Gracenote Database Info This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database. This feature defaults to Media Player. the system automatically indexes Devices media on your connected Bluetooth device. This overrides information from your device. disconnect. the Gracenote Database supplies metadata information for your music files. Navigation Press the Settings icon > Settings > Navigation. add or delete a device. Gracenote Mgmt With this feature on. then E142607 select from the following: 335 C-MAX (CCG) . This allows you to listen to music during the indexing process. Bluetooth Devices Select to connect. When this feature is off. Cover Art Priority With this feature on. the system does not automatically switch to the inserted media source. the Gracenote Database supplied cover art for your music files. the system may occasionally ask you to confirm settings Media Player Press the Settings icon > Settings > Media Player. the system automatically switches to the media source upon initial connection. then E142607 select from the following: Media player Autoplay When this feature is on. This overrides any art from your device. You can also set a device as your favorite so that the system automatically attempts to connect to that device at every ignition cycle. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Voice control Phone Candidate Lists Candidate lists are possible results from your voice commands. This feature defaults to off. Voice Control Volume This allows you to adjust the system’s voice volume level. The system simply makes a best guess at your request with these turned off.

Route Preferences Choose to have the system display the Shortest. medium or high cost for the calculated Eco Route. the longer the time allotment is for the route. Have the system avoid freeways. The higher the setting. Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes. If you set Always Use Preferred Route to Yes. Always Use Preferred Route bypasses route selection in destination programming. Turn the Parking POI notification on and off. Have the system display incident icons. Traffic Preferences Have the system display areas where roadwork occurs. Have the system automatically fill-in State/Province information. Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or bottom to top. The system only calculates one route based on the preferred route setting. 336 C-MAX (CCG) . MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Navigation Map Preferences Turn breadcrumbs on and off. Have the system avoid ferries or car trains. Have the system display any smog alerts. the system uses the selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination. Eco Time Penalty allows you to select a low. Have the system display weather warnings. Navigation Preferences Have the system use guidance prompts. Have the system avoid tollroads. Have the system display areas where snow and ice on the road may occur. Fastest or most Ecological route first. Have the system display areas where difficult driving conditions may occur.

You can also choose to adjust your settings or have the system always connect. 911 Assist Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. Avoid Areas Enter specific areas that you would like to avoid on planned navigation routes. such as automatic phonebook download. text to speech. Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announce- ments. Phone Press the Settings icon > Settings > Phone. then select E142607 from the following: Phone Bluetooth Devices Connect. Press ? for more information. re-download your phonebook. Select to make your connection profile with the personal area network or to turn off your connection. 337 C-MAX (CCG) . text message notifications are also suppressed and do not ring inside your vehicle. disconnect. With this feature turned on. as well as save it as a favorite.alert tone. or have it be silent. Manage Phonebook Access features. add or delete a device. Do Not Disturb Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring inside your vehicle. never connect when roaming or query on connect. or have it be silent. Bluetooth Turn Bluetooth on and off. Roaming Warning Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode. beep. add contacts from your phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook. text to speech. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Navigation Have the system display where there may be reduced visibility. Text Message Notification Select the type of notification for text messages . you can adjust your internet data connection. Phone Ringer Select the type of notification for phone calls .ring tone. beep. See Information (page 375). Internet Data Connection If compatible with your phone.

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Wireless & Internet feature. connect to a network. thereby allowing other devices networking and if you park outside a (such as personal computers or phones) wireless hotspot. in your vehicle to speak to each other. Choose a Wireless Network allows you to use a previ- ously stored wireless network. You can categorize by alphabetical listing. You can also choose to search for a network. Using this Wi-Fi Press the Settings icon > Settings > Wireless & E142607 Internet. Make sure you turn it on for connectivity purposes. share files or play games. everyone in your vehicle can also gain access the internet if you have a USB Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that mobile broadband connection inside your creates a wireless network within your vehicle. Gateway (Access Point) Settings allows you to view and change settings for using SYNC as the internet gateway. disconnect from a network. file transfer and internet browsing. priority and signal strength. then select from the following: Wi-fi Wi-Fi Settings Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode turns the Wi-Fi feature on and off in your vehicle. prioritize a network or delete a network. This forms the local area network within your vehicle for things. Press ? for more information. Gateway (Access Point) Device List allows you to view recent connections to your Wi-Fi system. your phone supports personal area vehicle. Gateway (Access Point) Mode makes SYNC an access point for a phone or a computer when turned on. such as game playing. receive more information. 338 C-MAX (CCG) .

then select from the following: E142607 E142626 CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Bluetooth Settings Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving you your typical Bluetooth options to connect. disconnect. (USB mobile broadband settings may not display if the device is already on. your system can also use a USB mobile broadband connection to access the internet. (You must turn on your mobile broadband device on your personal computer before connecting it to the system. Carrier. delete and add device. you do not see this button. Phone Number. If your vehicle is not equipped with navigation. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG. User Name and Password. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Wi-fi USB Mobile Broadband Instead of using Wi-Fi. set as favorite. System Information Touchscreen system serial number Your vehicle identification number (VIN) Touchscreen system software version Navigation system version Map database version 339 C-MAX (CCG) . Prioritize Connection Choose your connection methods and change them as Methods needed. Help Where Am I? View your vehicle's current location. if your vehicle is equipped with navigation.) This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area for your USB mobile broadband connection.) You can select the following: Country. The Help Wi-Fi Press the Settings icon > Help. You can select to Change Order and have the system either always attempt to connect using a USB mobile broadband or using Wi-Fi.

The system provides allowable voice commands for the current mode. See Informa- tion (page 375). The numbers then appear as options on this screen for the ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons. 340 C-MAX (CCG) . say "Help". Voice Command List View categorized lists of voice commands. 911 Assist Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. Driving Restrictions Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is moving. then. In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: allows you to save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access if there is an emergency. To access Help using the voice commands. after the tone. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Help Sirius satellite radio ESN Gracenote Database Information and Library version Software Licenses View the licenses for any software and applications installed on your system. Select Edit to access your phonebook and then select the desired contacts. press the voice button. The ICE contacts you select appear at the end of the 911 Assist call process.

if you are currently listening to audio on an SD card. H Radio memory presets and CD controls. you can browse all the artists that are stored on your USB device. FM 2 and FM AST C SIRIUS D CD E USB F Touch this button to scroll down for more options. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) ENTERTAINMENT A B G C D E H F E161892 A AM 1 and AM AST B FM 1. E142599 you can say: 341 C-MAX (CCG) . When listening to audio on a device. Note: Some features may not be available Browsing Device Content in your area. Contact an authorized dealer for more information. such as SD Card. When prompted. having to change sources. BT Stereo and A/V In G These buttons change with the media mode you are in. you You can access these options using the can browse through other devices without touchscreen or voice commands. For example. Press the voice icon on the steering wheel.

9-107. * If you only say. Sample commands ** This command is only usable if you have "<87. you can then say any commands in the following chart.9>" * "<Sirius category> channels" "Play [album] <name>"** ** "SD card" "Play [artist] <name>"** * "Sirius Channel Guide" "Play [genre] <name>"** ** "USB" "Play [playlist] <name>"** "Help" * "Play [song] <name>"** This command is only usable if you have an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite "Play <name>" radio. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Your voice system allows you to change "BROWSE" within devices audio sources with a simple voice command. if you are listening "Browse" * to music on a USB device. 342 C-MAX (CCG) . "Browse". "Browse <Sirius category> channels" The following voice commands are "Browse SD card" available at the top level of the voice session no matter which current audio "Browse Sirius channel guide" ** source you are listening to (such as a USB device or SIRIUS satellite radio). see the "SD Card and USB Port" section of this chapter. ** "Play <name (song or album)> by <artist For more commands in SD card or USB name>" mode. then want to switch to a satellite radio channel.9>" an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite radio. For example. "<530-1710>" "<Channel name>"* "BROWSE" * "AM <530-1710>" "<League> Games" "FM <87. simply "Browse <league> games" ** press the voice button on the steering wheel controls and say the name of the ** SIRIUS station (such as. "the Highway").9-107. "Browse USB" Note: This is only available when your "Help" MyFord Touch system language is set to North American English.

appears on-screen when HD Radio is active. crystal-clear on. When you are button illuminates when the feature is on. AM/FM Radio Set PTY for Seek/Scan Touch the AM or FM tab to listen to the radio. if AM or FM radio station. "Play • Speed Compensated Volume. the information transfers. You can To change between AM and FM presets. the tags appear to remind you of the songs you would like to download. 343 C-MAX (CCG) . There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. stations playing that category. where This feature is available when HD Radio is available. and allows you to tag a song to sound. The light on the supported by your device. • Balance and Fade ** The commands that have [ ] around the • DSP (Digital Signal processing) word means that the word is optional. providing free. then choose to either seek or scan for the just touch the AM or FM tab. Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. if you say. When you plug in your portable music Touch this button to go to the next strong player. You can touch TAG to save the Scan information of the song that is playing. This allows you to select a category of E142611 music you would like to search for. of the memory preset areas. See HD Radio information later in download later. AST (Autostore) allows you to have the HD Radio system automatically store the six strongest stations in your current location. TAG this chapter. When you select On. HD Radio allows you to receive radio broadcasts digitally. For • Occupancy Mode example. The light on the button illuminates when the TAG Button feature is on. AST Sound returns when finished. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Sample commands Options "Sirius <0-223>"* Sound Settings Touch this button to adjust settings for: "Sports games"* • Bass * This command is only usable if you have • Midrange an active subscription to SIRIUS satellite • Treble radio. connected to iTunes. See HD Radio information later in this chapter. "Play Metallica". this is the same as the voice command. [artist] <name>". Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings. RDS Text Display Memory Presets This allows you to view the information Save a station by pressing and holding one broadcast by FM stations.

com.ca or The HD Radio logo blinks when acquiring www. touch distortion. When you hear a song you like. multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are only available digitally. see www. system. Press AM or FM > Options > TAG broadcasts provide a better sound quality Button > On. guide to available stations and 3. The system automatically you may notice the following indicators on transfers the tag to your player (if your screen: already connected) and a pop-up confirms the transfer. you may also see Title and Artist fields on-screen. desired station number. Other available in all markets. HD1 signifies the main HD Radio™ Information (If Available) programming status and is available in Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not analog and digital broadcasts. than analog broadcasts with free. For a list of devices that support tagging. the tags appear to you as a reminder. 344 C-MAX (CCG) .com. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Direct Tune The multicast indicator appears in FM mode (only) if the current station is Touch this button to manually enter the broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts. Digital 1. HD Radio technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio.ca. The system automatically saves the programming.SYNCMyRide. 4. Touch Enter when The highlighted numbers signify available you are done. When you access iTunes with your portable music player.syncmaroute.hdradio. E142616 www. and a TAG. crystal-clear audio and no static or 2. To turn the feature on and use it: broadcasts. When this logo is available. a digital station and stays solid when digital audio is playing.SYNCMyRide. For more information. Your TAG allows you to save a song to system has a special receiver that allows download later when you are on an it to receive digital broadcasts (where acquired HD Radio station and the feature available) in addition to the analog is on. The system allows you to tag up to approximately 100 songs. your portable music player (if When HD Radio is on and you tune to a supported) when you connect it to the station broadcasting HD Radio technology. digital channels where new or different content is available. it already receives. please visit song's information and transfers it to www.

it shifts to the digital version. the sound mutes before the has a digital broadcast. although it does not Sound returns when finished. In order to provide the best possible experience. you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area. the station may mute due to weak signal strength. You may switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory see the HD logo appear if the station preset. 345 C-MAX (CCG) . MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) When HD Radio broadcasts are active. the system switches back to the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again. reception is on. you • Memory presets allow you to save an can access the following functions: active channel as a memory preset. the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again. • Scan allows you to hear a brief Touch and hold a memory preset slot sampling of all available stations. These stations are responsible for ensuring all audio streams and data fields are accurate. if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast channels. digital audio plays. it first plays the station in the analog version. This until the sound returns. you may hear a slight sound change when the station changes from analog to digital. Depending on the station quality. use the contact form to report any station issues found while listening to a station broadcasting with HD Radio technology. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound. If you are listening to HD1. Independent entities own and operate each station. Station blending When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2- HD7 multicast stations). HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Reception area If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area. However. Note: As with any saved radio station. because the system has to reacquire the digital signal. When scan for HD2-HD7 channels. There is a brief feature still works when HD Radio mute while the radio saves the station. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station.

This is poor time alignment No action required. Ford Motor prompted. responsible for the content sent using HD Radio technology. HD Radio and the HD and press the voice button on the HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks E142599 steering wheel controls. reception issue may clear up as you continue to drive. skip or repeat in audio. Direct Tune.S. added or deleted at any time at the station owner's discretion. Content may be changed. the audio is avail- able. This is delay when selecting HD2 or available until the HD Radio normal behavior. say any of the following Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. foreign patents. Once the audio is available. below. multicast preset or broadcast is decoded.ibiquity. HD2-HD7 channel search. * HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables No action required. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Potential station issues Issues Cause Action Echo. normal behavior. broadcast issue. U. * http://www. * There is no text information Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue shown for currently selected radio broadcaster. form at website listed audio. analog and digital audio. 346 C-MAX (CCG) . below. The and out. form at website listed frequency. stutter. When of iBiquity Digital Corp.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences HD Radio Technology manufactured under Radio Voice Commands license from iBiquity Digital Corp. are not commands. Cannot access HD2 or HD3 The previously stored No action required. This is a Increase or decrease in by the radio broadcaster. Wait until HD3. decoded. and If you are listening to the radio. Text information does not Data service issue by the Fill out the station issue match currently playing radio broadcaster. This is when Scan is pressed. audio volume. current reception area. There is an audio mute The digital multicast is not No action required. direct tune. Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The multicast channel when multicast preset or direct station is not available in recalling a preset or from a tune is not available in your your current location.

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) If you are not listening to the radio.9> HD" 1 If you have said "Browse".9> HD <#>" 2 "Browse" "AM" "FM" "AM <530-1710>" "FM <87.9> HD <#>" "AM autoset preset <#>" "FM autoset" "AM preset <#>" "FM autoset preset <#>" "FM" "FM preset <#>" "FM <87.9-107.9-107.9> HD <#>" "FM 1 preset <#>" "FM autoset" "FM 2" "FM autoset preset <#>" "FM 2 preset <#>" "FM preset <#>" 1 "HD <#>" "FM 1" "Preset <#>" "FM 1 preset <#>" "Radio off" "FM 2" "Radio on" "FM 2 preset <#>" 347 C-MAX (CCG) . 2 "<87. "AM <530-1710>" "TUNE" "AM autoset" "<530-1710>" "AM autoset preset <#>" "<87.9-107. see the "Browse" chart later in this section.9-107.9>" "AM autoset" 1 "FM <87.9-107. press "RADIO" the voice button and. 3 "Tune" "RADIO" "Help" "<87. after the tone. "<530-1710>" 3 If you have said "Tune".9-107.9>" "AM preset <#>" * "<87. then any of the following "Set PTY" commands.9-107. say "Radio". see the following "AM" "Tune" chart.9-107.9>" 1 If available.9>" "FM 1" * "FM <87.

The system alerts you when it This allows you to select a category of plays again on any channel. change or reset your PIN or erases the previous audio. Sound Settings SIRIUS® Satellite Radio (If Activated) Touch this button to adjust settings for: • Bass Press the lower left corner of the touchscreen. To use this feature. While in replay mode: • Press and release the seek buttons to Artist/Title/Team Alerts hear the previous or next song. music you would like to search for. you can choose to • Press Replay to return to live audio if you have been using the feature to replay audio. Replay audio on the current channel. "Preset <#>" Options "Help" Touch this button to view and adjust * various media settings. There is • Speed Compensated Volume. When an alert appears on the screen. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) "TUNE" Scan * Touch this button to hear a brief sampling "HD <#>" of channels. ALERT Set Category for Seek/Scan Save the current song. Press Edit Alerts • Press play or pause to play or pause to delete or turn off alerts. You can also the audio. You can then choose to either seek or scan for the Replay stations playing that category. playing on other channels. or team as a favorite. and then select the • Midrange E142611 SIRIUS tab. Changing stations channels. 348 C-MAX (CCG) . Sound returns when finished. This feature allows you to select Artists. If available. which is 1234. a brief mute while the radio saves the channel. • Press and hold the seek buttons to Titles and Teams that you would like the reverse or fast forward in the current system to alert you to when they are track. set all alerts to on or off. • Treble • Balance and Fade Memory Presets • DSP (Digital Signal processing) Save a channel by pressing and holding • Occupancy Mode one of the memory preset areas. You Parental Lockout can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you have remained tuned This allows you to lock and unlock to the current station. Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings. artist. unlock all channels. you need your initial PIN.

Ford Motor responsible for any such programming Company shall not be responsible for Alert changes. subscription-based satellite radio service that broadcasts a variety of music. and its prices. Scroll to see more For more information on extended categories. hardware and a limited subscription term that begins on the date of sale or lease of Browse your vehicle. 1-888-539-7474. Direct Tune news.siriusxm. If you are listening to a sporting event. sports. See an authorized dealer for availability. Touch Title or Artist to see song and Note: This receiver includes the eCos artists on other stations. modify or track your satellite radio account. To access your E142593 ESN. and channel. Touch this button to view a list of all available stations. Touch SIRIUS > Options. Your factory-installed desired satellite channel number. or adding particular channels. with or without notice to you.sirius.com in the United States. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Tune to the channel. Touch the station you want to subscription terms (a service fee is listen to. real-time operating system. required). other features. the online media player and a Touch Skip if you want to skip this list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels. please visit www. rearrange. feature variation. Note: SIRIUS does not support the Alert Ford Motor Company shall not be feature on all channels.ca in Canada. add or delete when they are playing on a satellite radio programming including canceling. or call SIRIUS at listen to this channel. you can save your favorite Note: SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right teams so that the system can alert you to change. eCos is published under the eCos License. touch the bottom left corner of the SIRIUS satellite radio is a touchscreen. Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to www. weather. moving channel. The ESN is on the System Information Screen (SR ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). Touch SIRIUS satellite radio system includes Enter when you are done. Electronic Serial Number (ESN) You need your ESN to activate. to Cancel the alert or SIRIUS Satellite Radio Information to Disable Alerts. 349 C-MAX (CCG) . traffic and entertainment Touch this button to manually enter the programming. at any time.

Station overload When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower. mountains. The signal is lost from the The signal is blocked. antenna. or with an igni- tion key cycle. This two seconds to produce message should disappear audio for the selected shortly. See an authorized dealer for service.. clear shortly. 539-7474 to subscribe to the channel. tower to your vehicle the signal should return.. freeway overpasses. choose another preset. Troubleshooting tips Radio display Cause Action Acquiring. bridges.Your display may show ACQUIRING. or tune to another channel. a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio system may mute. keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible. your receiver may have a fault. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) SIRIUS Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting Potential reception issues Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance. Satellite radio signal interfer. 350 C-MAX (CCG) . No Signal. The channel is no longer Tune to another channel or available.. or system failure present. tall buildings. Unsubscribed Channel. Radio requires more than No action required. tunnels. dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception. Terrain Hills. Your subscription does not Contact SIRIUS at 1-888- include this channel. Invalid Channel. Sat Fault/SIRIUS System There is an internal module If this message does not Failure. When SIRIUS satellite or SIRIUS you move into an open area. channel. parking garages. to indicate the ence interference and the audio system may mute..

The programming in progress. SIRIUS has updated the No action required. Your satellite service is no Contact SIRIUS at 1-888- 7474. channels available for your vehicle. Check Channel All the channels in the Use the channel guide to Guide. process may take up to three minutes. * "Sports game" ** "SIRIUS" "Tune" "<Channel name>" "Help" "Preset <#>" * If you have said "Sports game". longer available. press the voice E142599 button on the steering wheel "SAT 3 preset <#>" controls. say any of the following commands. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Troubleshooting tips Radio display Cause Action Updating. Subscription Updated. "SIRIUS" SIRIUS Satellite Radio Voice Commands "SAT 2 preset <#>" If you are listening to SIRIUS "SAT 3" satellite radio. selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip skipped or locked. Update of channel No action required. see the following "SAT preset <#>" "Tune" chart. "SAT 1" "SAT 1 Preset <#>" "SAT 2" 351 C-MAX (CCG) . after the tone. then any of the "Sirius on" following commands. "Sirius <0-223>" If you are not listening to SIRIUS satellite "Sirius off" radio. 539-7474 to resolve subscription issues. see the "SAT" following "Sports game" chart. None found. Call SIRIUS 1-888-539. ** If you have said "Tune". function on that station. say "SIRIUS". When prompted. press the voice button and.

"Sirius <0-223>" Compression "Help" Touch this button to turn the compression feature on and off. and then select the available CD tracks. after the tone. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Shuffle "SPORTS GAME" Touch this button to play the tracks or "Tune to the <college name> game" entire albums in random order. "TUNE" Options "<Channel Name>" Sound Settings "Preset <#>" Touch this button to adjust settings for: "SAT" • Bass • Midrange "SAT 1" • Treble "SAT 1 preset <#>" • Balance and Fade "SAT 2" • DSP (Digital Signal processing) • Occupancy Mode "SAT 2 preset <#>" • Speed Compensated Volume. say "CD". or turn the feature off if already on. say any of the following commands. "SAT 3" Note: Your vehicle may not have all these "SAT 3 preset <#>" sound settings. "Tune to the <team name> game" More Info "Help" Touch this button to see disc information. Touch this button to repeat the currently playing track. press the the feature off if already on. voice button and. CD Voice Commands You can also advance and reverse the current track or current folder. all tracks on the disc or turn If you are not listening to a CD. When prompted. E142611 CD tab. if applicable. "Tune to the <team city> game" Scan "Tune to the <team city> <team name> game" Touch this button to hear a brief sampling of all available tracks. If you are listening to a CD. CD Browse Press the lower left corner of the Touch this button to look through all touchscreen. then any of the following commands. 352 C-MAX (CCG) . press the voice button on the steering E142599 Repeat wheel controls.

To remove the SD card. and "Repeat track" then select SD Card from the list on the left side of the screen. LLC. press the card in and the system ejects it. press the lower left corner of the touchscreen. See Navigation (page 387). SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C. "Shuffle" * "Shuffle CD" * "Shuffle folder" "Shuffle off" "Help" * E142620 This applies to WMA or MP3 files only. SD Card Slot and USB Port SD Card Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded. To access "Repeat off" and play music from your device. 353 C-MAX (CCG) . Do not attempt to pull the card to remove it as this could cause damage. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) "CD" "Pause" "Play" "Play next track" "Play previous track" "Play track <1-512>" E142619 "Repeat" The SD card slot is located either in the * center console or behind a small access "Repeat folder" door in the instrument panel. Note: The navigation system also uses this card slot.

artist name.000 songs. To access Touch this button to view and adjust and play music from your device. you must have a special • DSP (Digital Signal processing) combination USB/RCA composite video cable (which you can buy from Apple). Insert your device and select the Device Information displays software SD Card or USB tab once the and firmware information about the E142611 system recognizes it. Note: Your vehicle may not have all these sound settings. More Info Touch this button to see disc information such as current track. You can currently connected media device. available for all media on the device. press the various media settings. • Treble In order to playback video from your iPod • Balance and Fade or iPhone. 354 C-MAX (CCG) . flash drives • Bass or thumb drives. Playing Music from Your Device Media Player Settings allows you to Note: The system is capable of indexing up select more settings. Sound Settings allows you to adjust settings for: This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices. See Settings (page 330). plug the other end into both the RCA jacks and the USB port. and charge devices if they • Midrange support this feature. • Occupancy Mode When you connect the cable to your iPod • Speed Compensated Volume. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) USB Port Shuffle Touch this button to play music on the selected album or folder in random order. which is under Media to 30. album E142621 and genre. The USB ports are located either in the Options center console or behind a small access door in the instrument panel. Similar Music This feature allows you to choose music similar to what is currently playing. then select from the following options: Update Media Index indexes your device when you connect it for the first time and Repeat each time the content changes (such as adding or removing tracks) to make sure This feature replays the currently playing you have the latest voice commands song or album. lower left corner of the touchscreen. or iPhone. Player. memory sticks.

Artist. ** If you are not listening to a USB device or "Play video <name>" an SD card. "Play playlist <name>" your vehicle's transmission must be in "Play podcast <name>" position P with the ignition in accessory mode. touch the on-screen album art. Album. such as genre. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) Browse "USB" or "SD CARD" This feature allows you to view the "Play artist <name>" contents of the device. say "USB" or "SD card". It also allows you to search by categories. press the voice button and. ** after the tone. ** "Play video podcast episode <name>" "USB" or "SD CARD" "Play video playlist <name>" ** * "Browse" "Previous" "Next" "Repeat all" "Pause" "Repeat off" "Play" "Repeat one" "Play album <name>" "Shuffle" "Play all" "Shuffle album" 355 C-MAX (CCG) . "Play similar music" SD Card and USB Voice Commands "Play song <name>" If you are listening to a USB ** device or an SD card. say any "Play TV show episode <name>" of the following commands. ** "Play music video <name>" Playing Video from Your Device To access and play video from your device. and "Play composer <name>" Genre. See Starting and Stopping the "Play podcast episode <name>" Engine (page 124). "Play author <name>" If you want to view song information such as Title. Folder. File. "Play audiobook <name>" artist or album. press the "Play TV show <name>" E142599 voice button on the steering ** wheel controls. "Play folder <name>" You can also touch What’s Playing to hear how the system pronounces the "Play genre <name>" current band and song. This can be helpful when using voice commands to make sure "Play movie <name>" ** the system correctly plays your request. "Play video podcast <name>" then any of the following commands. When prompted.

Formats * "All movies" and Metadata Information "All music videos" * SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any digital media player. which are descriptive software identifiers embedded "All video playlists" * in the media files. and most USB drives. "All songs" It is also able to organize your indexed media from your playing device by "All TV shows" * metadata tags. Supported audio formats "All podcasts" include MP3. ** These commands are only available in "Genre <name>" USB mode and are device-dependent. the system prompts you to specify what you would like to "Composer <name>" browse. * "All video podcasts" 356 C-MAX (CCG) . including iPod. "All playlists" Zune™. WAV and AAC. When prompted. "All genres" Supported Media Players. provide information about the file. see the following "Folder <name>" "Browse" chart. plays from device players. Metadata tags. "Playlist <name>" "BROWSE" "Podcast <name>" "Album <name>" "TV show <name>" * "All albums" * "Video <name>" "All artists" * "Video playlist <name>" "All audiobooks" * "All authors" "Video podcast <name>" "All composers" "Help" * "All folders" This command is only available in USB mode and is device-dependent. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) "USB" or "SD CARD" "BROWSE" "Shuffle off" "All videos" * "What's this?" "Artist <name>" "Help" "Audiobook <name>" * If you have said you would like to browse "Author <name>" your USB or SD card. WMA.

you use extreme caution when using any red and white and are located either device that may take your focus off the behind a small access door on the road. say "Next song". E142622 A/V Inputs Your A/V inputs allow you to connect an WARNINGS auxiliary audio/video source (such as a Driving while distracted can result in gaming systems or a personal camcorder) loss of vehicle control. Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands If you are listening to a Bluetooth audio device. such as the center Your system allows you to stream audio console or the glove box. Your primary responsibility is the safe instrument panel or in your center console. voice-operated systems when possible. when your over your vehicle's speakers from your vehicle is moving. operation of your vehicle. If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio device. In order to playback video from your iPod Make sure you are aware of all applicable or iPhone. For safety reasons. "Play" or "Previous song". When prompted. The jacks are yellow. press the voice button and. you must have a special local laws that may affect the use of combination USB/RCA composite video electronic devices while driving. We strongly recommend that to these input jacks. which may increase the risk of serious To access. cable (which you can buy from Apple). MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) If your indexed media files contain no WARNINGS information embedded in these metadata against the use of any handheld device tags. Bluetooth-enabled cellular become projectiles in a crash or sudden phone. "Play" or "Previous song". Bluetooth Audio Store the portable music player in a secure location. stop. "Pause". The audio extension cable must be corner on the touchscreen. after the tone. plug the other end into both the portable music player while your RCA jacks and the USB port. We recommend 357 C-MAX (CCG) . say "Next song". do not connect When you connect the cable to your iPod or adjust the settings on your or iPhone. SYNC may classify the empty while driving and encourage the use of metadata tags as Unknown. press the voice E142599 button on the steering wheel control. crash and by connecting RCA cords (not included) injury. player to be safely stored while your vehicle is moving. "Pause". Hard objects may connected. then long enough to allow the portable music E142611 select the BT Stereo tab. vehicle is moving. press the lower left injury.

or iPhone. radio and correctly with devices that have a portable music player. headphones. The jack only works 1. Press the lower left corner on the media player.) 358 C-MAX (CCG) . You also need an Troubleshooting audio extension cable with stereo male 1/8-inch (3. Adjust the sound on your portable auxiliary input jack to play music from your music player until it reaches the level portable music player over your vehicle's of the FM station or CD by switching speakers. Switch off the vehicle. or Pause) over the attached portable 6. Plug in your 1/8 inch (3. Attach one end of the audio extension to match the volume of the CD or FM cable to the headphone output of your radio as this causes distortion and player and the other end into the reduces sound quality. • Control the portable media player in the same manner when used with 4. a line level output. Select either a tuned FM batteries in the portable media player.5 back and forth between the controls. cable (which you can buy from Apple).5 millimeter) connectors at one • Do not connect the audio input jack to end and a RCA jack at the other. or iPhone. listening levels. replace or recharge the touchscreen. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) You can also use the A/V inputs as an 7. If the problem 3. touchscreen. Turn the portable music player on and does not provide control (such as Play adjust the volume to ½ the maximum. that it is fully charged. millimeter) RCA adapter into the two left In order to playback video from your iPod A/V input jacks (red and white). you must have a special Press the lower left corner of the combination USB/RCA composite video touchscreen. (You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low. and then select A/V In. Select the A/V In tab. Press the lower left corner on the persists. station or a CD (if there is a CD already loaded into the system). as the auxiliary input jack 5. Set the parking headphone output with a volume brake and put the transmission in control. • Do not set the portable music player's volume level higher than is necessary 2. turn the portable music player volume down. plug the other end into both the make sure that your portable music player is designed for use with headphones and RCA jacks and the USB port. Adjust the volume as desired. adapter in one of the two left A/V input jacks (white or red) inside the center • If the music sounds distorted at lower console. When you connect the cable to your iPod To use the auxiliary input jack feature. position P.

SYNCMyRide. the touchscreen or voice commands. you can access many options using • Caller ID. To check your phone’s compatibility. • Ending a call • Using privacy mode • Dialing a number 359 C-MAX (CCG) .SYNCMyRide.com. MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped) PHONE A B C D E F E161968 A Phone B Quick Dial C Phonebook D History E Messaging F Settings Hands-free calling is one of the main • Redialing features of SYNC. following functions: www. are phone-dependent features. download. such as text messaging many are dependent on your cellular using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook phone’s functionality. see At a minimum.ca. most cellular phones with your phone’s user manual and visit Bluetooth wireless technology support the www.ca or • Answering an incoming call www. While the system supports a variety of features. Other features. Once you pair your • Call waiting notification phone.syncmaroute.

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Pairing Your Phone for the First 5. The display indicates when the pairing
Time is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone
WARNING
options. For more information on your
Driving while distracted can result in phone's capability, see your phone's
loss of vehicle control, crash and manual and visit the website.
injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any Pairing Subsequent Phones
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe Note: Put the transmission in position P.
operation of your vehicle. We recommend Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio.
against the use of any handheld device 1. Press the Phone corner of the
while driving and encourage the use of touchscreen > Settings > BT Devices
voice-operated systems when possible. > Add Device.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable 2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On
local laws that may affect the use of and that your cellular phone is in the
electronic devices while driving. proper mode. See your phone’s manual
if necessary.
The first thing you must do to use the Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN
phone features of SYNC is to pair your appears on your device.
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with
SYNC. This allows you to use your phone 3. If prompted to enter a PIN on your
in a hands-free manner. device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
Note: Put the transmission in position P. displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the
Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio. next step.
1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left 4. When prompted on your phone’s
corner of the touchscreen. Find SYNC display, confirm that the PIN provided
appears on the screen, and instructs by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
you to begin the pairing process from on your cellular phone.
your device.
5. The display indicates when the pairing
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On is successful.
and that your cellular phone is in the
proper mode. See your phone’s manual SYNC may prompt you with more phone
if necessary. options. For more information on your
phone's capability, see your phone's
Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN manual and visit the website.
appears on your device.
3. If prompted to enter a PIN on your Making Calls
device, it does not support Secure
Press the voice button on your
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
steering wheel controls. When
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the E142599
prompted, say, "Call <name>"
next step.
or say "Dial", then the desired number.
4. When prompted on your phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided To end the call or exit phone
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed mode, press this phone button.
E142632
on your cellular phone.

360

C-MAX (CCG)

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

Receiving Calls To turn on contact picture settings, if your
device supports this feature, press Phone
During an incoming call, an audible tone > Settings > Manage Phonebook >
sounds. Call information appears in the Download photos from Phonebook >
display if it is available. On.
Accept the call by pressing
Accept on the touchscreen or History
by pressing this phone button on After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled
your steering wheel controls. phone to SYNC, you can access any
previously dialed, received or missed calls.
Reject the call by pressing
You can also choose to save these to your
Reject on the touchscreen or by
E142632 Favorites or to Quick Dial.
pressing this phone button on
your steering wheel controls. Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
If your phone does not support downloading
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC logs call history using Bluetooth, SYNC keeps
it as a missed call. track of calls made with the SYNC system.
Phone Menu Options Messaging
Press the top left corner on your Send text messages using your
touchscreen to select from the following touchscreen. See Text messaging later
options: in this section.

Phone Settings
Touch this button to access the on-screen Touch this button to access various phone
numerical pad to enter a number and place settings, such turning Bluetooth on and off,
a call. During an active call, you can also managing your phonebook and more. See
choose to: Phone settings later in this section.
• Mute the call
Text Messaging
• Put the call on hold
• Turn on the privacy feature Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
• Join two calls phone-dependent features.
• End the call. Note: Certain features in text messaging
Quick Dial are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
Set up favorite contacts from you 3 mph (5 km/h).
phonebook or history folder. Note: SYNC does not download read text
Phonebook messages from your phone.
You can send and receive text messages
Touch this button to access and call any using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
contacts in your previously downloaded translate text messaging acronyms, such
phone book. The system places the entries as LOL.
in alphabetical categories summarized at
the top of the screen. 1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu.

361

C-MAX (CCG)

MyFord Touch™ (If Equipped)

2. Select Messaging. Text message options
3. Choose from the following:
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there
• Listen (speaker icon) early.
• Dial
I’m outside.
• Send Text
• View I’ll call you when I get there.
• Delete. OK
Composing a Text Message Yes
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature. No
It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h). Thanks
Note: Downloading and sending text Stuck in traffic.
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features. Call me later.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display LOL
to access the Phone menu.
2. Touch Messaging > Send Text. Receiving a Text Message
3. Enter a phone number or choose from Note: If you select View and your vehicle
your phonebook. is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the system
4. You can select from the following offers to read the message to you instead
options: of allowing you to view it while driving.
• Send, which sends the message as it When a new message arrives, an audible
is. tone sounds and the screen displays a
• Edit Text, which allows you to pop-up with the caller name and ID, if
customize the pre-defined message or supported by your phone. You can press:
create a message on your own. • View to view the text message.
You can then preview the message, verify • Listen for SYNC to read the message
the recipient as well as update the to you.
message list. • Dial to call the contact.
• Ignore to exit the screen.
Text message options
Phone Settings
I’ll cal